JP2020127829A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of advancing a game smoothly.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, a time value since the number of game media stored in storage means becomes A (A is natural number) until the number becomes A+1, in execution of storage number increase processing, and a time value since execution start of put-out processing related to M-th game medium (M is natural number and 1≤M≤(N-1)) until execution start of put-out processing related to M+1-th game medium is performed in execution of put-out processing which puts out N pieces of game medium (N is natural number and 2≤N), are different.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

The rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine) starts one game when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. Rotation of multiple rows of rotating drums (reels), and as a result of stopping the rotating drums by making full use of the rotating drum stop device (stop button) to stop the rotating movements, a predetermined pattern on the effective line When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special game state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal game state (a game state in which the lottery probability of a small win or the like is higher than in the normal state) ) Is generally the type that moves to. Here, in the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, when an image for production for enhancing the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel. There is, when operating the spinning stop device etc., it is configured to predict and enjoy the result of the game while comparing the design displayed on the spinning cylinder with the image for effect displayed on the display. There are many things. Also, in many cases, if some abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur in which the progress of the game is stopped. In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and when the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot ( Special game) state, the mainstream is Pachinko game machine that can get a large number of prize balls by opening the big winning opening provided on the game board surface. In the pachinko machine configured in this way, the probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the big hit lottery and the time shortening game state that increases the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery There is also a gaming machine that is provided with the above-mentioned, etc. and enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a game progressing state advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-259862 JP 2005-027874 JP 2002-011142A JP 2005-204844 A JP, 2016-104356, A

It is desired to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed smoothly.

The gaming machine according to this aspect,
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) that is provided corresponding to each reel and that is operated by the player when the rotation of the reel is stopped,
A storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game medium within a predetermined number of ranges,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs effect sound;
It is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the output of the effect,
The main game department is
Role lottery means for executing lottery of roles,
A reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to a winning combination drawing result by the winning combination drawing means when the stop switch is operated,
A storage number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means,
It is possible to execute a payout process for executing a payout of a game medium,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium can be given to the player,
In the situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the storage number increase process is executed. It is configured to execute payout processing without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the storage number increasing process is executed and the payout process is not executed.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium of No. is given, it is configured to execute the payout process after executing the storage number increasing process,
The main game department is
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium addition information can be transmitted to the sub game unit,
The sub-game department
Based on the reception of the game medium giving information, a game medium giving sound, which is an effect sound relating to the giving of the game medium, can be output from the speaker,
In the situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the game medium giving information Based on the reception of the predetermined game medium addition sound (for example, the game medium addition sound output when the credit is increased by 1, the game medium addition sound output when paying out one game medal) Can be output,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the predetermined game medium addition sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium is added, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium addition sound based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
During execution of the storage number increasing process, a time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A+1 and N (N is a natural number, 2≦N ) M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N−1)) M payout process is started during execution of the payout process for paying out game media The game machine is characterized in that the time value until the start of the payout process relating to the game medium of the eyes is different.

According to the gaming machine of this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly advance the game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal insertion slot in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications in the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a reel array list in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a condition device list in the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combinations, re-playing combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the spinning drum type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (second card) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the number-of-remaining-games management process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the game section shift control process on the main control board side in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control processing on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram related to the rotation operation of the reels in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a push order display image diagram in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a sub-main loop process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the sub-power-off process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of 1-command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of start lever operation time effect related determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the battle effect execution availability determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the side of the sub-control board in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT effect production determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a revival possibility production determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a start lever operation time process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT during start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of special precursor processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the specialization processing for additional loading when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the advantageous internal BB internal processing at the time of operating the start lever on the side of the sub-control board in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first-time barrel stop acceptance process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second-time barrel stop acceptance process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third-time-during-drum-stop-time production-related determination processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third-time barrel stop acceptance process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 60 is an operation diagram in a winning game of a re-play applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an operation diagram in a re-winning winning game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram in a game in which a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example has been won. FIG. 63 is an operation diagram in a game in which a re-game is won which is applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a side sectional view showing an outline of a relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view showing an arrangement of a medal auxiliary tank HS and a full detection electrode DE. It is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of a full detection electrode and screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third piece) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a rotation start-time freeze execution determination process on the main control board side in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a freeze-time execution determination process at stop on the main control board side in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-based notification mode applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 79 is an example of a configuration relating to payout, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an action that can be applied to the rotating-body type gaming machine according to the present example, when the settlement button is operated. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of an action that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example, when the settlement button is operated. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of an action that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example and at the time of operating the settlement button. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is the second timing of power-supplying and power-off of the gaming machine. 3 is a timing chart showing the aspect of FIG. FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the setting key switch state in the first mode, the power feeding state, and the situation, and FIG. 89(b) is the setting key switch state in the second mode. 3 is a table showing a relationship between a power supply state and a power supply state. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding the number of credits, a process of paying out a game medal, and a process of outputting a game medium addition sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of an AT state transition control process on the main control board side, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push-order navigation that can be applied to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and when there is no weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push-order navigation which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and when there is no weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push-order navigation that is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and has a weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push-order navigation that is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and has a weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push-order navigation that is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and has a weight in the AT-in-progress state. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of a rotating-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push-order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push-order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push-order navigation, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and includes a voice when there is no weight in the AT state. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push-order navigation that includes the voice when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push-order navi when the push-order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push-order navigation that is applicable to the rotating-body type gaming machine according to the present example and when the push-order bell combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push-order navigation that can be applied to the rotating-body type gaming machine according to the present example and when the push-order bell combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push-order navi that is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example and when the push-order re-game combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push-order navi that is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example and when the push-order re-game combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of a change in the display mode of the reel stop control in the AT-in-progress state and the push-order navigation, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing a detection mode of a game medal detected by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a medal insertion error process on the main control board side, which is applicable to the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of a game medal by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor on the main control board side and the credit addition processing, which is applicable to the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by the chute sensor on the main control board side, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first insertion sensor, the second insertion sensor, and the shoot sensor, which is applicable to the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal returning member that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal returning member that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of the game medals that flow down the medal returning member, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a locus diagram of game medals to be paid out to the medal receiving port, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing a mode of detecting game medals by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of a rotation mode of the disk applicable to the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, from the start of driving the hopper motor to the stop of driving the hopper motor. FIG. 122 is a main control board that can be applied to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment and is used when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during settlement processing. FIG. 11 is a first pattern diagram showing a voice output process on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 123 is a main control board that can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, and in the case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during settlement processing. It is the 2nd pattern diagram showing the audio output processing by the side of a sub-control board based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 124 is a main control board that can be applied to the rotating-body type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment and is used when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the wait period. It is a pattern diagram showing a voice output process on the side of the sub-control board based on a control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a first pattern diagram showing a voice output process on the sub control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 126 shows a case where the communication is restored after the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11B is a second pattern diagram showing the audio output processing on the sub control board side based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 127 is a table relating to the numbers that can be applied to this example.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) for determining some game content in a spinning type gaming machine, in addition to a random number in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and soft random numbers as pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the outcome of the game, specifically, a "winning random number" that is associated with a special role or a winning role (small role, re-gaming role) for shifting to a special game, etc. Can be mentioned. The “CPU” has the same meaning as that well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power interruption (power interruption)" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine has fallen below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated or not. It also includes interruption of power supply due to an unexpected situation such as damage to the unit or power failure. “ROM” has the same meaning as that well known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, “1” if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, conductive If the element configuration does not include "0"). The RAM has the same meaning as that well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is given, “1” is stored, and if not stored, it is not stored). It becomes “0.” It is general that the backup power is supplied to a part or all of the data held in the RAM when the power is cut off). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which a game medal is easy to obtain and is advantageous to the player (so-called big hit game, which corresponds to a bonus game, a first type BB, a second type BB, etc.). ), the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gaming role is a predetermined value, the re-play probability variation gaming state (RT state), the winning combination The reel stop order for winning a prize, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, the ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, and the like can be mentioned. Further, even in the normal game state, the transition probability to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state is different, the high-probability normal game state, the low-probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, the lottery state is called. ) Is mentioned. Further, there is no problem even if the game state is compounded (further, these game states and functions (for example, lottery for transition to AT state, output of notification instruction regarding reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the state relating to the AT and the RT state are individually described, and the RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state relating to the AT is referred to as “normal gaming state”. As a state related to ART, the state related to ART may be collectively referred to as “normal game state”. The "winning combination" is the type of condition device (or condition device number) that has been won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal pouring lottery). The “notification state” is a state relating to an AT capable of executing a push order navigation described later, and even if the condition device wins the condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push-order navigation can be executed, the "notification state" is set. The "counter value" is also referred to as "notifying game executable number", and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, if the "notifying game executable number" is 1 or more (may include the game that has become "0"), the push-order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of notification games that can be executed", the difference number of game media (the number of payout numbers minus the number of insertions) obtained based on the fact that a small role (mainly, the push order bell role) is won, The number of wins for the forward bell role may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and in this example, it is referred to as "addition specialization state". Further, the “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and for example, one game has ended, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) has been won, or the like is a specific condition. The "type 1 special accessory" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols relating to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device relating to winning for each specified number will operate, and is determined in advance. It is operated when it is given, and it is possible to continue the operation until the result of the game of times not exceeding 12 times is obtained, and it may be called RB (regular bonus). The "first-class special accessory continuous actuation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special accessory, and operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is determined in advance. The operation is ended at this time, and may be referred to as a BB (big bonus) or a first type BB. The "second-class special accessory" is an accessory that activates the condition device relating to winning regardless of the result of the lottery, and operates in a predetermined case to obtain the result of one game. The operation is terminated in the case of, and may be referred to as a CB (challenge bonus). "Second-class special accessory continuous operating device" is a device that can continuously operate the second-class special accessory, and operates when a specific symbol combination is displayed and is determined in advance. The operation is ended at this time, and may be referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. "Ordinary character" is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the conditional device related to winning for each specified number will operate, It is supposed to operate when a combination is displayed and end the operation when the result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is considered to be JACIN when the first-class BB combination wins, and is always in RB during execution of the first-class BB. The “JACIN lottery type” is a configuration in which the non-RB and the RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. Further, the "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which pull-in control that may be performed after performing a stop operation is not performed, and is a state in which the reel is stopped at a position closest to the reel position in which the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which the CB is always in operation when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transfer lottery type" is a configuration in which during non-CB and during CB, the second BB is repeatedly executed.

Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, The present invention is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification to one embodiment is a modification to another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, the features (outline) of the rotating-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front surface side of the spinning-roller type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating body type game machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub-control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for allowing the input of a game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, a reel window D160, an insertion number display lamp D210, a start lamp D180, a re-playing lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state display device D250, and a credit number. A display device D200, a payout amount display device (pushing sequence display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a pushing sequence display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous zone display YH, etc. are attached. Further, as a mechanism for allowing the insertion of the game medium and the input of the bet number (bet number), a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling the payout of the inserted game medium are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. In addition, the spinning drum type game machine according to the present embodiment has a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. It is equipped with an operation console that projects to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member that is made of synthetic resin or the like that forms a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be viewed through the reel window D160. In addition, the inserted number display light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting a game medal necessary to start one game) is turned on. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the inserted number display lamp D210 is configured by three LEDs (lamps), a 1 bet lamp D211, a 2 bet lamp D212, and a 3 bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In this case, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off, and when the betted game medals are two, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. : Turn on, 3 bet lamp D213: turn off, and if there are three game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: turn on, 2 bet lamp D212: turn on, 3 bet lamp D213: turn on (replay) However, this is not the case in the next game stopped and displayed, details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is configured by an LED and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (accepts the operation), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (the operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. The re-game lamp D290 is composed of an LED, and is lit when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and is turned off when the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed is finished. Further, the throwable lamp D300 is turned on (or may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective or the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is started. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game state display device D250 is composed of a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. Incidentally, the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts in the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) described later. By configuring so as to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit amount display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as medals owned by the player. The payout amount display device (pushing order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). It is a condition device (a so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a combination with a push order)) in which the winning combination can be different depending on the stop order of D43), but when the winning combination and the symbol combination displayed in a stop are different. Is generally configured so that the profit rate (payout number, subsequent RT state, etc.) given to the player can be different}, the reel that is most advantageous to the player in the game It is configured to notify the stop order (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout amount display device (pushing order display device) D270 is configured so as to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that gives the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not erroneously recognize which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Also, the AT counter value display device D280, according to the push-order navigation display displayed on the push-order display device D270 (which may also be referred to as the first information display unit) among the states related to the AT (details will be described later), plays the game. It is possible to display the number of games that can be stayed in a state relating to the AT that is advantageous for the player when the game progresses (in this example, it may be referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game, which will be described later in detail). It is configured as follows. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games in which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout amount display device (pushing order display device) D270 may be divided into two devices, that is, a payout amount display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when it is the “advantageous zone” and turned off when it is not the “advantageous zone”. See below). Here, in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example, like the conventional rotating body type gaming machine, it is easy to obtain game medals and advantageous to the player in a special game state (so-called big hit game, bonus game And the type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc. are applicable), and the winning rate of the re-playing role is higher (or lower) than that of the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the re-playing role is a predetermined value. The re-play probability variation game state (RT state), which is the state, the reel stop order for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state that can inform the stop position, the RT state and the AT state. A composite ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be adopted, but in addition to these "game states", one of the three "game zones" of "normal zone", "standby zone" and "advantageous zone" Can be set. In this example, the "standby section" is not set, but the game section of either "normal section" or "advantageous section" is set. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively advantageous to the player as compared to the other "gaming section". For example, the "gaming state" is the AT state or the ART state. The “advantageous section” is associated. That is, when the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous zone display YH is turned on. However, as will be described later, the "game zone" setting control is also the "game state" setting control. Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the progress of the game is relatively advantageous to the player depending on whether the advantageous section display YH is turned on or off. It is possible to communicate to the player without lying. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set, but at that time, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly ended (the information for maintaining the state during AT is cleared and initialized), the change in the set "gaming section" also affects the transition to "gaming state". It is possible to automatically suppress the increase in gambling due to the "game state" such as the AT state or the ART state in which the degree of freedom in design is relatively high. Of. As described above, if the “advantageous section” continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the condition for ending the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The ending condition of the "advantageous section" in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example is a push that can obtain the small win with the largest payout number among the small wins that make up the "pressing win (the win-winning win)". Normal navigation 1 time execution (For example, when there are 7, 3, and 1 small wins as the small wins that make up the push forward win, the 7 most paid-out wins is the push forward win. If there is a push forward combination that can obtain 7 or 1 shot depending on the push order and a push forward combination that can obtain 3 shots depending on the push order, a push order navigation that can obtain 3 shots is here. It does not correspond to the push order navigation)" or "win one of BB, RB, MB", and "any end condition (40G 1 set loop lottery is not won (AT), fixed 32G It is a condition to end that "elapsed (premature sign) etc." or "advantageous section 1500G" is satisfied. In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a push order for replay for shifting the RT state, but there is no small combination whose payout number differs depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of "1 push-order navigation that can obtain the small win with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the small wins including the small wins corresponding to the 11 wins and the small wins corresponding to the single wins are configured as the small wins that constitute the push forward win, the "the most payout number is the largest. "Execution of one push order navigator capable of winning a small win" refers to informing a push order in which 11 medals can be won (11 wins can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, a main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of the game medium will be described. The medal insertion slot D170 is a game medal insertion slot, and the game medals inserted into the insertion slot under the condition that the medal can be received are guided to the inside of the gaming machine. Further, as a sensor for detecting the insertion of medals, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and are guided inside the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and it is possible to refund the accumulated medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals returned by the operation of the settlement button D60 are arranged to be paid out to the outlet D240.

<Mechanism for operating reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured so that it can be operated by the player, and the reel operation can be started by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operation can be sequentially stopped by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been done.

<Other mechanism provided on front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to the perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU in FIG. In the front door DU, as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game, a performance display device S40 for displaying a performance such as a notice performance or a background performance, and a game effect lamp D26 (not available) that can be turned on in various lighting modes. (Shown), a door substrate D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a middle panel (medium decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU so that the display section for displaying effects and the like can be visually recognized through the see-through area formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game of the spinning-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are provided on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140. The unit D150 is provided, and the LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). A door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and the door board D receives input signals such as the stop button D40, the start lever D50, and the adjustment button D60. Has a function of a relay board for directly or processing the inputted signal and outputting it to the main control board M described later. Further, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, so that the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 can be detected and easily. It has a function of performing genuine authentication, guiding a proper medal to a hopper H40 described later, and returning an invalid medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console and the lower part of the upper panel D130, and is the panel part including the reel window described above. In addition, the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used for an operation on a menu screen to be described later and a button continuous hit effect on the sub-control board S side (a continuous input operation for the sub-input button SB is performed. It is a member used for the progress of a bonus game), a mini-game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entry into the "AT state"), and the like. The front door DU of the rotating body type game machine P can detect the open/closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medals (or sometimes simply referred to as medals) discharged from the discharge port D240 and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and by inserting a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 (in addition, twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)), It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 (and twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)), the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be released. There is. A bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220. The bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is turned on (or blinks). By doing so, the player can perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. A stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (three stop buttons, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43, respectively), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player confirms that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on whether the stop button lamp S60 is lit (or blinking) and/or the lighting color. Can be perceived by. Since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is lighted in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. If the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, right stop As the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is turned on, the three stop button lamps S60 are configured so that the lighting modes thereof can be different from each other. Further, the push order navigation is executed by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (may be different such as lighting/blinking or slow flashing/fast flashing). In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be stopped at present, for example, all reels are spinning, and the correct pressing order of "left → middle → right" ( When the push order bell that is the maximum payout number) is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button are stopped. When the button lamp is lit in blue and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is extinguished and corresponds to the middle stop button. The stop button lamp may blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be illuminated in blue.

Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base body) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to approximately the center of the back box so that a part of the reel unit can be seen through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. The reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel portion (on the reel strip MO). Then, the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel portion are enabled based on the operation of each stop button of the start lever D50 and the stop button D40. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a reel backlight) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on, the outer circumference of the reel portion It is configured so that the light that has passed through can be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel portion is turned on. Further, above the reel M50, there is stored a below-described spinning drum substrate K for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53).

Further, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. 1 are provided to the left of the reel M50. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, that controls various effects performed by using the above is stored. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting/reset capable of changing a set value and releasing an error. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at appropriate positions on the substrate of the main control substrate M (that is, the front door DU is opened). If it is not provided, it should be provided in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting the inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out the game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning cylinder type game machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the outlet D240. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P is provided on the front surface of the power board E (which may also be referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating body type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, which is a passage for the game medals inserted from the medal insertion opening D170, near the door substrate D, and below the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the game medal ejection opening D240. A coin shooter D90, etc. for guiding The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the size, and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard size, and it is determined that they are not compatible by this function. The formed medals (or other foreign matter) are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When a player inserts a game medal before operating the start lever D50 (while the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standard are selected. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and that do not meet the standards pass through the coin shooter D90 and are returned to the discharge port D240. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is irrespective of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion receiving sensor D10s (inside the flow path), a sensor for inserting a medal, which will be described in detail later, is provided, and when a game medal that meets the dimensional standard and is received passes, the first insertion sensor D20s. Also, the signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and the signal is supplied to the main control board M described later.

Next, a sensor for inserting a medal will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed to turn on and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (for example, a foreign object that does not meet the standard and has a smaller diameter than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal falls down) because the medal cannot be maintained in an upright state, and is returned to the ejection opening D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the throw-in acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even when the on time continues for a predetermined time or more. ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it immediately passes through the first loading sensor D20s and the second loading sensor D30s. This insertion sensor (first insertion sensor D20s and second insertion sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (adjacent to each other with a distance smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition sequence of the on/off combination of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s, etc.) and the on/off time. Is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H operates the settlement button in the state where there are credits (game medals electronically stored in the gaming machine) or bets (medals inserted to start the game). It is activated when the game medals are paid out by winning or winning. When operating, the hopper motor H80 is first driven to rotate the disc H50 about the disc rotation axis H50a. The rotation causes the game medals in the medal payout device H to flow down from the game medal exit H60 toward the exit D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensor (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on/off status of each sensor (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are on. Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition sequence of off combinations, etc.) and the on/off time. More specifically, for example, when normally passing through the game medal exit H60, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70 causes the first payout sensor H10s=OFF and the second payout sensor H20s=OFF to change from the first First payout sensor H10s=OFF, second payout sensor H20s=OFF→first payout sensor H10s=ON, second payout sensor H20s=OFF→first payout sensor H10s=ON, second payout sensor H20s=ON→first payout Sensor H10s=OFF, second payout sensor H20s=ON, first payout sensor H10s=OFF, second payout sensor H20s=OFF, so that a movement contrary to this sensor status transition is detected. , An error can be exemplified.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating body type gaming machine in the present embodiment. In the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, and the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 all have 20 pieces. The winning line is one line of "upper left reel M51, lower middle reel M52, lower middle reel M53". The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is “re-play combination→small combination (bell, watermelon, etc.)→bonus”. For example, when the re-play combination and bonus are established at the same time, , The symbol combination to be the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, if the bell and watermelon are established, if you press the stop button at a position where both can be pulled in (positions within 4 frames to the winning stop position), the small winning combination with a large number of payouts will be given priority. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, horizontal 3 lines, diagonal 2 lines 5). There is no problem even if the line is changed to one line of the left reel M51 lower tier, the middle reel M52 middle tier, and the right reel M53 upper tier. In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small win is awarded, in which different profits are given to the player depending on the push order, a small win with a large number of payouts when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is controlled so that it is preferentially pulled in (number of sheets priority control), and when an incorrect answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order is operated, a stop display is possible (at a position within 4 frames from the stop operation). Among the symbols (arranged), the control of pulling in the symbols (the number-of-priority control) is performed to increase the winning possibility (the highest possibility of winning among a plurality of symbol combinations that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a reel array list of the spinning drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 (0 to 19), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", " There are 10 types of sheep, “blank”, “bell”, “replay A”, “replay B”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “cherry”. Here, "blank" is a symbol included in a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination like other symbols, does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning symbol, but a symbol that constitutes a winning symbol including "blank" As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B/Replay A/Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased or decreased.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, either The one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the activated line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not available on the activated line, it is easy for the player to see the same symbols in a line on lines other than the activated line (in the case of a watermelon, the middle symbol is not shown). It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on one of the reels, such as aligned in a horizontal line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols to be a first-class BB combination (which is a so-called first-class special accessory that is a continuous accessory operating device, but may be simply referred to as a BB combination hereinafter), 1 type BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and finished after paying out more than 264 sheets), and "Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated, 132 sheets are operated. "Black Seven/Black Seven/Black Seven", which will be completed when the payout exceeds the limit, and "White Seven/White Seven, which will be the first type BB-C (continuously operating RB-B and ended when the payout exceeds 132 sheets). It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first-class BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the character object operates), one game is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. The lottery table is referred to, and a winning combination (small winning combination, re-playing combination) other than the prize is configured to be drawn (a method in which the table to be referred to in the combination drawing is not switched during execution of one BB). , And may be hereinafter referred to as an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first-class BB winning combination is not limited to this, and the table to be referred to in the winning combination lottery may be switched during execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination which is the replay 04 corresponding to Nos. 14 to 16 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state, see See below). Since "RT0" is more unfavorable to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as falling. Further, when the symbol combination which is the replay game 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and the No. 18 is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay game 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is a condition device for “winning-A1” to “winning-A6” described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the most advantageous pushing order, and the reels are numbered 21-27. Symbol combinations corresponding to "winning prize 01" to "winning prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the most advantageous pressing order for the player. , Symbol combinations corresponding to 39th to 56th, which are "winning 08" to "winning 11", are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, "-" indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "bell-bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be acquired regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the condition device number is referred to as a winning number, and the condition device number may hereinafter be referred to as a winning number. In the present embodiment, the re-gaming combination is provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are arranged in the stop order and stop positions. Accordingly, the re-play combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in the item “condition device” on the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are stopped in accordance with the stop order and stop positions. “Condition device (name)” in the third column from the right is configured such that condition devices of different types can be stopped and displayed, and condition devices having the same winning number among the plurality of kinds of condition devices are collected. It is illustrated in the item. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" which is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed depending on the stop order and stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices "01", "replay 02", and "replay 03" can be stopped and displayed. The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device relating to a re-play such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device for which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as "win 01" may be referred to as a small combination. A condition device that causes the BB to start when a stop display such as "1st class BB-A" is displayed may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the winning combination of the BB combination and the small combination is won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination is stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a displayable position, the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed while the symbol corresponding to the BB winning combination is not stopped and displayed, while the small winning combination is displayed. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop display (cannot be pulled in), the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination Is configured to stop. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning the condition device of the winning number 21, "1 type BB-B + winning-C", the cherry which is "winning 12" or "13 winning" and "1 type BB" Either of the black sevens, which is "-B", can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, in the case where the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51→the middle reel M52→the right reel M53, (1) at the first stop, the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (FIG. If the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the (reel arrangement of No. 12) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. Also, regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "Prize 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the "winning 13" is on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53, "winning prize 13" is stopped and displayed. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "seed BB-B" is stopped. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol No. 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol Nos. 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" is stopped at the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1 The symbol number 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the “role” item, the role of the “condition device (name)” is illustrated. The “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless, it is a condition device related to the re-play in which the re-play combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. The "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the order of pressing the stop button. Although it is a condition device related to the re-play in which the re-game combination that does not shift to the state is stopped and displayed, the right reel M53 is pressed by reversely pressing (reel is stopped in the order of the right reel M53 → the middle reel M52 → the left reel M51). No. 18 to No. 2 range, middle reel M52 range of symbol Nos. 9 to 13 and left reel M51 range of symbol Nos. 5 to 10 are stopped at operation timings located at the lower stage of each reel. By operating the button, "white seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the right reel M53, the middle reel M52, and the left reel M51, and the player can see that the white seven are aligned in the lower stage. There is. In addition, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the AT additional lottery is won, the player is won the AT additional lottery by executing a production (details will be described later) instructing the player to aim for "White Seven" by pressing the reverse key. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. "Forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device relating to the re-play in which the re-gaming player whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop button is pushed. By stopping the reels in the order of the left reel M51→the middle reel M52→the right reel M53), the symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located in the lower stage of each reel, "black seven" is displayed in the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game in which Re-Game-C is won and the AT additional lottery is won, the player wins the AT additional lottery by executing a production (details will be described later) instructing the player to press "Black Seven" by pressing the forward push. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, in “RT maintenance RP1** (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 4, which one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is used as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated Or) is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed in a stopped state can be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to re-game 01, re-game 02 or re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the re-game 04 that can shift the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, as for “RT maintenance RP*1* (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 5, which one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is used as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated Depending on whether or not), the re-play combination that is stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the re-play 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the re-game 04 that can shift the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in “RT maintenance RP**1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6, which one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is used as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated Depending on whether or not), the re-game combination that is stopped and displayed is a condition device, and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the re-game 01 or the re-game 03 that the RT state does not shift is displayed as a stop. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the re-game 04 that can shift the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the small winning combination may differ depending on which one of the six reel stop orders is selected. , For example, "left reel M51:1, middle reel M52:2, right reel M53:3", and in the case of "123", "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53" is stopped in the pushing order. For example, in the case of "winning prize A-1" (winning number 7), the maximum number of wins is obtained by stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correct answer in pressing order). The symbol combination of “winning prize 01” that can win 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. Incidentally, "123" of "push order bell 123" and the like indicate a push order (reel stop order) with which the maximum number of wins in the winning number can be obtained. It should be noted that when the reels are stopped in a pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of coins can be acquired, that is, one reel is paid out if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pressing order. Then, in a state related to AT such as "AT in progress", navigate the push order of the re-gaming combination and the push order of the bell (display the push order with the highest profit on the push order display device D270), and It is possible to create a plurality of game states in which the profit margin of the player is different such that the push order is not navigated to a state related to AT such as ". The state regarding AT will be described later.

In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can obtain 11 game medals, which is the maximum acquisition number, even if any of the prize winning 04 to the prize winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pressing order. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a push order regardless of bell. In addition, "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in parallel lines. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. In No. 14, three watermelons A are arranged in the middle of each reel. In addition, "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in a diagonal line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In the case of 16, the watermelon B is arranged on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the watermelon B is arranged on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the watermelon A is arranged on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that allows three bells to be aligned on the activated line. This is a condition device in which the AT additional lottery is executed by performing. Further, "BB medium strong rare small combination (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device for executing the AT additional lottery by winning in the BB.

Next, in the item “bonus winning information”, numerical values 0 to 3 are distributed for each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB combination) has 0 as the bonus winning information, and the winning number (19) that includes 1 type BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB combination). 1. The bonus winning information of 1, the bonus winning information of the winning number (20 to 23) including the 1 type BB-B is 2, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (24 to 27) including the 1 type BB-C is 3 I am trying. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning/replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are distributed for each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and the winning number 19.20.24 corresponding to the bonus) that does not include the re-playing combination and the small winning combination is 0 as the winning/re-playing winning information. , 1 to 18 winning/replaying winning information is distributed to each condition device with respect to the winning number including the replaying role or the small winning combination. By storing the winning/replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which replay winning combination or small winning combination. The details of the winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the "production group number" item, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the effect group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball-out group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are distributed for each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when performing a lottery for AT (for example, AT lottery or AT additional lottery), thereby performing lottery processing for AT. It is possible to reduce the amount of programs and data for doing so. Even if the condition device having the payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when the condition device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even when the condition device having the payout group number of 0 is won, it may be configured so that the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In such a case, the payout group number is When the condition device that becomes 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 is a lottery probability in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as winning combination) and a bonus (also referred to as BB, BB combination) regarding a small winning combination and a re-playing combination in the present embodiment are determined by a winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing (also referred to as a winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance ratio (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the re-game combination) may be different depending on the RT state, and the "re-game combination" (the total appearance of all the re-game combinations) In the case of “RT1”, the appearance rate is higher than the other RT states. Also, "replay 04" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 (a so-called falling replay role, "RT1", and a symbol corresponding to the replay role in a situation where the bonus is not won. When the combination is stopped and displayed, the subsequent transition to “RT0” will be mainly won in “RT1” and almost no appearance in “RT0”. In "RT2", the "replay 04" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but the RT state does not shift even when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed. In addition, when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", a falling effect (for example, effect display device S40) that is an effect that notifies that "RT0" has shifted, that is, the RT state has fallen When "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the BB has been won because the "replay 04" has been stopped and displayed, but the fall effect has not been executed. You can improve your sex. In the case of such a configuration, the sound effect output when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed and the replay combination other than "replay 04" (for example, "replay without RT state transition" 01") may be configured to be different from the sound effect output by being stopped and displayed, and by such a configuration, the player recognizes that "replay 04" is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state relating to an AT in which push-order navigation does not occur (for example, a "normal game state", which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and a state relating to AT in which push-order navigation may occur (for example, " There is a case of staying at "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and sometimes "AT gaming state". At this time, when a winning number that has a possibility of shifting (falling down) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, and a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down when in a non-AT gaming state, The output may not be output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, in the non-AT game state, it is possible to shift the game state without notifying the player that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0". On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-gaming role in which the RT state does not fall down is displayed stopped. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful so that the RT state does not fall. Also, the "replay 05" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (the replay role that can inform that the player has won the AT additional lottery when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". , And almost never appears in other RT states. The state transition regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination which becomes the re-play combination will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. .. Incidentally, there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so as to be able to overlap with the small winning combination, and is duplicated with part of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, and the cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

In addition, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB is inactive, the winning combination of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (the single winning combination that does not overlap with the small winning combination is In the case of winning the BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB combination), the new winning of the BB combination becomes invalid, and only the small combination winning is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of being "RT2" and winning (carrying over) one type BB-A, if the winning number "1 type BB-C" is won, , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 is invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as in the case where the “miss” of the winning number 0 is won. The carried-over 1st class BB-A will continue to win. In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is inactive, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB winning combination are In the case of winning the overlapping condition devices, the new winning of the BB combination becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small combination becomes valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation of being “RT2” and winning (carrying over) 1st class BB-A, the winning number 21 “1st class BB-B+winning-C” was won. In this case, the type 1 BB-B associated with the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. In other words, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number "winning prize-C" is won. The carried-over 1st class BB-A will continue to win. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small winning combination, and may be overlapped with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, some of the re-play combinations of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, the bonus is also overlapped with the condition device including the RT transition replay (re-playing role in which the RT state can be changed), so that the bonus is won even when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility that even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus is not denied, so that it is possible to make the player have expectations. In the case of such a configuration, the RT state is controlled not to shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (shifted to the RT state in which the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently win the replay), etc. Therefore, it becomes possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "1st type BB-A, B, C" during BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the winning number 13 is "common bell", the winning number 17 is "BB medium weak rare small role (oblique bell matching)", and the winning number 18 is "BB medium strong rare small role". (V-shaped bell assortment)” is configured so that three small wins can be won, and while the BB won in the “AT status” is in operation, “BB medium weak rare small win (oblique bell assortment)”. Alternatively, when the “BB medium strong rare small combination (V-shaped bell alignment)” is won, the AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

In the upper part of the figure, the small winning combination appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and the common bell (winning number 13) has a uniform appearance rate regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (six stages in this example). Specifically, the set number in setting 1 is 3204, the set number in setting 2 is 3404, the set number in setting 3 is 3604, the set number in setting 4 is 3904, the set number in setting 5 is 4204, and the set number is 6 in setting 6. Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With such a configuration, for example, when the player progresses the game while measuring the number of appearances (the number of wins) of the common bell, the common bell is frequently won, so that the gaming machine related to the game is played. It is possible to proceed with the game while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. Although the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed depending on the win of the common bell. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state (also referred to as the AT lottery).

Further, the middle row of the figure is a list of expected values when there is a push-order navigation. In the figure, when the push-order navigation is executed in a state where the push-order navigation can be executed in the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. Average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small wins, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected increase or decrease in medals per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing a game with three bets. If it is greater than 1, the expected value will be positive and medals will increase, while if it is less than 1, it is expected. The value will be negative and medals will decrease). The average number of payouts per game is "the sum of the numbers of replay combinations (the total of the numbers of winning numbers 1 to 6) x the number of payouts (3) in the replay + small wins (11) Total number of units (appearance rate of small roles) (total number of units for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 sheets) in small role (11 units) / total number of units (65536) )”. The expected medal increase/decrease value per game can be calculated as "average number of payouts per game/number of inserted medals per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when one game is played) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expectation of increase or decrease of medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, “RT1” has the relatively highest expected medal increase/decrease value per game. The numbers in the figure do not consider the increase or decrease of medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game progresses in a situation in which the push-order navigation occurs (also referred to as an optimal operation mode or an advantageous operation mode), medals are increased in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the medal increase/decrease expected value per game is a value smaller than 1 in a situation in which the push-order navigation does not occur, and the medal is smaller than 1. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is a push-order navigation in “RT0” or “RT2”, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Or “RT2”, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game may be smaller than 1 when there is a push-order navigation. In addition, when the symbol combination to be the re-play combination is stopped and displayed, the bet number (3) in the previous game is actually bet, but in calculating the expected medal increase/decrease value in this embodiment, Calculation is based on the assumption that three payments will be made. Note that one game may be referred to as one game.

The average payout amount per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”, and the RT state Is "RT2", the value is 3.67137146. The expected medal increase/decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1". Is 2.237790487 when "RT2" is set, and when there is a push-order navigation, the RT state of "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities related to the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are merely examples, and for example, the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game in "RT2" in which the BB is internally established (when there is a push order navigation). The expected medal increase/decrease value) may be less than 1. With such a configuration, when the push-order navigation occurs and the situation is "RT2" (when the BB is internally established), the bonus can not be aligned in the game in which the bonus can be aligned. Also, the number of medals will gradually decrease, and in the situation where pushing order navigation occurs and "RT2" (when BB is internally established), the game where the bonus can be aligned intentionally By not arranging the bonuses in the above, it is possible to prevent the strategy of increasing the number of medals held. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of losing in "RT2" to be higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (winning-A1 to winning-I) in "RT2". It is preferable to set the winning probability of the re-gaming combination so that it is designed as follows. (If the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is designed to be high, the probability of losing is reduced accordingly, so the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is high. It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all small wins is 18784/65536, the winning probability of all replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and the probability of losing is designed to be higher than the winning probability of all small wins.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-A is assigned the same numeral 40 for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, as the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-C, the same numeral 160 is assigned to all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, as for the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 4 to setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, with respect to the appearance rate of the first type BB-B, the assigned number differs depending on the set value. In this way, 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C have no setting difference (1st type BB-A, 1st type BB-C may be referred to as no setting difference BB, no setting difference bonus) The first type BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (the first type BB-B may be referred to as a BB having a setting difference and a bonus having a setting difference). In addition, the appearance rates of 1st type BB-A, 1st type BB-B, and 1st type BB-C are uniform regardless of the RT state (“RT0” and “RT1”). The appearance rates of the 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C (total) are the same regardless of the set value, but the 1st type BB-B (total) appearance rate differs depending on the set value. The appearance rate summed up as the appearance rate of the first type BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the setting value. Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with setting difference.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is centered on the main control substrate M for controlling the progress of the game, the sub control substrate S, the door substrate D, the spinning drum substrate K, the power supply substrate E, the relay substrate IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting/reset button M30, and the like are connected so that data can be exchanged. Incidentally, the solid line part in the figure shows the movement relating to the exchange of data, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this. For example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without passing through the main control board.

A main control board (may be referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the whole game played in the spinning-type gaming machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the main control chip C is connected to a CPU C100 (sometimes referred to as CPUMC), a built-in ROMC110, a built-in RAMC120, etc. by a bus so that data can be exchanged between them. Has been installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and then the sub-control board S, the door board D, or the rotating body board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) to K or the like {for example, an instruction number (pushing order number, instruction information, operation information to the sub-control board S). Is also output), the sub-control board S is capable of executing the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

In addition, the sub-control board (sometimes referred to as sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, sub-game unit) S, the sub-control chip SC is mounted, similar to the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, etc., and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. The sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a body back light (also called a back lamp) S30, and the like. Are connected. Here, the rotating body backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the design drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes various control commands received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, effect display device S40, rotating body backlight S30, etc. Is being directed. Incidentally, in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, the player can set nine ranges of the upper stage, the middle stage, the lower stage of the left reel, the upper stage of the middle reel, the middle stage, the lower stage, the upper stage of the right reel, the middle stage and the lower stage. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the rotating body backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on, and all the other LEDs are turned off, whereby the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. In addition, the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example, when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, by changing the lighting mode of the rotating body backlight S30, the player is notified that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a back lamp effect (which may be referred to as a backlight effect) suggested by.

On the door board D, the above-described closing acceptance sensor D10s, first closing sensor D20s, second closing sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, accumulated game medals (credits), settlement button D60 for paying out the inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the game state (not shown, but described above The inserted number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game state display device D250, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 are the credit number display device D200, and the advantageous section. Assembly of display devices such as display device YH}, door switch D80 for executing opening/closing determination of front door, cancellation of error and change of set value, game medal determined not to match after being inserted (or , Other foreign matter) is connected to the blocker D100 for returning the foreign matter to the discharge port D240. The door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the adjustment button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a spinning drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a spinning drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the spinning drum substrate K. The spinning drum board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning drum motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the spinning drum sensor K20. There is. Further, in the spinning drum type game machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the spinning drum motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to make one rotation. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols having a substantially uniform size, and as a number of steps corresponding to one symbol. Is set to 24 steps (=480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per one turn of the reel are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action to put it out. It should be noted that the medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for performing determination of whether or not the medal has been normally paid out and measurement of the number of game medals paid out, and a disc H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected.

The various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls the presence/absence of power supply by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which electric power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by a dashed arrow. As shown in the figure, the main control board M and the sub control board S are directly supplied with power from the power supply board E, and various boards (door board D, rotating board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied through the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of an AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this power is converted to a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to the respective control boards and boards.

Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting changing device control process described later (for changing a setting), a setting/reset capable of changing a set value, releasing an error, etc. Button M30 is connected. Further, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and an "AT mid state" which is a state relating to AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing the AT transition lottery to shift to AT, and AT additional lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60) that is the number of games that can be stayed in the “AT in progress” state. And an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

The flow chart is mainly composed of processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start/end/return (shown by rounded rectangles). ing. Further, in the case where the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the reference to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle whose left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, in the game machine development stage, game machines with different specifications are also being developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine executed by the game machines with different specifications (in the processing on the main side, Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left, so that processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or cheating.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing that is first executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the spinning drum type game machine P, in step 1002, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started. Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart relating to the timer interrupt time processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings, etc.) as the function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off/power-off recovery). Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Check result) is determined to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU C100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data relating to the stack pointer saved in the processing at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

Further, in the case of No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout amount display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (it turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a predetermined range excluding the storage area in the RAM for storing the set value (set value data) and sets ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area that stores the set value (set value data), and the total cumulative number of games in the “advantageous section” and the total sum of the game section (advantageous section + The number of games (normal section), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the “advantageous section”, and the like are also ranges not included in the RAM initialization range. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio). Further, the calculation process of the advantageous zone ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a concrete display mode, it is repeated at an interval of 5 seconds in the order of "advantageous section ratio -> continuous character ratio per 6000 games -> character ratio per 6000 games -> cumulative continuous character ratio -> cumulative character ratio" Is displayed. It should be noted that the continuous accessory ratio is "the number of payouts while the RB is operating/the total number of payouts", and the accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating. /Total number of payouts". On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including a storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. After setting (for example, setting in the register area), the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (the value at the time of starting the processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M does not become the value at which the special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game has been executed due to noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Further, although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and in the byte storing the information related to the random number. It is preferable to configure such that only information related to the random number is stored (various timer values and other information is not stored) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, noise is generated. To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, which is also called a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return the set value to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, correction processing of the set value (set value data) after the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing of step 1108) can be omitted, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. If Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0=a value that is most unfavorable to the player) to the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout amount display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the set display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 Move to. As described above, the payout amount display device D270 is also used when notifying the pushing order. Because of such a configuration, for example, when a malfunction occurs in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), when reporting the pushing order, incorrect information can be reported. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout amount display device D270 turn all seven segments "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the seven segments are out of order, and the player can see the failure. It can prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value (set value data), the storage of the set value display RAM for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value. An area may be provided and the setting value may be displayed by referring to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode to the sub control board S side is executed.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting/reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (if the added set value (set value data) exceeds 5) The set value (set value data) becomes 0), the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 is switched from off to on. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112 and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device is completed, and the setting display LED (not shown) is displayed. The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated to the sub control board S side is executed.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in other flowcharts) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (from now on, a flowchart relating to a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, which are display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process concerned. When the power supply voltage drops, the reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts a return). In addition, in the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. Note that the processing of steps 1306 to 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED/motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the information regarding the error, the game progress status at the time of the error, etc., are transmitted to the hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first game) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the data (for example, the upper limit number of bets, the winning winning line, etc.) in the RAM area necessary for the game. Incidentally, the step 1203 is data for clearing the data (for example, condition device number (winning number), effect group number, instruction information} used in the previous game (of "0" for clearing the RAM address. It also includes a process of setting (data) in the RAM. The condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, but the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the command relating to the RT state (command to the sub side) set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. Further, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to the AT in the game (for example, “AT in progress”) (step 1420 and step 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22). 23. Steps 1439, 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 shown in FIG. 23 are set for the AT). Next, in step 1207, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to the AT-related state set in step 1206. Further, the processing for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. Moreover, when transmitting the state regarding AT to the sub side, it is not always necessary to transmit, and the state regarding AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 of FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and two full detection electrodes DE that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later). It is determined by the conduction/non-conduction of the current (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (eg, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the error number corresponding to the medal full error using the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error is canceled (for example, the currents due to the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS are non-conducting, and the setting/setting). It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), Moving to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU C100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-play combination), and the next processing (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (the process of forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-play combination is established in the previous game, the on-processing of the blocker D100 is performed on condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 sheets in this example). Execute. In other words, if the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the replay combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-gaming combination is established, if the number of credits (credits) does not reach the predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When you are staying in an RT state (for example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning the re-gaming role is higher than in the RT state, or when it is visually difficult to replay the re-playing role (re-playing that looks like a small role: Even if the bell-bell-bell on the ineffective line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game in good rhythm (without feeling uncomfortable).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second game) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not gaming medals have been bet or have not been saved (no credit exists). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Or not. If Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout amount display device D270, the credit amount display device D200, and the inserted amount display light D210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Incidentally, when the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating the start of the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and the setting change mode when the ending condition of the setting change mode is satisfied Is executing a process for transmitting a command indicating that the process ends. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes management related to insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU C100 of the main control board M confirms the number of acceptable game medals. Next, in step 1226, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is ON (in the present embodiment, insertion of a medal is performed). It has two insertion sensors for detecting, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is accepted). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s are off (first closing sensor D20s or second closing sensor D20s). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that the received one game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credits are the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If YES is determined, the blocker D100 is controlled to be OFF (state in which the medal passage is not formed). In addition, in the case of No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and in the case of No in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or game medals bet. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, for detecting payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, when the previous game was a re-game combination, only the remaining number of credits is the object of settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after driving the hopper (after the timing of the process of step 1234). .. Specifically, whether or not the state in which it is determined that the medals have not been paid out has continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal is transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on) in step 1242. Next, in step 1244, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the empty medal error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on. After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal, which had been performed the payout operation, has been completed). If Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 1233. Note that if No in step 1241 or step 1247, the process moves to step 1236.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has the start lever D50 effective (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.). ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in step 1253 whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process of obtaining a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then moves to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes non-recoverable error processing. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1251, the process moves to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third game) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is a state in which the AT additional lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states relating to the ATs in which the AT additional lottery can be executed are the “AT in progress”, the “additional specialization state”, the “specialization omen state”, and the “advantageous BB state”. In the "advantageous BB inside game", the AT counter value may be greater than 0, but the AT additional lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from advantageously not aligning the symbol combinations of BB in the "advantageous BB inside game", which is advantageous to the player. In addition, it may be configured such that the AT additional lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB inside game". In such a case, the AT additional lottery is won in the "advantageous BB inside game". It may be configured not to notify immediately, but to notify that the player has won the AT addition lottery at the timing when BB is finished, or the AT remaining game number after the AT game number is added.

If Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution processing, it is possible to execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state regarding AT, but the lottery probabilities do not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table. It is preferable to execute a lottery). Next, in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a condition device number management process, which will be described later.

Here, the states relating to the AT in this example will be listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to transition to the "AT in progress" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. The “low probability state” is a so-called “normal state”, and thus may be referred to as a “normal state”. (2) "Normal BB inside game" is a state in which the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state", the BB combination has not been won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" means that when the winning combination of BB in the "low probability state" is not achieved and the AT lottery is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of BB is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, it is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game”. (4) "High probability state" is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not acquired the right to transition to the "AT in progress" state) and has not won the bonus role. The AT is easier to win than the “low probability state” described above. As will be described later, when a new "high-probability state" is entered, the "low-probability state" is not entered until the number of games with high security failures has passed (5) "AT in progress state" "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the AT remaining game number (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, when the continuous lottery described below is won, the AT counter is set to a predetermined value and the "AT in progress" state continues (6) "Specialization omen state" Is a state in which the right to shift to the "add-on specialized state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the "AT in-state", is acquired. (7) The "addition specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the "AT in progress state". (8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT in progress”, “special omen state” or “additional specialized state”, and the BB role is It is in a state where no prize has been won. (9) “In-standby BB inside game” is a state in which the BB combination has been won in the “low probability state”, and the BB combination has won the AT lottery, and the BB combination has not won. .. (10) "Advantageous BB state" means a symbol combination that corresponds to the BB combination that is won in the BB combination in the "high probability state", "AT in progress", "special omen state" or "additional specialized state". When the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination in the "advantageous BB inside game" is displayed in the stop display, or the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , When winning the AT lottery by the BB combination, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB inside game". It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) “Restorability production state” is a state related to the AT that is transferred when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuous lottery described below is not won. In the "Restorability production state", a later-described resurrection lottery is executed, and when the resurrection lottery is won, the state is changed to "AT in progress" (the AT counter is set to a predetermined value), and the resurrection lottery is not performed. If it is elected, it will move to the "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M requests the drawing point creation request (determined to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). Or as required according to the stop position of other reels). If Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPU C100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, if No in step 1261-1, the process moves to step 1263. As described above, in the “BB inside game”, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the stop button is not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if you do not stop the stop button in the order of "left → middle → right") (when you stop the reels in the wrong pressing order), there are 11 combinations of symbols that will be paid out by the reel stop control. Configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance availability check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the stop button operated (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, if No in step 1264, the process moves to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an all-reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, the right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPU C100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoppable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if the winning combination determined by the internal lottery does not match, it is abnormal. Is determined). In addition, in step 1269, whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal is determined whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery is possible. Even if the winning combination does not appear to be stopped by the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the internal processing of the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning of the winning combination is won. The payout is configured to be executed. If Yes in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes non-recoverable error processing. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a payout process of game medals by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals (the number of game medals acquired by winning exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example)). When the game is done, the payout of game medals is executed}. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on. Then, it is determined that the payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after driving the hopper (after the timing of the process of step 1276). .. If Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the inside of the empty medal error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display by the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the empty medal error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and Transition to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on. After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal, which had been performed the payout operation, has been completed). If Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 1290. In addition, in the case of No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize which is Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. In addition, if No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game section shift control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game ending process (for example, clearing the bet number, game state transition process, etc.) and proceeds to the next process (step 1202 process).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table that is used when executing an internal lottery, in which a winning number, a number to be compared with the acquired random number, etc. are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Winning/re-game winning information can be generated from the winning number. If the bonus and the small win are duplicated and the bonus and the re-game combination are duplicated, both the winning/re-game win information and the bonus win information are calculated from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions associated with the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number for comparing with the acquired random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. Remembered For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the above-mentioned number is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 which are push order re-gaming hands. Since the above-mentioned number is the same for 6 consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions for the push order re-gaming combination is 3 and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order re-playing roles and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number associated with the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery is won, the determination (lottery) is not executed for the subsequent internal lottery table address, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259). On the other hand, if No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 3618, in step 3620 the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address relating to the next payout group number), moves to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. Perform the following processing. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT-related state is the “AT in-progress state”, the “specialized omen state”, or the “additional specialized state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M causes the payout group number related to the game to be added in AT (in the "AT in progress", a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group numbers (in this example, 1 and 3) related to re-game-B, re-game-C, and winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state regarding AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the payout group number related to the game is BB on top (" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can be added to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) for winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the “additional specialized state”. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of remaining AT games to the payout group number related to the game during specialization (in the "specialized addition state") and In the "AT in progress", it is a winning number that does not increase the remaining AT game number, and in this example, it is re-play-A, re-play-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6) (In this example, 2, 13) is determined. If Yes in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the additional game number lottery table at the time of winning, and determines the AT additional game number based on the payout group number of the game (for example, outside the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether the latched random number value is within the range). Note that determining the number of AT addition games is also referred to as executing AT addition lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined AT addition game count to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M receives a command relating to the determined number of AT-added games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not the AT game number addition is executed and how many games are added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT additional lottery) can be executed. ..

Here, the lottery table shown outside the drawing is an example of the additional game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in the present embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push-order navigation is executed (in this example, " In the AT state, “precursor specialization state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB state”), when the additional player is elected at the time of winning, based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of games to be added to the AT is determined by lottery from “0” to “300”, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games is not increased (when "0" is determined, the AT additional lottery may be referred to as "non-win").

Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the winning combination is won is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is the watermelon A. In this case, {numerical value (600)×AT additional game number (0)+register number (100)×AT additional game number (10)+register number (300)×AT additional game number (30)+register number ( 24)×AT additional games (100)}/total number of copies (1024)=12.1 (game).

Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {registration number (500)×AT addition game number (0)+registration number (200)×AT addition game number (50)+ Number of copies (300) x number of games added to AT (100) + number of games added (24) x number of games added to AT (300)}/total number of units registered (1024) = 46.1 (game) be able to.

Next, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6, {numerical value (300)×AT additional game number (10)+numerical value (600)× The number of games to be added to AT (30)+the number of games to be added (124)×the number of games to be added to AT (50)}/the total number of games (1024)=26.61 (game). If the winning combination is Re-Game-A or Re-Game-D1 to D3, and Win-A1 to A6, the AT game number will be added only when the state related to AT is the "addition specialized state". Has become.

Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium-rare rare combination, {numerical value (800)×AT additional game number (0)+register number (100)×AT additional game number (10)+register number (100 )×AT additional game number (30)+register number (24)×AT additional game number (100)}/total number of register numbers (1024)=6.3 (game).

Next, when the winning combination is a BB medium strong rare combination, {numerical value (300)×AT additional game number (0)+register number (300)×AT additional game number (30)+register number (400) )×AT additional game number (50)+register number (24)×AT additional game number (300)}/total number of register numbers (1024)=35.4 (game).

In the present embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition game number may be different depending on the type of winning combination, but depending on the set value, the AT addition game number may be changed. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT additional lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same process is executed as the AT additional lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute a process for determining whether the winning number is 7 or 8, but the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured by executing the AT additional lottery based on the payout group number as in the present embodiment. When performing the same process as the AT addition lottery with and, it is only necessary to determine whether the payout group number is 2 and execute the process related to the AT addition lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8. Will be possible.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M may judge by the winning number (or the winning/re-play winning information, or the payout group number) of the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number relating to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay, which is a re-play in which white seven can be aligned in a straight line by stopping by reverse push). If Yes in step 1518, in step 1520 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an AT game number increase by re-game-B, in other words, the AT additional game number by winning re-game-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU C100 of the main control board M issues a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and reverse push (“right→middle→left”) causes an invalid line). (The effect for instructing to align the white seven is executed) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1520, at step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sends a command other than the reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side and a reverse push (“right→middle→left”)). The pressing order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the winning number (or the winning/re-game winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game is a re-playing-C( It is determined whether or not it is a re-play in which the black seven can be aligned with the ineffective line by stopping the game by pushing the forward push (forward push black 7 replay). In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an AT game number increase by re-game-C, in other words, the AT addition game number by winning re-game-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M instructs the forward push command (command to the side of the sub control board S, and forward push (“left→middle→right”) to invalidate the line. The effect of instructing to align the black seven is executed) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU C100 of the main control board M causes a command other than the forward press avoidance command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and the forward press (“left→middle→right”)). The pressing order is instructed, an effect for not aligning black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1400). In the present embodiment, the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands. Although the control board S is configured to be able to execute the effect related to the push-order navigation, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the AT additional number of games are related When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side pushes the navigation sequence. You may comprise so that the execution timing and the production mode of the production regarding may be determined. As an example, the re-game-B is a winning game, and the sub-control board S side selects the effect mode instructing the reverse push in the game that received the command (the game in which the number of AT games is added). The sub-control board S side may not execute the effect of instructing the reverse push in the game in which the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S, and then the predetermined condition (for example, a specific re-game combination (for example, It may be configured to execute an effect of instructing a push order in which seven sets are possible on an inactive line in a game that satisfies (game-B or C) is won). Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B has been won and the sub-control board S has received the command (the game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and thereafter, Of a predetermined number of games (for example, a continuous effect may be executed at the same time (in which case, the continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in which case, the final effect of the continuous effect), the number of AT games is increased (displayed on the effect display device S40. This is an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, "+30 G" may be displayed.) In this example, the number of remaining AT games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. The display is configured to be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or may be different. In the game in which B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the predetermined condition thereafter is satisfied. As an example of the case where the AT game number addition effect is executed in the game, the sub-control board S side is executing a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that fuels the winning of the bonus (within the bonus inside). Since the re-play-B win probability is low (including 0%), the player will be aware that the bonus is not won if the push order in which 7 games can be completed is notified). This may be the case when the board S side is performing a special effect.The main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number has been added. As the information, (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games is transmitted from the main control board M to the side of the sub control board S after the AT is added to the lottery, and then the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time on the side of the sub control board S. Is calculated as the result of the AT additional lottery on the main control board M side by calculating the difference between the information regarding the AT remaining game number transmitted this time and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. The command relating to the number of AT addition games is sent to the side of the sub-control board S. If the AT addition lottery is not won, the command concerning the fact that the AT addition lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the effect mode of the effect related to the pushing order navigation. It’s a winning game Then, the sub-control board S side presses the game in which the command is received (the game in which the number of AT games has not been added) is middle-pressed (the middle-stop button is operated as the first stop, and the pressing order is to avoid 7 sets). You may comprise so that the production|generation aspect which instruct|indicates may be selected and performed. Although the AT additional lottery is executed on the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side determines that the AT additional game number has not been added. After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of additional AT games won in the additional AT lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery has not been won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command regarding that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is an AT-executable state. In the present embodiment, the AT-related state in which the AT lottery can be executed is only the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB inside game" is achieved. After that, when the winning combination of BB is made, the game moves to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB ends, the game moves to “AT in progress” and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. A value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", the "normal BB inside game" is shifted to, and thereafter the "AT in progress state" is not shifted. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the "normal game state", the BB combination may be used as an opportunity to win the AT lottery. In such a case, if the player wins BB in the "normal game state" and wins the AT lottery triggered by the BB role, the game shifts to "advantageous BB inside game" and then BB By aligning, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. In the "normal game state", when the BB is won and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". If Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is the AT lottery combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB combination having no setting difference BB combination). It is determined whether or not the species is BB-C). In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning number of the BB alone with no setting difference (winning numbers 19 and 24) and the winning number of the BB without setting difference (winning numbers, 25, 26 and 27) and the small wins overlap. Both are AT lottery players. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game as “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also, in the case of No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, the AT win rate (whether winning or not winning) related to the AT lottery is configured to be different when the state related to the AT is different, but when the state related to the AT is the same, Has the same AT winning rate in the AT lottery even if the set values are different (when winning BB in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value= AT state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game has been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small probability that the "low probability state" can shift to the "high probability state"). It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is cherry. If Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU C100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and there is no problem even if it is changed if it does not differ depending on the set value). Execute high probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

If No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “high-probability state”. If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the high-security obstacle counter KHc to 1 (the high-security obstacle final game, which is the 10th game since the high probability state). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the low-probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT is the “high probability state”, the game section is the “advantageous section”, and when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the push order is The navigation is executed one or more times, or the "advantageous section" is not completed unless the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) is continued. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the "high-probability state" is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push-order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). In addition, when the BB role is won in the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” can be selected at any timing even if the pushing order navigation is not executed even once in the “advantageous section”. It may be configured to be terminated. If Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied when the push-order navigation is executed once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination is different depending on the reel stop order and the profit ratio of the player is different), a combination having a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination having a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination in which the maximum payout number is large is 11 is performed once. Incidentally, even if the result of Step 1410, Step 1414, Step 1418, Step 1424, Step 1426 or Step 1428 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new high probability state is entered, the high security obstacle counter KHc is set to 10 high security obstacle games until the counter value becomes zero. Is configured so that it does not enter the "low probability state". Note that such a lottery system is merely an example, and for example, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high probability state" (the stay in the "high probability state" is guaranteed. ), the lottery for shifting from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) may be executed in each game after the lapse of the 10 games. The AT lottery (low-probability AT lottery, high-probability AT lottery) and state promotion hands have the same winning probability in all set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “AT in progress state”. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state is the “AT in progress”, the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the AT remaining game number is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" with a probability of one half when winning the , If the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if winning the watermelon B, the lottery (specialization The state transition lottery may be performed), and the state is not shifted to the “specialization omen state” and the “additional specialized state”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery that wins the watermelon B and acquires the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" (also called the specialized state transition lottery It may be configured to execute), and with such a configuration, in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" is granted. When the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game won in the lottery can be (shift to) the "special omen state" or the "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value It may be configured such that it can be (can shift to) a "specialization warning state" or an "additional specialization state" when a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0) is reached, or the game won in the lottery. It may be configured such that after execution of a predetermined number of games, it is possible to (shift to) the "specialization omen state" or the "additional specialized state". Further, when shifting to the "addition specialized state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state", and for example, it is possible to directly shift from the "AT in progress state" to the "addition specialized state". You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M determines that the condition device relating to the game can execute the lottery to acquire the special right to move to the special transition role (addition specialization state). It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is watermelon B). If Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the specialization state transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “specialization omen state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is started). judge. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the AT-related state after the next game to be “AT in progress”, and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition is set). In order to be satisfied, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to be the “resurrection possible/impossible production state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. Even if the result of step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436 is No, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game and the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set again in the AT counter M60. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set has a playability that keeps looping at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, the first game of AT (after the initial value is newly set in the AT game M or the first game which is newly in the “AT in progress” state) is set. The continuous lottery may be executed in the (first game). With such a configuration, whether or not the next set (AT related to winning the continuous lottery) is already executed (whether or not the AT continues) is already determined in the "AT in progress" state. , The production in AT can be made different when the continuous lottery is won and when the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 When B is 1 or more (during the execution of AT), BGM can be changed (a song plays, etc.), or an effect in which it is definite that the player has won the continuous lottery can be executed.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the revival possibility production state. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is a rejuvenating part (in the next game by winning in the “recoverability production state”). It is determined whether or not the winning combination is a combination that can shift to the “AT in progress” (in other words, a combination that can pull back the AT). Here, in the present embodiment, the revival combination includes any one of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus combination (only the combination combination with no setting difference, and not the combination combination with setting BB). When the condition device relating to the game becomes a reviving part, it is said that the rehabilitation lottery is won. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT after the next game to be “AT in progress”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state shiftable condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Even if the result in step 1441-1 is No, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the AT final game is reached and the continuous lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “resurrection possible/impossible production state” and the restoration is performed in the “resurrection possible/impossible production state”. If it is possible to win the lottery, it is configured to shift to the “AT in progress” from the next game. In addition, although the "recovery possibility production state" is "advantageous section", the lottery (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) related to the AT in the "AT state" is not executed, and the restoration lottery can be executed. The configuration is such that the "AT in progress" state and the "Restorability state" are different in the execution mode of the lottery related to the AT.

Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game has been determined. If Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition for shifting the state relating to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization omen”). The condition is satisfied when 10 games, which are the precursor games, are exhausted). If Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game, and moves to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization”). When the number of precursor games is exhausted in the "precursor state", it is determined as "additional specialized state"). Even if No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU C100 of the main control board M issues a high securement obstacle counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, and the current high securement obstacle counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. Command relating to the remaining number of games that have been played) is set, and the routine goes to Step 1449-1. Next, in Step 1449-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB inside game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security obstacle counter KHc to zero in step 1449-2, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1450).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to be different depending on the lottery state, and when the BB combination (the BB combination without the setting difference) is won in the “low probability state”, the AT transfer lottery is won. No (there is no transition to the “AT in progress” state) On the other hand, if the BB role (the BB role with no setting difference) is won in the “high probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won (then in the “AT in progress state”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is set as the AT lottery, and the “high probability state A” and “high probability state A” are set as the states related to the AT which is the “advantageous section”. If the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A" when configured to have "state B", the AT transfer lottery is won by 1/10 in the "high probability state A", and the condition device is obtained in the "high probability state B". If the player wins A, the player may be selected to win the AT transfer lottery by ½. In addition, when the AT transition lottery is won, the state relating to the AT is shifted to the “AT preparation state” which is a preparation state until the state is changed to the “AT in progress state”, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT preparation”). It may be configured to shift to the “AT in progress state” when 10 games have passed since the shift to “state”.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the conditional device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is the “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU C100 of the main control board M issues a command relating to the winning/re-game winning information (a command on the side of the sub-control board S, for example, winning/re-game winning relating to the game. Command related to information). Next, in step 1454, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is a condition device relating to the game is a winning combination having a pressing order (a winning condition is different depending on the pressing order, for example, winning-A1). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pushing order number) in the game based on the winning/replaying winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. The number is stored in a RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push-order navigation). The instruction number is information relating to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number (not shown) even when the push-order navigation is not executed). When executing the push order hitting game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See image in Figure 34). Next, in step 1466, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the sub control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels which is the most profitable to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the push order navigation or the push order navigation display. ing. In the present embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number, and for example, the push order of “left→middle→right” is displayed as “=1” on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display "=1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the push order bell, the case of displaying the "left → middle → right" push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and in the game of the push order replay. You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left -> center -> right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the display mode of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of the winning/replay winning information.

In addition, in the case of No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the masking process on the winning/replaying winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored in the RAM at a predetermined address. Remember. Here, if the prize/replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and if the prize/replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, a high profit related to the game is obtained. Therefore, the pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in the present example, the sub-control board S is executed after the mask processing {processing for concealing the winning/re-game winning information (especially the information related to the pressing order)} is executed on the winning/re-game winning information related to the game. It is configured so that the highly profitable pushing order cannot be recognized by configuring the sending order to. As a masking method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning/replaying winning information (winning/replaying winning information having a similar role is preferable, and for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. Performance as a single production group number (for example, winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is production group 4 etc.) with a plurality of winning/replaying winning information) in which the symbol combination serving as a re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. The group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The masking method is not limited to this, and, for example, after the provided winning/replaying winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning/replaying after masking is performed. The winning information may be provided. Even in such a case, a plurality of winning/replaying winning information among the existing winning/replaying winning information such as the production group number is treated as one winning/replaying winning information as one winning/replaying winning information after the mask processing. It is desirable to provide the game winning information (for example, the winning/re-game winning information 4 to 6 is the winning/re-game winning information 19 which is the winning/re-game winning information after the mask processing (the newly-established winning prize).・Re-game win information))). If it is determined that the game informs the operation information (navigation order) based on the state of the AT on the main control board M, the winning/re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S, In the game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may not be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing, Moving to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus is won) (for example, (Set in the register area) and move to the next process (process of step 1550). In the present embodiment, the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the falling re-playing combination is included → the falling re-playing combination is not stopped and displayed In the order of navigation, in the case of (2) bell (one-card combination/11-card combination) → the pressing order that gives the largest number of payouts is configured. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the winning/re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous push order for the player is displayed on the sub-control board S side. While the game section is a "normal section", the sub-control board S The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the "advantageous zone", the winning/re-play winning information related to the game including the winning/re-play winning information in which the game result and the player's profit are different depending on the pushing order is directly stored on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in the gaming section which is not the "advantageous section", the winning/replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the winning/replay in which the result of the game and the profit of the player are different depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

When the game section is not the “advantageous section”, etc., when the winning/re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S, mask processing is executed to determine the effect group number. Then, the performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The production group number is the winning/replay winning information related to the winning/replaying winning information, which is related to the winning role having the same role (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the pushing order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbered. It is configured such that mask processing (processing for concealing the winning/replaying winning information (especially information related to the pressing order) is executed on the winning/replaying winning information related to the game and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning/replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order), which is a high profit related to the game, is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). Is a timer for measuring. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU C100 of the main control board M newly sets the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pressing order of the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information relating to the reel stop relating to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output request during the reel rotation start standby state related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command for the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, the process of step 1562 and step 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub control board S to indicate that the reel starts rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is the “advantageous section”. Incidentally, as will be described later in detail, the "advantageous section" is one of the gaming sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player, such as when the state regarding AT is "AT in progress". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the number of games remaining in the advantageous period counter YKc-1 (decrement counter, 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantageous period”, is initially set. The counter value of a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in the period of "advantageous section" is decremented by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is the “AT in progress state”. If Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security obstacle counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push-order navigation is the “AT in progress”, the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the “advantageous BB state”, In the case of "advantageous BB inside game", "special omen state" or "addition special state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the "AT in progress" state shifts to the "special omen state" while the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains), the "AT in progress" is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured to be able to make a transition (transition) from “state”→“prediction state of specialization”→“additional specialization state”. Even if the AT-related state is the “AT in progress”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30+α" which is a value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 upon the operation of the start lever D50. "29" may be displayed as the remaining AT game count, or "29+α", which is a value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT additional lottery (note that "α" obtained by the additional lottery is , "Α" in a specific game after the relevant game (when the bonus game is started, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after satisfying the predetermined condition after the bonus game) without notifying the player of the relevant game You may notify). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also decremented by 1 for each game in the "advantageous BB inside game", and an effect (for example, a bonus decision screen) suggesting bonus decision is output. Up to the number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With such a configuration, when the bonus is won in a state where the push-order navigation such as the “AT in progress” state can be executed, the bonus winning can be prevented from being immediately recognized by the player. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that fuels whether or not the bonus is won can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is over is "30" or a value of "30" or more when the result of the AT addition lottery is added and the result of addition is notified. Can be controlled to be displayed. When the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is executed and the bonus is won. The display relating to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is executed to fuel whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". The winning number (or winning/re-game winning information, or winning group number) at which the game is executed and the AT additional lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If the player wins and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes “0”. Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state shiftable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transferable condition is execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), replay stop display (in this example, replay 04 stop display), BB winning/starting. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be moved and the RT state of the next game or later based on the satisfied RT state transferable condition (RT state transition of FIG. 28). (See the drawing), and the next process (process of step 1750) is performed. Even if No in step 1702, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after stopping all reels. However, when shifting to “RT1”, the transition timing may shift to when the lever is turned on. The timing of shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of “RT0” to “RT2” and “1st type BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the condition shown by the arrow in the figure. Will be transferred. As a specific transition example of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state is transitioned to “RT0”. When the re-game 04 is the stop display, specifically, when the "re-game-D1" is won in a situation where the RT state is "RT1", and the left stop button is operated as the first stop, , Replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, in the situation where the RT state is "RT1", if "replay-D1" is won and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the replay 04 is displayed as a stop. , RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

When the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, the winning combination of BB is won, and the winning combination of BB is not won in the winning game (the condition devices relating to BB-A, B, and C of type 1 are activated). ) And the RT state shift to “RT2”. In addition, when the BB combination is won in "RT2" (the first type BB-A, B, C operates), the process shifts to "first type BB-A, B, C". Further, when BB ends in "first type BB-A, B, C" (operation of the first type BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, if the state regarding AT is “low probability state”, BB is won, and when BB ends, the RT state will shift to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player, but regarding the AT Since the state is a state in which the push order navigation does not occur, when the "replay-D1 to D3" is won, the incorrect order of the push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, the right button, One of the three choices is the correct push order and the replays other than the replay 04 are stopped, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the replay 04 is stopped) Replay 04 will be stopped and displayed by stopping, and it will shift from "RT1" to "RT0". If the state related to the AT is the “high probability state”, the “AT in progress”, the “prediction state of specialization”, or the “additional specialization state”, the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state Will shift to "RT1" which is highly profitable for the player, and the state regarding AT is a state where push-order navigation occurs, and even when "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, replay 04 Will guide you through the correct pressing order that does not stop and display, so you can keep "RT1".

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state shiftable condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transferable conditions are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference that was won in the “high probability state” is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) when the revival lottery is won. If you do, you will be satisfied. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU C100 of the main control substrate M newly triggers the "AT warning state" to trigger the AT initial game count (in this example, 50, and "AT in progress". The number of games in which subtraction is started after shifting to "state" is set in the AT counter M60, and the processing proceeds to step 1756. Even if No in step 1752, the process moves to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is a high-probability state. If Yes in step 1756, in step 1758 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the next game is the high-probability state. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the number of high securement obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high securement obstacle counter, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB inside game", the BB is won to shift to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state is changed to the "AT in progress", the AT counter is set to 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30). become. At this time, if the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the AT initial game number is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". Although it is desirable to notify it, as another notification method, the initial value is set at the start of the "AT state" without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT in progress” state or the state in which the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). An informing method for producing an informing effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know whether the number of AT games has been increased in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional presentation that suddenly occurs while the cause is unknown during AT (a state where push-order navigation can occur). In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the AT initial game number is not limited to that in this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process of step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of initial AT games) is configured to be subtracted from when the game after the BB ends (state related to AT is "AT in progress"). (Do not start subtraction during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress", "special omen state", "addition specialization state" , "Advantageous BB inside game", "advantageous BB state", "resurrection possible/impossible production state", there are 10 AT-related states, and the AT is satisfied by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. The state will change. For example, when the watermelon B is won in the “AT in progress” state and the special state transition lottery in which the winning is 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “special omen state”. In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) since the transition to the "specialization omen state", the "additional specialized state" is entered. As for the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB inside middle game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "AT in progress" "Available section" is the status related to 7 ATs: "state", "special omen state", "additional specialized state", "advantageous BB inside game", "advantageous BB state", and "recoverable production state" Is set. That is, even if the states regarding the seven ATs that are the “advantageous section” are transited (shifted), the “advantageous section” is forcibly ended when 1500 games have passed without setting the “normal section”. It is set to "normal section". In the case where the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed in the case of the “AT in progress”, the “special omen state”, or the “addition specialization state” that is the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, in the “AT in progress” state, when the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the “resurrection possible/impossible producing state” is set. When the player has won the revival drawing in the "recoverability production state", it is possible to return to the "AT in progress" again. On the other hand, when the revival lottery is not won in the "revival possibility production state", the "low probability state" is entered and the "advantageous section" is changed to the "normal section".

When the BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" ". Also, when the BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the “AT in progress” state, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, Transition to the “AT in progress” state. When there is no setting difference BB (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the "Restorability production state", the setting no difference BB is activated and the "advantageous BB state" ends Also shifts to the "AT in progress" (to win the revival drawing). In addition, when there is a setting difference BB (1st class BB-B) in the "Restorability production state", the setting difference BB is activated, and when the "advantageous BB state" ends, the setting difference BB becomes independent. If it is a winning number (winning number 20) related to the BB role, the BB will be in a "low probability state" after the BB ends (because the BB role with a setting difference does not win the resurrection lottery), and the BB with a setting difference is rare. If the winning number overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the “AT in progress” state after the BB ends (in order to win the revival lottery triggered by the rare winning combination).

In addition, when it is in the “advantageous section” and the “high probability state”, the BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B) is won, the BB with setting difference operates, and when the “advantageous BB state” ends, Transition to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to the AT that shifts after the “advantageous BB state” is finished is the state after the BB that is won in the AT (“AT in progress state”, “Special omen state”, “Additional specialized state”) (setting difference). For both BB with and without setting difference BB), the state shifts to a state related to AT at the time of BB winning among “AT in progress”, “special omen state” or “additional specialization state”, and is not in AT ( After there is no setting difference BB won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". In addition, after the BB with a difference in setting won during non-AT (“high probability state”), the “high probability state” is entered.

The state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and for example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”, and the AT lottery is executed. It may be configured to shift to the “predictive state” by winning, and to shift to the “AT in progress” after 16 to 32 games have passed. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device is If the AT lottery is executed by winning and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to "Gasses omen state", and after 16 to 32 games, shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state". It may be configured to do. Further, as a game section, a "stand-by section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided. For example, if the AT lottery is executed by winning "Cherry", BB If you win "BB+Cherry" and the cherry is duplicated and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until "BB" of "BB+Cherry" wins is configured as "Standby section". May be. In this way, by providing the "standby section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT is drawn. In the case of winning the lottery, until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous zone indicator lights up), the advantageous zone indicator YH is off, so win the AT lottery. It is possible to encourage the player whether or not there is. Further, when the BB is elected in the "add-on specialized state", the "add-on specialized state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, As a BB won in the "addition specialized state", execute an AT addition lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress" (for example, win the AT addition lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress") The number of games per AT game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the "special omen state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialized state" after the BB ends. In such a case, during the BB, The AT additional lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialized state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section shift control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section relating to the state of the game, and as the game section, a “normal section” that is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively high section for the player are provided. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" that is a profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M indicates that the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0. In other words, it is determined whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of stay games in the “special omen state”). Things will be 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous period end condition is a condition for ending the “advantageous period” except when the counter value of the advantageous period remaining game counter YKc-1 is 0, and for example, the AT counter value is 0. If the push order navigation has been executed a predetermined number of times, etc. In the case of No in step 3518, that is, in the case where the arbitrary advantageous period end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is finished and the "normal section" is set after the next game, information related to AT (the number of continuous AT games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) Since all the information related to (1) is cleared, the condition for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The information related to the AT to be cleared by the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, the flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. Further, although these pieces of information are also cleared by clearing the RAM at the time of changing the setting, depending on the clearing of the RAM at the time of changing the setting, the "conditional device relating to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" , The information regarding the “number of stored sheets” and the like is cleared, while the “condition device relating to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)” and the “RT state” may be performed depending on the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section). , Information regarding the “number of stored sheets” and the like is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515). The RAM may be cleared when the setting is changed to retain the "conditional device relating to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state". Further, the addresses in the range cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By thus continuing the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section", it is possible to perform the clearing by a simple process of designating the start address to be cleared in the clearing process and the range of the addresses to be cleared. In addition, when the “advantageous section” ends, a command relating to the end of the “advantageous section” is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to delete the game history such as information indicating that the "advantageous section" has been reached and information regarding how many "AT in progress" games have been executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of changing the setting is executed, the game history such as the fact that it is the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub control board S and the information regarding how many games the “AT in progress” is executed Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous period" ends because the counter value of the advantageous period remaining game counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state" In the next game, the AT-related state becomes a “low probability state”. (2) When the current AT-related state is “advantageous BB inside game”, the AT-related state in the next game is “ (3) If the current AT-related state is the "advantageous BB state", the state related to the AT in the next game is the "normal BB state", (4) Present If the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "special omen state", "additional specialized state" or "resurrection possible/impossible production state", the AT-related state is "low probability" in the next game. "State" (because the information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous zone indicator YH because the "advantageous zone" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Although the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous zone" ends and is set to the "normal zone", the detailed light-off timing is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when the game medal is inserted in the game in which the “advantageous section” ends and becomes the “normal section”. In other words, it may be configured to turn off the advantageous section display YH before the start lever D50 that allows the next game to be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to be the “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines to newly set the "advantageous section" in the next game (it is determined to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous zone remaining game counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous zone indicator YH and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In addition, in the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous period indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous period indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous period indicator YH is turned on. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new “advantageous section” (the game in the “normal section”) to the timing at which the game medal can be inserted in the game that newly becomes the “advantageous section” (new “ If the game before the "advantageous section" was a game related to re-play, set appropriately during the period until the start lever operation in the new "advantageous section" game becomes effective). Good.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in this embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). Is performed as a cycle.

First, in step 1602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking an input port of a power failure detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power interruption is currently detected (during the interrupt process this time). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data means a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting/reset button M30, a power failure detection signal, a closing acceptance sensor D10s, and a first closing sensor. D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. is information related to the detection (that is, the presence or absence of the operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state is sampled at the interrupt interval T). Be done).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on/off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switch (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of times of sampling, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is a spinning cylinder drive control process for all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) (processing relating to drive control of the reel M50). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, but the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether or not the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, the door switch flag, and the like are all OFF. If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command relating to the fact that no error is detected) (for example, register (Set in the area), and proceed to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command relating to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and proceed to step 1622. Incidentally, in step 1620, the information related to the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. The error undetected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be included). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error has occurred from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The setting process may be executed when the type of error has changed such as the second error (for example, payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU C100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Will be sent control command). Here, as the command to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button is operated as the first stop) Immediately after), a command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (third stop as the stop button. (Sent immediately after operating), sent immediately after all reels have stopped), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating stop button as display symbol stop), winning/re-winning Commands related to game winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation (limited to the advantageous period)), commands related to bonus winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), commands related to RT state (all reels From the stop until the next game is started), the command related to the state regarding AT (transmitted from the time when all reels are stopped until the next game is started), High security obstacle counter value command (transmitted immediately after operating the start lever), command relating to the number of remaining AT games (from the time when all reels are stopped until the next game is started, or immediately after operating the start lever) Command) (command is transmitted from the time when all reels are stopped until the next game is started), and the like. Next, in step 1624, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning drum type game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). It should be noted that, although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error, a dispensing error, a receiving acceptance sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. The insertion acceptance sensor retention error is when the insertion acceptance sensor detects retention of game medals. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a predetermined 7-segment LED unit of the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units), (Lights a predetermined segment of the segment) is output (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process of updating a random number value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (in the internal information register, there is an area in which an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number updating clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number updating clock falls below a predetermined value. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and moves to the next process (the process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the barrel drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. It should be noted that although the processing for one reel is illustrated in the present processing, it is supplemented that the processing corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, if No in step 6102, the process moves to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether the processing execution timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, if No in step 6106, the process moves to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel acceleration state. If Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes all the interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, “interrupt execution count” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). Timing) is determined. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintaining process, and then proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M becomes the reel constant speed state (after executing the processing of step 6116), and then the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (corresponding to the processing of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has rotated once. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal from the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M has passed a predetermined time (for example, a time value at which the interrupt process is executed 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In the present example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured to rotate 400 steps in 400 interrupt processes), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. It is longer than the time required for the reel to make one revolution (one revolution) (for example, one revolution of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance until the reel is rotated and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the time when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state is long. Even if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value at which the interrupt process is executed 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel re-acceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value at which the interrupt process is executed 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, The reel drive state is again updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel reacceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above. The reel reacceleration process and the reel acceleration process are interrupt processes for each combination of exciting phases of the stepping motor and each combination of exciting phases. The execution times of may be different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing by operating the stop button). It is determined whether or not) has been reached. If Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, if No in step 6130, the process moves to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration processing) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing for ending execution of reel deceleration processing) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. The rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example starts rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained below (reel When the driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed. Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, among the Φ0 to Φ3, the column indicating the phase to be excited is indicated in the column of “exciting phase” (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from the start to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is driven according to the driving pattern according to each driving state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", "reel rotation start standby state", "reel acceleration state", "reel constant speed state", "reel deceleration standby state", and "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases in the upward direction, and the horizontal axis is time and the time elapses in the right direction. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and when the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand, step out, etc. No. (If the reel rotation failure occurs, it will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the "reel stop state" is set, the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are Is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting until the stepping motor acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) is started after the start lever D50 is operated. This waiting period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the “reel stop state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from the time when the drive state of the reel becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed. If it is done, the "reel rotation start standby state" is entered.

Next, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100+60+30+15+8+4+2+1=220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left part of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is changed to “reel constant speed”). State))). Next, at the timing of (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" is finished by executing the timer interrupt process once again, the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times. The status is updated to "reel constant speed status". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel driving state remains the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interrupt processing, in other words, the final reel rotation state in the “reel acceleration state”. In the case of "φ3, φ0" which is a combination of exciting phases, the interrupt processing is configured to be executed only once. Similar to the "reel constant speed state" in which the interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When no reel rotation abnormality occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel acceleration state" and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state" are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The “exciting phase” is a combination of exciting phases, and the “interrupt execution count” is the number of times interrupt processing is executed in which the exciting phase is excited. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited 220 times by the timer interrupt process, and the interrupt process is performed 100 times by (KA) "φ0". KB) “φ0, φ1”: 60 interrupts → (KC) “φ1”: 30 interrupts → (KD) “φ1, φ2”: 15 interrupts → (KE) “φ2 Interrupt process 8 times → (KF) "φ2, φ3" interrupt process 4 times → (KG) "φ3" interrupt process 2 times → (KH) "φ3, φ0" interrupt process The process is performed once to execute the interrupt process to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt process is merely an example and may be changed without any problem). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the number of times the interrupt process is executed in the combination of the one exciting phase is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in the constant speed state (when the constant reel speed maintaining process is executed), the interrupt process is performed once by (TA) “φ0” → (TB) by “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt process once → (TC) "φ1" once interrupt process → (TD) "φ1, φ2" once interrupt process → (TE) "φ2" once interrupt process → (TF) “φ2, φ3” once interrupt processing → (TG) “φ3” once interrupt processing → (TH) “φ3, φ0” once interrupt processing → (TA) “ The interrupt processing is performed once in φ0”→(TB) The interrupt processing is performed once in “φ0, φ1”→..., and (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. To excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once for all combinations of the exciting phases.

Next, when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Will be updated. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which a combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt processing), and "reel deceleration standby state". "Indicates a state from when the player operates the stop button to when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, reel slip corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and deceleration of the reel is started. When the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel. 4-phase excitation is performed to excite everything. When excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing of (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the spinning-roller gaming machine according to the present example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value at which interrupt processing is executed 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel accelerating state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel is normally accelerated during the reel accelerating process. Whether the reel is normally accelerated, in other words, whether or not the reel is at a constant speed (whether or not a reel rotation failure has occurred), the process of step 6124 (reel drive state is set to the reel constant speed state). The determination is made after a lapse of a predetermined time after the update, but in the processing of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so that the reel is not at a constant speed (reel rotation failure occurs). If it is determined that it has occurred), the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by not determining whether or not the acceleration of the reel was normally performed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, , If the reel rotation speed can be reached to the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. Since the reel sensor detects the index until a predetermined time has elapsed after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the re-accelerating process. By executing the reel re-accelerating process, the player It is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated). Further, during the execution of the reel accelerating process, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced by not performing the process of determining whether or not the acceleration of the reel is normally performed. In addition, since it is configured in this way, when a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is performing the reel acceleration processing, the following operation is performed. Becomes

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive status is updated to reel acceleration status → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel acceleration processing is completed → Reel drive status is updated to reel constant speed status → Reel constant speed maintenance processing is executed → Reel constant processing Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintenance processing→detection of reel rotation failure→reel re-acceleration processing is executed. In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is hindered by a member provided in the vicinity of the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel is rubbed against the reel window D160, etc.), the step-out occurs, etc., and the reel is accelerated. Is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintaining process, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive status is updated to reel acceleration status → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue reel acceleration processing → End reel acceleration processing execution →Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state →Reel constant speed maintaining process is executed →Reel rotation failure is detected →Reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game progresses smoothly. Will be possible. Further, as described above, even when the spinning drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously executed, and the same interrupt as when the spinning drum rotation failure does not occur. When the reel accelerating process has been executed the number of times, the execution of the reel accelerating process is ended. With this configuration, when the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process, the reel rotation speed can easily reach the constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process. it can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive status is updated to reel acceleration status → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power failure → Continue reel acceleration processing (unprocessed) Reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → Finish execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive state Is updated to a constant reel speed state, a constant reel speed maintaining process is executed, a defective reel rotation is detected, and a reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated within the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can be smoothly advanced. In addition, if the power is cut off during execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration process when the index is detected, and by such a configuration, the situation in which the player cannot progress the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process It can be hard to occur.

<<Operation after final stop button operation>>
In the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to this example, after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, the final reel (the reel that is rotating to the end and is also referred to as the third reel) stops, and the winning combination It is configured that the payout of the game medals can be executed when the following symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

<Action 1>
The reel starts rotating as a winning game, the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state, the constant speed state maintaining process is executed, the stop button is accepted, and the first reel is stopped as the first stop operation. Button operation→first reel stop display→second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation→second reel stop display→third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button Operation is accepted) → Reel drive status is updated to reel deceleration status → Power failure occurs → Third reel moves to stop display position (rotation) → Power failure is detected → Power failure processing is executed → Power recovery → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to operate as described above by performing a process related to stop display→payout of game medals. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game in which a small winning combination, such as the common bell described above, that can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop button when it is won. Immediately after the power is cut off due to a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even when the number of slipping frames is the maximum), the power cut is detected before the power is detected. It can be configured so that the movement (rotation) to the scheduled stop position is completed. Further, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) that forms the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be normally paid out, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
The reel starts rotating as a winning game → The reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First stop as the first reel stop operation Button operation→first reel stop display→second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation→second reel stop display→third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button → Reel drive status is updated to reel deceleration status → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Wins the reel as seen by the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, For example, in the game in which the winning combination of the Bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of the Bell role is not stopped and displayed from the viewpoint of the player, but the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the internal process) → The process related to payout of game medals may be executed. With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and even when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stop-displayed on the reel as seen from the player. The operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medal can be executed, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing when the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel is stopped and displayed until the process related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel rotation failure occurs. The present invention is applicable to all cases where the reel corresponding to 3 stops cannot be stopped at the planned stop position (also applicable to the action related to reel rotation failure exemplified below). In addition, in the above-mentioned action 2, the action in the game winning the winning combination is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations, the same operation is performed. Good). The reel starts rotating as a winning game → The reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First stop as the first reel stop operation Button operation→first reel stop display→second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation→second reel stop display→third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button → Reel drive status is updated to reel deceleration status → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player Therefore, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 → the process relating to the payout of the game medals is executed. As a winning combination in the above-mentioned or later-described action, the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game is determined. The winning combination may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that can be won regardless, or the winning combination may or may not be awarded depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, Cherry). Also, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect of flashing a back lamp (sometimes called a back lamp effect), in the predetermined game state, In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, the reel corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is backed up even if the reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed. You may comprise so that a lamp production may be performed. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to reel rotation failure. The present invention may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to the reel rotation failure (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
The reel starts rotating as a winning game → The reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First stop as the first reel stop operation Button operation → First reel stop display → Second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect the power failure → Execute the processing at the time of power failure → The third reel is the player It is impossible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but in the determination processing of step 1269 it is determined that the symbol combination is normal ( This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed. For example, in the game in which the bell combination is elected, the reel corresponds to the winning combination of the bell combination as seen from the player. Although the symbol combination was not stopped and displayed, when the stop control for normally displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination was stopped by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → game Execution of processing relating to payout of medals may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, the timing to detect the power failure, the timing to stop the power supply to the gaming machine due to the power failure, the timing to determine that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269, and the timing to restore power are However, the timing is not limited to the above timing, the timing of detecting the power failure, the power to the gaming machine due to the power failure occurring during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the process related to the payout of game medals. It is sufficient that there is a timing at which the supply of power is stopped, a timing at which it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing at step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored, and the reel corresponding to the third stop button due to the occurrence of power shutdown Is applicable to all cases where the vehicle could not be stopped at the planned stop position (the same applies to the operation including power interruption described below). With this configuration, the power is cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. Even in the case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is selected at a timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medal after the power is restored (the payout of the game medal is driven by the hopper). It is possible to execute not only the payout from the outlet by the above, but also the display of the credit number display device (the increase in the number of credits is included) can be executed, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. You can The timing at which the power is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power is cut off. Further, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect of flashing a back lamp (sometimes called a back lamp effect), in the predetermined game state, In the game in which the predetermined winning combination has been won, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is also displayed when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed. It may be configured to execute an effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is stopped at the planned stop position due to power failure. It may be applied when the reels corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the power interruption (the same applies to other actions). Is).

<Action 4>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation as second stop button → 2nd reel stop display → 3rd reel stop operation 3rd stop button operation (3rd stop button Operation is accepted) → Reel drive status is updated to reel deceleration status → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen by the player → Wins the reel as seen by the player Although the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example, , In the game that was lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the symbol corresponding to the loss by the process inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player When the stop control for stopping and displaying the combination is normally executed)->Payout of game medals may not be executed. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination on the player's side. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped, it will be lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop button operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal The game machine can be configured so as not to perform payout, and can be a fair game machine, and can also be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. In addition, the action 4 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game not winning the bell (a game winning the re-game role, a game winning the watermelon, etc.) It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination stopped and displayed by the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to rotation failure, but in the determination processing of step 1269. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, the display determination error (non-recoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that the display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation to operate 2nd stop button → 2nd reel stop display → power cut occurs and power supply to game machine stops → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of (reception of the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power failure is detected → power-off processing is executed → third reel from the player Seeing cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but in the determination processing of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (stop). This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation is normally completed. For example, in the game in which the reels are lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the reels is not stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player. , When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the process inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → Power restoration → The payout of game medals is not executed It may be configured to operate as follows. With this configuration, in the game that has been lost as a result of the lottery, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is viewed from the player as a winning combination. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped, it will be lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop button operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal The game machine can be configured so as not to perform payout, and can be a fair game machine, and can also be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. In addition, the action 5 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game not winning the bell (a game winning the re-playing combination, a game winning the watermelon, etc.), a reel rotation failure is caused. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination stopped and displayed by the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to rotation failure, but in the determination processing of step 1269. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, the display determination error (non-recoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that the display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation as second stop button → 2nd reel stop display → 3rd reel stop operation 3rd stop button operation (3rd stop button Operation is accepted) → Reel drive status is updated to reel deceleration status → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Bonus role on the reel as seen from the player ( For example, although the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed). This is the case, for example, in the game in which the bonus combination has not been won and is lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the player's stop button When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the process inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of), the bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to operate as follows. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning combination lottery has been lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel corresponds to the bonus winning combination as seen from the player. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped, it will be lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If you accept the operation of the stop button, and if the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the bonus will be awarded even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. The game machine can be configured not to start, and can be a fair game machine, and can also be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. Note that the above action 6 is not limited to losing only, and for example, a game that has not won a bonus combination (not inside the bonus) and has not won a bonus combination (wins a re-game combination). It should be noted that the present invention can be applied to a case where a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In addition, in the above-mentioned action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (these operations can also be applied when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur). Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, the bonus is not started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, in the case where there is no reel rotation failure in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following operation is performed. Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and in the determination processing of step 1269 It is possible to exemplify such an operation that the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (the type of bonus combination), it may have a bonus to be executed and a bonus not to be executed. The execution/non-execution of the freeze may be different depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 7>
As a game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel starts → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation as 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → power failure occurs and power supply to game machine stops → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as the stop operation of (reception of the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power failure is detected → power failure processing is executed → the third reel is from the player Can't move (rotate) to the planned stop position → The player sees the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) on the reel, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269. (When it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example, in the game in which the bonus combination is not won and the game is lost, The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination was stopped and displayed on the reel, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was normally performed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player. (When executed)→power recovery→bonus does not start, and freeze at the time of starting bonus may not be executed. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is given a bonus role from the player's point of view. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) The operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, the game is played. The game machine can be configured so that the medal bonus is not started, and the game machine can be a fair game machine, and can also be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. Note that the above action 6 is not limited to losing only, and for example, a game that has not won a bonus combination (not inside the bonus) and has not won a bonus combination (wins a re-game combination). It should be noted that the present invention can be applied to a case where a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In addition, in the above-mentioned action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, if the power supply is not cut off, the following operation is performed (this is also applicable to other operations if the rotation failure and the power supply are not generated). Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, the bonus is not started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off during the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following operation is performed. Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and in the determination processing of step 1269 It is possible to exemplify such an operation that the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (the type of bonus combination), it may have a bonus to be executed and a bonus not to be executed. The execution/non-execution of the freeze may be different depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed during the bonus inside or as a game that wins the bonus role → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → defective reel rotation → move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position from the viewpoint of the player Not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the viewpoint of the player, but in the determination processing of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The bonus starts, In addition, the freeze at the start of the bonus may be executed to operate as described above. With such a configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus hand is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is stopped at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can be configured to start a bonus and perform a freeze executed at the time of starting the bonus, which is remarkable for a player who does not start the bonus due to reel rotation failure in a situation where the bonus should be started. In addition to being able to be constructed so as not to cause a disadvantage, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure did not occur. Become.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that wins the bonus role → Updates the reel drive status to a constant speed status → Performs constant speed status maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Operate the first stop button as the operation of stopping the first reel → Operate the stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the operation of stopping the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Stop power and play Stop supplying power to the machine → Operate the third stop button as a third reel stop operation (accept operation of the third stop button) → Update reel drive status to reel deceleration status → Detect power failure → Power off Time processing is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player However, in the determination process of step 1269, it may be configured such that the symbol combination is determined to be normal→power recovery→bonus starts, and freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to is accepted, and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. However, it can be configured so as to start the bonus and perform the freeze executed at the time of starting the bonus, which is remarkable for a player who does not start the bonus due to power-off in a situation where the bonus should be started. It is possible to configure so as not to cause a disadvantage, and in the same way as when the reel rotation failure does not occur, by executing the freeze at the time of starting the bonus, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort. Become.

<Operation 10>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation as second stop button → 2nd reel stop display → 3rd reel stop operation 3rd stop button operation (3rd stop button Operation is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Replay role on the reel as seen from the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, in the determination processing of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, For example, in the game that is lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the viewpoint of the player, but the loss is dealt with by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination is normally executed) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-playing lamp D290 is not newly lit. You may comprise. With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the role lottery is lost, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is re-played by the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) The operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed. The automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly turned on. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination that the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, The internal processing causes a loss, and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is received. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in which the RT state other than the re-play combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same is applicable to the case). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. In addition, the action 10 is not limited to losing only, and is applied, for example, when a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed in a game in which the re-play combination is not won. Here's what you can do. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (these operations can also be applied when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur). Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss on the reel as seen from the player is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is determined in step 1269 by the determination process. It is determined that the combination is normal, the automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lighted. The automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) when the re-play combination is stopped and displayed for a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game medals bet in the game won for the re-play combination. It is supposed that bets are automatically placed even if the player does not operate or inserts a game medal from the medal insertion slot. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game won as the re-play combination, the following operation is performed. Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination processing of step 1269 Then, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, and an automatic bet is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on (if the re-play combination is won in the previous game, the re-play lamp D290 is turned on. Is continued)).

<Action 11>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation to operate 2nd stop button → 2nd reel stop display → power cut occurs and power supply to game machine stops → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of (reception of the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power failure is detected → power-off processing is executed → third reel from the player Seeing cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but in the determination processing of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal ( This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and, for example, in the case of a lost game, a symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. However, when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → power restoration → stop display of the re-play combination A corresponding automatic bet may not be made, and the replay lamp D290 may not be newly turned on. With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is re-played by the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost due to internal processing of the gaming machine, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to is accepted, and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed. Also, the automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly turned on. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination that the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, The internal processing causes a loss, and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is received. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in which the RT state other than the re-play combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same is applicable to the case). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. In addition, the action 11 is not limited to only the loss, for example, in a game not winning the re-play combination, it is applied when the power supply is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed. Here's what you can do. That is, if the power supply is not cut off, the following operation is performed (this is also applicable to other operations if the rotation failure and the power supply are not generated). Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss on the reel as seen from the player is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is determined in step 1269 by the determination process. It is determined that the combination is normal, the automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lighted. On the other hand, if the power failure does not occur in the game won as the re-play combination, the following operation is performed. Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel Stop display→operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel→stop display of second reel→operate third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination processing of step 1269 Then, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, and an automatic bet is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on (if the re-play combination is won in the previous game, the re-play lamp D290 is turned on. Is continued)).

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won for replay → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button effective → First stop as stop operation for first reel Button operation→first reel stop display→second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation→second reel stop display→third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button Operation is accepted) → The reel drive status is updated to the reel deceleration status → The reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Replay to the reel as seen from the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed, in the determination processing of step 1269 it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gaming combination is performed, and the re-playing lamp D290 is displayed. It may be configured to newly light up and operate as described above. With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the role lottery is re-play, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is re-played by the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to is not stop-displayed, each reel (left reel is selected at the timing when the player has won the re-game in the internal processing of the gaming machine and can stop-display the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination. , Middle reel, right reel) accepts the operation of the stop button, and if the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is normally executed, it corresponds to the re-gaming combination. Even if the symbol combination to be performed is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made, and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, so that the re-playing can be performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet has been executed and whether or not the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. In addition, in the action 12, when the re-play combination that the RT state is to be transitioned to when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed. Even if not, the RT state will shift. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is unlikely to occur, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Operation 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won for replay → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button effective → First stop as stop operation for first reel Button operation → First reel stop display → Second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect the power failure → Execute the processing at the time of power failure → The third reel is the player It is impossible to move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from → The reels do not show the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination as seen from the player, but it is determined in the determination processing of step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal. -> Power recovery -> An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gaming combination is made, and the re-gaming lamp D290 may be newly turned on. With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the part lottery is re-play, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is re-played by the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left) is selected at the timing when the winning combination for the replay is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming winning combination is stopped. Reel, middle reel, right reel) operation of the stop button is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is normally executed, it becomes a re-gaming combination. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, so that the re-playing can be performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet has been executed and whether or not the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Further, in the action 13, when the re-play combination that the RT state is to be transitioned to when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed. Even if not, the RT state will shift. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is unlikely to occur, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Action 14>
The reel starts rotating as a game in which the RT state is changed (sometimes referred to as RT transition), the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state, the constant speed state maintaining process is executed, and the stop button is accepted. Validated → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Of the third reel As the stop operation, the third stop button is operated (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position from the viewpoint of the player. (Rotation) cannot be done → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination processing of step 1269 it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state transitions as described above. It may be configured to operate. With such a configuration, in the game winning the RT transition combination, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination on the reel as seen from the player. Even when the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) has been selected as the RT transition combination in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), the operation of the stop button is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is received. Even if is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and to advance the game along with the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. It should be noted that the RT transition role is a role that transitions to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state, and the RT transition role depends on the RT state in which the user is staying. Or not. That is, the predetermined combination A may be the RT transition combination in the RT state A, but the predetermined combination A may not be the RT transition combination in the RT state B. In the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Action 15>
The reel starts rotating as a game in which the RT state is changed (sometimes referred to as RT transition), the reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state, the constant speed state maintaining process is executed, and the stop button is accepted. Validated → Operate the first stop button as the operation of stopping the first reel → Display the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the operation of stopping the second reel → Display the second reel is stopped → Power off occurs Then, the supply of electric power to the game machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the operation of stopping the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → The power-off process is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not shown as stopped by the player, but step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, and the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored or the RT state may shift before the power restores). It may be configured to do. With this configuration, in the game winning the RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination as seen from the player. Even when the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle) is selected as the RT transition combination in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. Reel, right reel) accepts the operation of the stop button, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and to advance the game along with the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that does not win the combination of RT state transition (sometimes referred to as RT transition combination) → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button Reception is validated → The first reel stop button is operated as the first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second reel stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → The third reel Operating the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → updating the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → defective reel rotation → the third reel is at a planned stop position as seen from the player Can not be moved (rotated) → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination processing of step 1269 it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → RT state does not transition May be configured to operate as described above. With such a configuration, in a game in which the RT transition combination is not won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination as seen from the player. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With such a configuration, for example, when the push-order navigation for preventing the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, is performed, the player operates the stop button according to the push-order navigation. Nevertheless, even if the RT combination shifts (falls down) due to poor rotation of the reel and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is not intended by the player. This can be a gaming machine that does not generate a profit, and the game can be progressed along with the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming hall can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that does not win the role in which the RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintaining process is executed → the stop button Acceptance becomes valid → First stop button is operated as a first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped display → Second reel button is operated as a second reel stop operation → Second reel is stop displayed → Power is cut off Occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as a third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power off Is detected → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is shown as stopped by the player, In the determination processing of step 1269, it may be configured that the symbol combination is determined to be normal and the RT state does not shift as described above. With this configuration, in a game that has not been selected as the RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is changed to the RT transition combination as seen from the player. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With such a configuration, for example, when the push-order navigation for preventing the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, is performed, the player operates the stop button according to the push-order navigation. Nevertheless, even if the RT combination shifts (falls down) due to poor rotation of the reel and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is not intended by the player. This can be a gaming machine that does not generate a profit, and the game can be progressed along with the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming hall can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd reel stop operation as 2nd reel stop operation → reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position from the player's point → game From the person's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel → The tempo sound is not output from the speaker Also, the rotation of the reel is started as a lost game → Drive reel Update status to constant speed status → Perform constant speed status maintenance processing → Accept acceptance of stop button → Operate first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stop display of first reel → Second reel As a stop operation, the second stop button is operated → reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen by the player → effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen by the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed above (when the second reel is moved to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel). →) The speaker may output a tempo sound, and the speaker may be configured to operate as described above. When the reel rotation failure does not occur, the reel starts to rotate as a lost game → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted Becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as a stop operation of the first reel → The first reel is stopped and displayed → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel is stopped as seen by the player Move to the planned position (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player → The tempo sound is output from the speaker. As a game, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the stop operation of the first reel → 1 reel is stopped display → 2nd reel is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is moved to the planned stop position as seen from the player (rotation) → 1st reel and 2nd reel seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line in →. The tempo sound is not output from the speaker. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop. And stopped to the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempai, if the bonus symbol is not tempeh when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempai sound is not output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker enables the player to quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. It did not stop to stop, in other words, even if the bonus design did not tempe, if the bonus design was planned to stop at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempai sound is output Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker enables the player to quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred.

<Action 19>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel Operate → Stop display of the first reel → Stop power supply to the gaming machine due to power failure → Operate the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detect power failure → Process at power failure Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → Power Resume → No tempo sound is output from the speaker. Also, as a lost game, reel rotation starts → Reel drive status is updated to constant speed status → Constant speed status maintenance processing is executed → Accept stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated as a stop operation of the first reel → The first reel is displayed as a stop → The power supply is stopped and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → Detecting power failure → Executing processing at power failure → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Bonus on the effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed (when the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel). It may be configured to operate as described above in which power is restored and a tempo sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as a function when the power is not cut off, the reel starts rotating as a lost game → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button Validated → Operate the first stop button as the operation to stop the first reel → Display the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the operation to stop the second reel → Schedule the second reel to stop as seen by the player Move to the position (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player → The tempo sound is output from the speaker. Starts the rotation of the reel → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → executes a constant speed state maintenance process → accepts the stop button becomes effective → operates the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → the first reel Reel stop display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves to the planned stop position as seen by the player (rotation) → The first reel and the second reel as seen by the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line → The tempo sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. Note that the timing sound may be output from the speaker before the power-off process is completed or after the power is restored after the power-off. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first. Stop and stop as the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempai, if the bonus symbol is not tempeh when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempai sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker enables the player to quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. It did not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not tempe, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempo sound was output if the bonus symbol was to be tempaied Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker enables the player to quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop is not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop is not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is performed. Immediately after that, the reel rotation failure occurs).

<Action 20>
The reel starts rotating as a game that is not in the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → The first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed → The second stop button is operated as a second reel stop operation → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel reaches a planned stop position as seen from the player Can not move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player → The bonus confirmed tempo sound is not output from the speaker Also, inside the bonus Or, as the game winning the bonus, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel stop operation Operate the stop button→display the first reel is stopped→operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel→reel rotation failure occurs→the second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stop-displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player (when the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the first reel and the second reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the reel.) → The speaker may output the bonus-determined tempo sound, which may be configured as described above. When the reel rotation failure does not occur, as the game inside the bonus or the bonus winning game, the reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintaining process → The acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the stop operation of the first reel → The first reel is stopped displayed → The second stop button is operated as the stop operation of the second reel → The second reel Moves from the player to the scheduled stop position (rotation) → The player sees the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel as a stop display → The bonus confirmation tempe sound is output from the speaker Outputs Also, as a game that is not in the bonus and is a miss, the rotation of the reel starts → The reel drive status is updated to the constant speed status → The constant speed status maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player (Rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player → The bonus fixed tempo sound is not output from the speaker Structure configured as described above You may. It should be noted that the bonus-determined tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols forming a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the activated line (temporary) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, and the bonus is not in the inside of the bonus, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol constituting the bonus symbol When the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempeed, if the bonus symbol is not to be tempered when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure occurs due to the output from the speaker. can do. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the combination lottery is a bonus combination or the game executed in the bonus inside, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and a bonus symbol is formed. The symbol combination that does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not tempe, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is tempted In this case, the bonus fixed tempo sound is output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the output from the speaker causes the player to cause the reel rotation failure. You can quickly detect what is happening. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop is not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop is not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is performed. Immediately after that, the reel rotation failure occurs).

<Action 21>
As the game that has been lost, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel Operate → Stop display of the first reel → Stop power supply to the gaming machine due to power failure → Operate the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detect power failure → Process at power failure Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → Power Resume → No tempo sound is output from the speaker. Also, as a lost game, reel rotation starts → Reel drive status is updated to constant speed status → Constant speed status maintenance processing is executed → Accept stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated as a stop operation of the first reel → The first reel is displayed as a stop → The power supply is stopped and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → Detecting power failure → Executing processing at power failure → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Bonus on the effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed (when the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel). It may be configured to operate as described above in which power is restored and a tempo sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as a function when the power is not cut off, the reel starts rotating as a lost game → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button Validated → Operate the first stop button as the operation to stop the first reel → Display the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the operation to stop the second reel → Schedule the second reel to stop as seen by the player Move to the position (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player → The tempo sound is output from the speaker. Starts the rotation of the reel → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → executes a constant speed state maintenance process → accepts the stop button becomes effective → operates the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → the first reel Reel stop display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves to the planned stop position as seen by the player (rotation) → The first reel and the second reel as seen by the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line → The tempo sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. Note that the timing sound may be output from the speaker before the power-off process is completed or after the power is restored after the power-off. With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery has been lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first. Stop and stop as the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempai, if the bonus symbol is not tempeh when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempai sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly detect that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure. You can Similarly, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, the power is cut off immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. It did not stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not tempe, if the bonus symbol was planned to be tempered when stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, a tempai sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly recognize that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure. it can. In the present operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop is not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop is not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is performed. Immediately after the power-off process is executed).

<Action 22>
The reel starts rotating as a game that is not in the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → The first reel As the stop operation, the first stop button is operated → The first reel is stopped → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The second reel is operated as the stop operation of the second reel → The power is cut off Detection→Processing when power is cut off→Second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player→Corresponds to a bonus combination on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the player Symbol combination stop display → No bonus finalization sound is output from the speaker. Also, the rotation of the reel is started as a game inside the bonus or the bonus is won → The reel drive status is updated to a constant speed status → Constant speed status is maintained Execution of the process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the operation of stopping the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The power is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → detection of power failure → execution of processing at power failure → second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position from the player's point of view → player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel (when the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel). The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed)→A bonus confirmation tempo sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as the action when the power is not cut off, the reel is started to rotate as a game inside the bonus or the game won the bonus → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process Execution → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the stop operation of the first reel → The first reel is stopped displayed → The second stop button is operated as the stop operation of the second reel → The second reel is Move from the player to the planned stop position (rotation) → The player sees the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel → The bonus confirmation tempe sound is output from the speaker In addition, as a game that is not in the bonus and is a miss, the rotation of the reels starts → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → The first stop button is operated as a stop operation of the first reel → the first reel is stopped and displayed → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel is moved to a planned stop position as seen from the player ( (Rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player → The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output from the speaker May be. It should be noted that the bonus-determined tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols forming a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the activated line (temporary) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not in the inside of the bonus, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is formed. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempeed, if the bonus symbol is not tempeeed when it is stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example. Will not output the bonus fixed tempo sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to power failure, the output from the speaker causes the player to have an abnormality on the reel due to power failure. Can be detected quickly. Further, similarly, in the game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus combination or the game executed in the bonus inside, the power-off process occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The symbol combination which constitutes does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not tempe, the bonus symbol is tempered when it stops at the planned stop position of this example. If it is scheduled, a bonus fixed tempo sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to power failure, the output from the speaker will cause the player to abnormally turn on the reel due to power failure. It is possible to quickly detect that a problem has occurred. In the present operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop is not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop is not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is performed. Immediately after the power-off process is executed).

<Action 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that has been won as a predetermined re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → defective reel rotation → move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position as seen by the player Cannot be done → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp is not lit Also, the number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel rotation starts as a game that has not been won as a re-gaming combination → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintaining process → Accept acceptance of stop button → Operate first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stop display of first reel → Second reel The second stop button is operated as the reel stop operation→The second reel is stopped and displayed→The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted)→The reel drive state is the reel deceleration state Update → reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position from the viewpoint of the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is stopped → the max bet lamp is turned on It may be configured to operate as follows. When the reel rotation failure does not occur, the number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that wins a predetermined re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Execution of constant speed state maintenance processing -> acceptance of stop button is enabled -> 1st stop button is operated as 1st reel stop operation -> 1st reel is stop displayed-2nd stop button is 2nd reel stop operation Operation → Second reel is stopped display → Third stop button is operated as a third reel stop operation (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Third reel from player Move to the expected stop position (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is stopped → The max bet lamp does not light up Also, the number of credits is 1 or more, and the re-play combination is not won As a game, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the stop operation of the first reel → 1 reel stop display→second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation→second reel stop display→third reel stop operation third stop button (third stop button operation accepted) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is not stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp is turned on It may be configured to operate as described above. With such a configuration, in the game that is won for the re-game, when the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. Also, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not effective. In addition, in the game which has not been won for the re-play, when the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel is started as a game that is won as a predetermined re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button as the operation of stopping the first reel → Operate the stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the operation of stopping the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Stop power and play Stop supplying power to the machine → Operate the third stop button as a third reel stop operation (accept operation of the third stop button) → Update reel drive status to reel deceleration status → Detect power failure → Power off Time processing is executed → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is not stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp is not lit Also, the number of credits Is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game that has not been won as a re-play combination → Update the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance processing → Accept the stop button → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1 reel -> 1st reel is stop display -> Operate 2nd stop button as 2nd reel stop operation -> 2nd reel is stop display -> Power is cut off to game machine Power supply is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive status is updated to the reel deceleration status → Power failure is detected → Power failure processing → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is displayed as a stop → The max bet lamp is turned on As described above You may comprise. Also, when the power is not cut off, the number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts to rotate as a game that wins a predetermined re-play combination → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant Execution of speed state maintenance processing -> acceptance of stop button is enabled -> 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel -> 1st reel is stopped display -> 2nd stop button is operated as stop operation of 2nd reel → The second reel is displayed as a stop → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel is seen by the player Move to the planned stop position (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped → The max bet lamp does not light up Also, the number of credits is 1 or more and the game is not won for the replay combination Starts the rotation of the reel → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → executes a constant speed state maintenance process → accepts the stop button becomes effective → operates the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → the first reel Reel stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is not stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp is turned on It may be configured to operate as described above. With such a configuration, in the game that is won for the replay, when the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed. Also, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not effective. Also, in a game that has not been won for a replay, when the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed, the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective by turning on the max bet lamp.

<Action 25>
It is a game in which a bonus is being executed, and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player to satisfy the bonus ending condition. Rotation is started → Reel drive status is updated to constant speed status → Constant speed status maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel is stopped Display→Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel→Stop display of second reel→Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accept operation of third stop button)→Reel drive state To the reel deceleration state → defective reel rotation occurs → the third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, The freeze at the end of the bonus may be executed as described above. In addition, as a function when the reel rotation failure does not occur, it is a game during bonus execution, and a winning combination is won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player. As a game that satisfies the bonus ending condition, the reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintaining process is executed → the stop button is accepted → the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation of the first reel → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped displayed → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (Receive the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move the third reel to the planned stop position from the player's perspective (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination It may be configured such that the stop display→the bonus is finished, and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final game of the bonus, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. Also in the case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can quickly recognize that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be sensed and that does not give an uncomfortable feeling to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
It is a game in which the bonus is being executed, and the player has won the winning combination, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player to satisfy the bonus ending condition. Rotation is started → Reel drive status is updated to constant speed status → Constant speed status maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes valid → First stop button is operated as stop operation for first reel → First reel is stopped Display -> Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel -> Stop display of the second reel -> Stop power supply to the gaming machine due to power failure -> Third stop button as a stop operation for the third reel (Reception of the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state → Detect the power failure → Execute the processing at the time of power failure → Move the third reel to the scheduled stop position from the viewpoint of the player ( The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed. The bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed. In addition, as a function when the power is not cut off, the game is in the bonus execution, the winning combination is won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player. As a game in which the bonus ending condition is satisfied, the rotation of the reel is started → The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintaining process is executed → The stop button is accepted → The first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation→the first reel is stopped display→the second stop button is operated as a second reel stop operation→the second reel is stopped displayed→the third stop button is operated as a third reel stop operation Operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player (rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops Display→Bonus may be ended, and freeze may be executed at the end of the bonus. With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final game of the bonus, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even if there is not, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can confirm that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and that does not give a sense of incongruity to the progress of the game.

Note that, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration processing in the spinning drum type game machine according to the present embodiment described above, the reel acceleration processing execution period when no spinning drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing=A reel acceleration processing When the spinning drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the spinning drum, the execution period of the reel acceleration processing until the spinning drum rotation failure occurs=the spinning drum rotation failure when the spinning drum rotation failure occurs during execution of the B reel acceleration processing. When the execution period of the reel acceleration process after the occurrence of the rotation failure=C, A=B+C. Further, the number of interrupt process executions of the reel acceleration process when the spinning drum rotation failure does not occur during the execution of the reel acceleration processing=D The spinning drum rotation when the spinning drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing until failure occurs = E Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing after occurrence of rotational failure of spinning cylinder when spinning cylinder rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing =F, the configuration is such that D=E+F.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPU C100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and the error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation). The lower 1 byte of the checksum thus obtained or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information regarding the push order, in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table showing correspondence with. For example, it is indicated that the instruction number for notifying "middle→right→left" as the pressing order is "A5". Next, on the left side of the drawing, when the pressing order is “left→middle→right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the pressing order display device D270, the advantageous zone display YH, and the effect display device S40. The image displayed in FIG. Here, the pressing order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display system, and also serves as a payout amount display device. Further, when the payout of medals is executed, the number of paid-out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when performing the push-order navigation, if the display of the push-order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push-order display device D270 indicates whether the payout number of medals or the push order is displayed. It will be difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish whether it is the payout number of medals or the push-order navigation display, the push-order display device D270 displays “=” in the left digit like “=1”. According to the configuration, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is the display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured so that it can be discriminated that it is a push-order navigation display, and is configured so as to prevent the player from misidentifying. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided in the lower right part of the push-order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of "40 remaining games" showing the number of remaining games of the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, the right side of the drawing illustrates an image displayed on the press order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the press order is “middle→left→right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, and the "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that the winning combination with a pushing order (of the condition devices whose winning combination is stopped and displayed depending on the reel stopping order is a condition device involving payout of medals, for example, a bell) and the re-playing combination with a pushing order (depending on the reel stopping order Of the condition devices having different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment number of the instruction number of the condition device relating to the re-play combination may be different, and the display system of the push-order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead of this, for example, an LED indicator may be used to give instructions by lighting a plurality of LEDs in accordance with a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. Note that the advantageous section indicator YH may be provided in the lower right part of the credit amount display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous section display YH is turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he or she visually checks the credit amount display device D200 to check whether or not there are any medals remaining. Then, if the medal remains, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the adjustment button D60 until it becomes effective, the user-friendly gaming machine can prevent accidentally quitting the game even though it is the "advantageous section" from the next game. be able to.

In addition, the mode of notifying the game section on the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and the same section indicator as the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section indicator is It may be configured to include two). In such a configuration, when the left section display is lit, the fact that the current game section is the “normal section” is notified, while the right section is displayed. When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is the “advantageous section”. Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, the "normal section" may be turned on, and the "advantageous section" may be "blinking". Further, the display mode of the section indicator is configured to be changed according to "AT inside BB inside game", "AT BB state", "AT precursor state", "AT during state", etc. in the "advantageous zone". May be. Further, the fact that the current game section is the "standby section" may be recognized separately from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section". However, regarding the distinction between the "normal section" and the "advantageous section", the section indicator used is set to be an easily distinguishable mode, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is the "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easier.

Regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursory state" or "AT preparing", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. The configuration may be adopted (in the state where the player has a relatively low profit, the disadvantage for the player that the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” is decremented is not notified). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section display is turned on to notify the player that the "advantageous section" is in effect. At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section display is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57, the control processing executed on the side of the sub control board S will be described.

<Sub program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing the sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start processing is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value which is calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described below. It is determined whether or not the power is shut off during the recovery from the power supply, that is, whether or not the power is completely recovered.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits the interrupt and executes it when the power is cut off. Return processing to 1 command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the above-described determination process in step 2008 that the checksum values do not match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM in step 2014. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or in the case of No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing, which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the CPUSC returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed appropriately according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing the sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates the checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. If it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process ends. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power supply is restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of times of instantaneous interruption. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing the one-command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG.

Next, in step 2252, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether it is not the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPU SC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of start lever operation effect related determination processing described later. To do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start lever operation time process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in Step 2252, in other words, when it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S determines in Step 2254 whether it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, when it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the first time cylinder stop acceptance time processing which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2258 the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S determines whether it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPU SC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of second cylinder stop acceptance time processing, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2262 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S calls a subroutine of third-time cylinder stop time effect-related determination processing described later. To execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third-time cylinder stop acceptance time process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stop display symbol time process (not shown), and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, in other words, when it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately shifts to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation effect related determination process which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state of the game is a “high probability state”. If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the number of high-secure obstacle games remaining at the present time (high probability state based on the high-secure obstacle counter value command received from the main control board M side). Check how many more games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of battle effect execution availability determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. If Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, the AT-related state of the next game, and the current high securing obstacle game count. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), the stay stage transition lottery (lottery of whether to change the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state of the game is the “low probability state”. If Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, and the AT-related state of the next game. Refer to the reference) to execute the stay stage shift lottery, and shift to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state of the game is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for AT effect production determination processing, which will be described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state of the game is the “recoverable/prohibited production state”. If Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of revival availability effect determination processing, which will be described later, and moves to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, and the AT-related state of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is an effect mainly including the background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured such that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the staying stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect, notice effect, and the like will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process which is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high security obstacle games is four or more. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example), the battle effect execution availability lottery (whether or not to execute the battle effect (win)). Lottery). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution availability lottery executed in step 3056 is won. If Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the battle effect (win) and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games, and when the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (victory) is executed, the battle lottery is won and the AT lottery is won. It is structured that the winning is deterministic. The configuration related to the battle effect is not limited to this, and if the BB combination is won even if the AT lottery is not won (after the BB, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”). ), a battle effect (win) can be executed.

Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning-E (watermelon B), and the winning roles can be duplicated with the BB role. Has become. That is, the player has an expectation that he or she is simultaneously winning the BB combination because the rare combination is stopped and displayed. If Yes in step 3064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays in step 3066. , A predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056), a lottery for selecting whether or not to execute a gasse battle effect (a lottery on whether or not to execute a battle effect (defeat)) ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning combination lottery execution availability lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. If Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as the battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and the next process (the process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be executed even in the “normal section”.

In this way, when the number of highly secured obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is four or more, continuous production such as battle production can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of highly secured obstacle games is predetermined. When it is less than the number, for example, when it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section display YH from being extinguished by the transition of (the "normal section" is set), and only when the lighting of the advantageous section display YH can be ensured until the end of the battle production, the battle production is performed. By executing the game, a player-friendly gaming machine can be realized without impairing the player's expectation of winning the BB.

In addition, since it is configured to be able to execute continuous production such as battle production (defeat) when winning a rare role, it is possible to ensure the frequency of execution of battle production and always proceed with a sense of expectation. You can

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the “low probability state” and is used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of high securing obstacle games is 4 or more. The table includes three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a “high-probability state” and the number of highly secure obstacle games is three or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the main body game, and the corresponding enumeration number is shown. It is prescribed. In the case of “low probability state”, the current stay stage is composed of two types of production stages, a desert stage and a town stage, and transition stages include a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of 4 types of performance stages. There are three states relating to the AT of the next game: a “low probability state”, a “normal BB inside medium game”, and a “high probability state”.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is transitioned to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside game”, 0 to 979 is allotted as the number of marks when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside middle game” in the next game, the game game proceeds from the desert stage to the town stage as a numerical value of 980 to 980. 999 have been assigned.

Further, when the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside middle game” in the next game, 0 to 0 is set as the number when the town stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. 19 are assigned. If the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game moves to the “low probability state” or the “normal BB inside game”, 20 to 999 will be assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage, and when the desert stage is maintained in the game when the state shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned. When the current staying stage is the desert stage, and when the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the number of characters to shift from the desert stage to the town stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage, and when the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 is assigned as the number of characters to shift from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current staying stage is the desert stage, and when the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters to shift from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number of units to shift from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained in the high probability state, 250 to 499 are allocated. When the current stay stage is a town stage, and when the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 is assigned as the number of units to shift from the town stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of units to shift from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of games with high securing obstacles is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the main body game, and the number of games is defined. Has been done. The current staying stage and the transition stage are composed of four types of production stages, a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of characters when the desert stage shifts to the town stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of characters when the desert stage shifts to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is a desert stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the desert stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is a town stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as the number to be set when the town stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a town stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers when the town stage is maintained in the game. The current stay stage is a town stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of characters to be entered in the game when the town stage shifts to the conference room stage. The current staying stage is a town stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the town stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

The current staying stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of characters when the game room transitions from the conference room stage to the desert stage. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of characters when the conference room stage shifts to the town stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the number of units. The current staying stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage.

The current staying stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of characters when the cave stage is changed to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of characters when the cave stage shifts to the town stage in the game. The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of characters when the cave stage is changed to the conference room stage in the game. The current staying stage is a cave stage, and 200 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the cave stage is maintained in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of games with high securing obstacles is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, and the stay stage of the main body game , The relationship with the number is specified. The current staying stage and the transition stage are composed of four types of production stages, a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states relating to the AT of the next game: a "high probability state", an "advantageous BB inside game", and a "low probability state".

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 979 is allocated as the number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB inside game” in the next game, 980 to 999 are registered as the number of symbols when shifting from the desert stage to the town stage in the game. It is assigned.

When the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game" in the next game, 0-19 is entered as a number when the town stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. It is assigned. When the current stay stage is a town stage and the next game moves to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as a number when the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current staying stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game” in the next game, 0 to 0 is set as the number when the conference room stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. 29 are assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of units to shift from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game is 30 to 30. 59 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB inside game”, 60 to 999 is registered as the number when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. It is assigned.

If the current staying stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game" in the next game, 0 to 29 is set as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. It is assigned. If the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", 30-59 is set as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the town stage in the game. It is assigned. If the current staying stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game" in the next game, the number of units when moving from the cave stage to the conference room stage is 60 to 99. Has been assigned. When the current staying stage is a cave stage, and when shifting to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game” in the next game, 100 to 999 are allocated as the number of units when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game when the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 is allocated. When the current stay stage is the desert stage, and when the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters to shift from the desert stage to the town stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a town stage, and when the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units to shift from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a town stage, and when the town stage is maintained in the game when the game stage shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage, and when the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units to shift from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current staying stage is the conference room stage, and when the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters to shift from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a cave stage, and when the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of characters to shift from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current staying stage is a cave stage and a low probability state is entered in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the number of units to be entered from the cave stage to the town stage in the game.

Thus, when in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the town stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, in the “high probability state”, four stages of the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the case of the “advantageous section”, while two stay stages can be selected in the “normal section” and can be selected in the “normal section”. The two stay stages can also be selected in the "advantageous section". By configuring in this way, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the "advantageous section" even in the "normal section" where there is no expectation for winning the AT lottery, you will not get tired of the "normal section". The gaming machine can proceed. In addition, when transitioning from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state”, that is, when the “advantageous section” becomes the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected in the “advantageous section” stage. By selecting the effect stage, it is difficult for the player to determine that the “advantageous section” is changed to the “normal section”, and the player can continue the game with expectation.

In addition, a part of the effect stage selected in the "normal section" overlaps with the effect stage selected in the "advantageous section". May be included).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high securement obstacle games is 4 or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of high securement obstacle games is 3 or less are made different from each other. When the number of games is low (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with a higher degree of expectation, which is a “favorable section” than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage) With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by having a "normal section" with a small number of games despite the transition to the stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desirable section" with a low degree of expectation (hard to be selected in "advantageous section"), "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage".

The structure of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is the expectation level which is the “advantageous section”, the expectation level which is won in the AT lottery and the BB. It may be configured to be able to indicate the degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can be changed in a game in which a BB role or a rare role has been won (in the case where the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the AT lottery is not executed when the single rare role is won). , Including), and the expected degree of winning the AT lottery differs depending on the staying stage that has been changed, and the order of “desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage” is arranged in the descending order of expectancy. It is also possible to configure so that the expected degree of winning the BB role varies depending on the staying stage that has been moved, and it is configured in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in order of low expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it becomes definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an in-AT effect determination process which is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is three or less. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the AT final game. If Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery is won. If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S produces an effect related to the game by continuously continuing AT effect (success) (AT continues and the AT counter M60 is set to an initial value. Then, an effect of notifying that the AT-related state of the next game will be the “AT in progress”) or an AT continuation-inspiring effect (failure) (AT continues and the AT counter M60 is definitely set to an initial value). However, it is determined that the state relating to the AT of the next game is the “state during AT” or the “state for producing reproducibility”, and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (success) to the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4:1. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the player has won the continuous lottery, the AT continuous agitation effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player will feel as if he/she has won the revival lottery (actually, he has won the continuous lottery and the main control board M). The control on the side is the same as when the AT continuation-inspiring effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "resurrection possibility production state" {winning the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, and winning the continuous production By configuring to be able to execute the revival effect (success) even in the case of performing, it is possible to increase the ratio of executing the revival effect (success) when the revival effect is executed, and the player expects the revival effect. It can enhance the feeling.

In addition, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the AT-continuation-inspired effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT end game effect, and proceeds to step 3126. In addition, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous agitation effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S restores the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the effect (success) effect executed in the "recoverability effect state"). Is the effect mode of the above, and in this process, the effect relating to the fact that the “AT in progress” was continued) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, if No in step 3114, the process moves to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been increased in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is an effect to add an effect related to the game (an effect to notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, “+50 GET” or the like). ) And shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT effect (the effect executed during AT such as “AT in progress”) and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a revival propriety effect determination process which is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S restores the effect related to the game (success) (the same effect mode as the effect executed in step 3116 described above, It is an effect that informs that the revival lottery has been won in the "Restorability Applicable State", and shifts to the "AT in progress" in the next game, and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S restores the effect related to the game (failure) (in the "recoverability effect state", the recovery lottery is not won). This is an effect for notifying the effect, and it is decided to "shift to the "low probability state" in the next game)", and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2300).

In addition, as described above, the "returnable/impossible production state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT in progress" state) which is the "advantageous section". Even if it is not, since the "advantageous section" is extended even in the next game "state of reproducibility production", the player confirms whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. Only by doing so, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the revival effect succeeds, and the result of the revival effect is focused on. In addition, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the “AT in progress state” and the “resurrection possible/impossible state”. That is, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the next game that wins the continuous lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed and the game that wins the revival lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the next game after the AT state is finished, the game is shifted to the “revival possibility production state” of one game, and the restoration lottery is executed in the “revival possibility production state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to be turned on. Although it is prevented that it is possible to determine whether or not the AT ends without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows. (1) The state related to AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and it is reinstated in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding the AT is set. (2) The recovery lottery is configured not to be executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the “AT in progress” is ended depending on whether or not to win the continuous lottery. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the effect, "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation fueling effect (success) → AT final game: the effect that the AT of the next set is started", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuing fan" Production (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation fan production (success)", "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuation fan production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success)", "AT The game before the final game: AT continuation-induced production (failure)→AT final game: revival production (failure)” may be executed. That is, on the side of the main control board M, it is determined whether or not the "AT in progress" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. It may be configured to execute the AT continuation fueling effect and the revival effect. (3) In the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the revival effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the revival effect (success) is started from the predetermined timing. May be informed, that is, the player may be informed that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is (1) bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and the continuous lottery is won. In this case, it is possible to execute (2) the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed. When the start lever operation timing is reached, the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is achieved. No effect is executed, (3) timing of pressing the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the first stop is on), (4) revival effect (success) ) The timing at which the stop button is released after the stop button for the first stop related to the game to be executed and then the stop button is released (the timing at which the first stop is turned on→off), (5) the revival effect (success) is executed. Timing of pressing the stop button for the second stop related to the game (timing of turning on the second stop), (6) Pressing the stop button for the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed Timing when the rear stop button is released (second stop ON→OFF timing), (7) Timing when the stop button is pressed which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (third stop) (Timing when turned on), (8) timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop is turned on→off) ), etc., or (9) bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) relating to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, (10) game in which the revival effect (success) is executed The start lever operation timing related to the next game may be used. Further, in the case where the lottery is used to determine which of the various timings such as (1) to (10) described above, the timing after the timing when the stop button for the first stop is pressed is set. Since the advantageous zone indicator YH is continuously lit even when neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the player presses the stop button which is the third stop and then the stop button. It is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the button is released or the start lever operation timing related to the game next to the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation time process which is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the AT in progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is the AT in progress state, in step 2350, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S reads out and executes the during-AT process during start lever operation described later. , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, when the state regarding AT is not the AT in progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state regarding AT is the special omen state. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the special omen state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out the special omen process at the time of starting lever operation, which will be described later. It executes and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to the AT is not the “specialization precursory state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state related to the AT is “additional specialized state”. It is determined whether or not If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the "addition specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the additional specialization process at the time of operating the start lever, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is not the "add-on specialized state", the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2307 that the state relating to the AT is "advantageous BB inside It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the advantageous lever BB internal processing during the start lever operation to be a subroutine. Is called and executed to shift to the next processing (processing in step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is not "advantageous BB inside game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1". To judge. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the AT-related state is no push order navigation (push order navigation is It is a state related to an AT that does not occur, and is a "low probability state", "normal BB inside game", "normal BB state", etc.). If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state regarding AT is no push-order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Note that, as described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command, so that it is not possible to execute the effect regarding the push order navigation, When the main control board M side wins the AT top-up lottery and sends a command relating to the number of AT-addition games to the sub-control board S side when the AT top-up lottery is won, and the sub-control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and effect mode of the effect regarding the push-order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment as the push order navigation display in the first number display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games has passed from the state of “RT1” and “AT in progress” and the AT counter value becomes 0, whereby the state shifts to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 set replay, there is no additional AT game number, so white seven or black seven It is configured so that the pushing order that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, when the number of games has passed from the situation of “RT1” and “AT in progress” and the AT counter value becomes 0, and thus the state shifts to “RT1” and “low probability state”, the “advantageous section” still remains. Although the push order navigation can occur in the game that wins the push order bell, the push order navigation may not occur in the game that wins the push order replay.

The CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to the AT in step 2316 in the case of No in step 2308, in the case of No in step 2310, and in the case of No in step 2312, Processing (processing in step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device relating to the game, in step 2354, confirms the winning/replaying winning information relating to the game, and in step 2356, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the AT-related state in which the push-order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/re-game winning information to the sub-control board S, and If the production group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT where push-order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same manner as in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation is not executed even in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or the push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the same push mode navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay (for example, the push order is informed by numbers and the display color related to the numbers is the same). ) It is applicable when it is configured to display in. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the press order navigation display when performing the press order navigation, and the press order bell is displayed. It may be configured to display different effect images during execution of the push-order navigation and execution of the push-order navigation related to the push-order replay.

Next, in step 2358, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the push order bell as six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "Left → Middle → Right" that can get the maximum payout number are circled. It is displayed in the display mode.

Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the condition device of the game to be pushed order replay. Or not. Here, the push order re-game is any one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay of the push order replay as a push order navigation display. The effect display device S40 displays an image that suggests the correct pressing order among the three selecting pressing orders. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, it is information that makes the first stop button correspond to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push-order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command is received. .. Here, the forward-push avoidance command and the reverse-push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the first numerical display mode as the push-order navigation display. The groups are displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368, and thereafter, in step 2370, displays the AT background image on the effect display device S40.

Next, in step 2372, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is three or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is three or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the remaining number of AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode which is less conspicuous than A.

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when the forward press instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment as the push order navigation display as the first image. The number display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

If No in step 2376 or if the process of step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command is received. In step 2380, in the case of Yes, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display as the first image. The number display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

If the determination at Step 2380 is No or the processing at Step 2382 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S moves to the next processing (processing at Step 2110).

If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is four or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode A (the display mode described above). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode which is more conspicuous than B. Here, in the case of four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and in the case of three or less games, the display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S responds to “left→middle→right” as the push order navigation display. The image indicating the pushing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

If No in step 2386 or if the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command is received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPU SC of the sub control board S responds to “right→middle→left” as a push order navigation display. The image indicating the pushing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

If the determination at Step 2390 is No or the processing at Step 2392 has been executed, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S moves to the next processing (processing at Step 2110). In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B which is a display mode more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press command or the reverse command is issued. Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and white seven and black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With such a configuration, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games is small, the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode for informing the player that the number of remaining AT games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the remaining AT game count in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow and the display of "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in the situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect that fuels whether or not the “AT in progress” state (a state related to an AT where push-order navigation can be executed) continues (for example, , Battle production) is configured so that the image of the arrow and “Aim for 7!” are not displayed during the execution of the battle production so that the visibility of the battle production is not hindered. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress" is ended, the battle effect is being performed. When the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push is performed at the operation timing or the like of the bet button D220 after displaying that the "AT in progress" is finished. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the command command (based on the winning of forward black 7 replay or reverse white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been increased in the game winning the AT additional lottery Instead, it can be configured to notify that the AT game number has been added at the subsequent timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation special indication process called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information relating to the condition device relating to the game, in step 2404, checks the winning/replaying winning information relating to the game, and in step 2406, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the AT-related state in which the push-order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/re-game winning information to the sub-control board S, and If the production group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT where push-order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same manner as in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation is not executed even in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or the push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the push order bell as 6 push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in case of winning the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, the number indicating the push order corresponding to the push order “Left→Right→Middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. It is displayed in the display mode. The first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above may display the numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is Can be displayed in blue, the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines in step 2412 the condition device of the game is the push order replay. Or not. Here, the push order re-game is any one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selecting pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, it is information that makes the first stop button correspond to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed on the lower center side of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as the push-order navigation display. In other words, the pressing order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the forward push instruction command or not. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left→middle→right" as the push order navigation display. The image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse pressing instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right→middle→left” as a push order navigation display. The image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward-push avoidance command and the reverse-push avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment as the second numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. The groups are displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when the result of step 2424 is No, in step 2428, the AT background image is displayed. It is displayed on the device S40, the AT remaining game number is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A in step S2430, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Special processing for adding when starting lever operation>
Next, FIG. 50 is a sub-routine showing the additional specializing process at the time of operating the start lever, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information about the condition device related to the game, at step 2454, it confirms the winning/replaying winning information about the game, and at step 2456, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the AT-related state in which the push-order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/re-game winning information to the sub-control board S, and If the production group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT where push-order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same manner as in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation is not executed even in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or the push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the push-order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell or the common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order among the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, enclose the numbers that indicate the push order corresponding to the push order “Right→Left→Middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number, with an asterisk. It is displayed in a different display mode. The first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above may display the numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is Can be displayed in blue, the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the condition of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is any one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order out of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, it is information in which the first stop button is associated with either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed on the lower center side of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as the push-order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the forward push instruction command in step 2466. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left→middle→right" as the push order navigation display. The image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pushing order is the forward pushing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in that order from left to right. The pushing order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, when the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPU SC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right→middle→left” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D41 in that order from right to left. The image of the arrow pointing toward can indicate the pressing order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment as the first number display mode as the push-order navigation display. The groups are displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward-push avoidance command and the reverse-push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward press avoidance command is received or the reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when the forward push avoidance command is received, in order to avoid the forward push “left→middle→right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or in the case of No in 2474, in step 2480, the AT intermediate background image is displayed. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the AT remaining game number is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process is shifted to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the internal processing during the advantageous BB during the start lever operation, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 of FIG.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device relating to the game, in step 2704, checks the winning/replaying winning information relating to the game, and in step 2706, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the AT-related state in which the push-order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/re-game winning information to the sub-control board S, and If the production group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT where push-order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same manner as in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation is not executed even in the state regarding the AT in which the push-order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or the push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the game concerned. The condition device of (1) determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell or the common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order among the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, enclose the numbers that indicate the push order corresponding to the push order “Right→Left→Middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number, with an asterisk. It is displayed in a different display mode. The first numerical display mode group and the second numerical display mode group described above may display the numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numerical display mode group is Can be displayed in blue, the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the condition of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is any one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order out of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, it is information in which the first stop button is associated with either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed on the lower center side of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as the push-order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push-order replay, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command regarding 7 replays in step 2718. It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when the command regarding 7 replay is received, in step 2720, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the first number as the push order navigation display. The display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, if the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of steps 2712, 2716, 2720, or if No at step 2718, at step 2722, the AT intermediate background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. Then, in step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when the predetermined game (five games) has passed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the effect display device S40. Informs that the BB has been won (in this processing, the pushing order navigation is not displayed), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

<Processing when the first trunk stop is accepted>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first-time trunk stop acceptance process which is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S presses forward navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the pressing order navigation related to the pressing navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replay is a generic term for a forward-pressed black 7 set replay and a reverse-pressed white 7 set replay. If Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the push-order navigation in the dark state (the dark state is continuously displayed in the game), and the next process (the process in step 2110) is performed. Transfer.

In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, when the push order navigation related to 7 replay is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and fails in the push order. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing when the second trunk stop is accepted>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second time cylinder stop acceptance time process which is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push-order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push-order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device relating to the game is the push-order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the stop button based on the correct answer push order is the second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the first button in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. The deletion is performed, the press order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Third torso stop effect related decision processing>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing a third-time-drum-stop-time production-related determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination is won. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination is won, in step 3204 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, when it is the BB combination that was won during the non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during non-AT to refer to the AT of the game. Based on the state regarding and the BB combination, a BB start effect (effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, in the BB role won in AT (“AT in progress”, “addition specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “recovery possibility production state”) If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the in-AT BB start effect determination table, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT-related state of the game and the BB combination, and executes the next step. The process is shifted to the process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination is not won, in step 3210, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, The process is shifted to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state relating to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (1st type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C). There are two types of states related to the AT: "normal BB inside game" and "advantageous BB inside game". There are three types of BB start effects: normal effects, high-expectation effects, and premier effects. It should be noted that, in the BB won in the non-AT, the degree of expectation of transitioning to the “AT in progress” state after the end of the BB is configured to differ depending on the type of BB start effect. →Highly anticipated production→Premier production”.

When the BB combination is BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is the normal BB inside medium game, the probability that the BB start effect is the normal effect is 179/256. .. When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high-expectation effect is 77. /256. When the BB combination has a setting difference BB (1st type BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside medium game”, the probability that the BB start effect is the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect becomes the normal effect is 179/256. Is. When the BB combination is BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the probability that the BB start effect is a high-expectation effect is 77. /256. If the BB combination is BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the combination of BB is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB inside game", the BB start effect becomes the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB inside game", the BB start effect is a high-expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 77/256. When the combination of BB is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB inside middle game", the BB start effect is the premium effect. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect becomes the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the status related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect is a high-expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 157/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect becomes the premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

When it is a "normal section", whether it is a BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) or a BB with a setting difference (1st class BB-B) Is selected, and the possibility that the normal effect is selected is higher than that of the high-expectation effect.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won, the premium effect is not selected, and there is a possibility that the normal effect is selected over the high-expectation effect. It is set to be high.

When it is the “advantageous section” and there is no setting difference BB (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), the premium effect may be selected. With this configuration, it is confirmed that the premium effect is selected, and that the BB with no setting difference is won, and that the transition to the “AT in progress” state is completed after the BB without setting difference is completed. Can be shown to the player. Also, if it is an “advantageous section” and there is no setting difference BB (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), there is a higher possibility that a higher-expectation performance will be selected than the normal performance. (It is less likely that the normal effect is selected). By doing so, the player can infer whether or not the AT will be started after the BB ends by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation in winning the AT. In addition, there is a setting difference that wins in the "normal BB inside middle game" and distribution of BB start effects related to BB (1st class BB-B), and there is no setting difference that wins in the "normal BB inside middle game". The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect according to the first type BB-A and the first type BB-C). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB (1st class BB-B) with the setting difference won in the "normal BB inside middle game" and the "normal BB inside middle game". The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) may be different, and by such a configuration, the BB start relating to the BB with setting difference is started. The distribution can be configured to be different depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to BB with no setting difference.

The in-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining an effect at the start time of the BB in AT. The in-AT BB start effect determination table is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state relating to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (1st type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB inside game". There are two types of BB start effects, that is, effects that can be added and effects that cannot be added. The add-on possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT add-on lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on impossible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT add-on lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. For the BB won during AT, there is no factor of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and depending on the type of BB, it may be different whether or not the AT additional lottery is executed. In addition, even if there is a setting difference that the AT additional lottery is not executed during AT, the BB to be executed will be added to the AT due to the fact that the game medal can be obtained and the player is in AT advantageous after the BB. It is configured to clearly inform whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

When the BB combination is a BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0/ Since it is 256, the effect that can be added is not executed. When the BB combination is BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the probability that the BB start effect is non-addable effect is 256/ 256, which means that the addition-prohibition effect is always executed. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the additionable effect is always executed. When the combination of BB is BB with no setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is non-addable effect. The probability of becoming 0/256 is 0/256, and non-additional effects are not executed.

<Processing at the time of the 3rd trunk stop acceptance>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third time cylinder stop acceptance time process which is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push-order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub control board S effects as a pressing order success effect. "GET!" is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the pressing order success effect “GET”. Is not displayed.

In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. When the processing of step S12 is executed, in step 2612, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. The number of AT additional games may be displayed by determining whether or not the number of AT additional games has been executed and the number of AT additional games.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S uses the effect display device S40 to add AT games. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command relating to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPU SC of the sub control board S adds the AT to the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As a method of informing the number of additional games to be AT, (1) notifying all of the number of additional games in the game, (2) notifying a part of the number of additional games in the game, and the remaining number of games after the game. (3) The number of games to be added is not notified in the game (3), the game after the game (for example, 7 replay wins, common bell win (when winning a role that is not originally added), or multiple games After executing the game (continuous effect), the bet button D220 operation or the start lever D50 operation of the game in which the number of remaining games on the effect display device S40 becomes “0” or the game next to the game in which it becomes “0”. ) Can be notified.

In addition, when the common bell is won in the "add-on special state", the number of AT addition games is not displayed even if the push-down navigation is used to stop the game. Absent).

With the above-described configuration, according to the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous zone indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous zone", a period that is advantageous to the player. Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing a "recoverability production state", when the continuous production is won and the revival production (success) is executed thereafter, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the revival production (success) is executed is Since the advantageous section display YH is lit because it is in the “AT state”, on the other hand, even when the continuation effect is not won and the revival effect (failure) is executed thereafter, the revival effect (failure) is executed. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on by setting the state related to the AT of the game to be "recoverable/prohibited production state" and the state related to the AT to the "advantageous section". With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section display YH in the game in which the revival effect is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the revival effect is successful or unsuccessful. In the gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify the period that is advantageous for the gaming machine, it is possible to secure the gaming machine with high interest.

In this example, when the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery is won, and after the BB is finished, the "AT in progress" state can be entered. The configuration relating to this example is not limited to that of this example. For example, in the case of being able to win an AT lottery with a rare role such as cherry (even if it is not a BB role), and winning the AT lottery, It may be configured to shift to the “AT precursor state” as a state relating to AT, and to transition to the “AT in progress state” by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information regarding the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be. As an example of a method of selecting and deciding an item, the cross key SB2 (having four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) is operated to move the cursor to a desired item, By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected item (the cursor is on) is determined, and the screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed by determining the selected item are menu screens. Further, there may be a plurality of display modes of the menu screen, for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there are differences, all are referred to as a menu screen.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen> Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below. (1) Volume adjustment: It may be configured so that the player can adjust the volume output from the gaming machine, for example, by displaying the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment and then operating the right button of the cross key SB2 to output. The volume may be increased and the output volume may be reduced by operating the left button of the cross key SB2. (2) Light amount adjustment: The player may be able to adjust the light amount (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50). , For example, when the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed and the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (luminance) becomes stronger (brighter), and when the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (luminance) becomes weaker. It may be configured to be (dark). (3) Character customization: Characters that appear during the game (hero character, voice of push-order navigation, opponent character, character that supports game progress constantly displayed on the effect display device S40, etc.) can be selected and changed. After the screen corresponding to the character customization is displayed, the cursor is moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2 and the sub input button SB is operated to make the determination. (4) Reel array table: The reel array may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the reel array table. (5) Payout table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting re-games and winning combinations by stopping display) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the payout table screen may be switched by using the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation capable of displaying the menu screen (may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed over time) such as operation of the sub-input button SB is executed. This is a state in which, as a specific example, it may be configured as follows. (1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on→off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, and as a game end process, a command regarding the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side. From the timing, the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the end of the game, etc.), the game does not proceed (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the re-game, new start) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses while the lever is not operated, the reel is not newly rotated, etc. (until that time, the sub input button SB is operated. Even if the menu screen is not displayed). Note that the bet operation includes both a case where a bet button D220 is operated to bet and a case where a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is placed (an automatic bet based on a replay stop display). May be included in the bet operation). (2-1) It may be configured such that the menu screen cannot be displayed during the execution of the game (while the game medal is bet, during the waiting period until the reel starts to rotate, and while the reel is rotating). (2-2) The menu screen can be displayed while the game is being executed (eg, game medals are bet). (3) During execution of a predetermined effect (during execution of an effect for notifying whether or not a bonus is won, during execution of a continuous effect over a plurality of games, an effect of informing whether or not an additional AT game number has been selected) , Etc.) may not be set to the menu screen displayable state. (4) The menu screen may not be displayed while the replay combination is stopped. In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is pressed when the menu screen can be displayed. The display may blink.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines in step 7106 whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed or the operation of displaying the menu screen may be provided in plural. .. If Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (timer for measuring the time to transition to the standby screen described later from the game end timing) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time required to shift from the menu screen to a standby screen described later, and has an initial value when the menu screen is displayed). Is set) to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example, which is longer than a predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that turns on when the menu standby timer is timing), and the next processing (processing of step 7200). Move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and a specific example that is satisfied. May be configured as follows. (1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of reel rotation. (2) It may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B in this example) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen under the condition that the menu screen is continuously displayed. (3) It may be configured such that a predetermined item on the menu screen is selected and determined, and a predetermined operation is performed on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item so as to be satisfied. And the sub-input button SB is operated to display a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment. After operating the cross key SB2 to adjust the volume to a desired volume, the sub-input button SB is operated again to select. The volume is set to a medium level, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (may be referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the menu screen is displayed on the effect display device S40. As an example, when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, when the display of the menu screen ends, the screen is displayed again. A screen where the main character is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu waiting timer timekeeping flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200).

If No in step 7114, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines in step 7122 whether the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200). To do. Even if No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process moves to the next process (process in step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated in the situation where the menu screen is displayed, the menu waiting timer has a predetermined time B (300 in this example). Second) is set again, in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, that is, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer for displaying the standby screen is used. It may be configured for use. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and a predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and a predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited for. The timer may be set. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF and the standby timer is set to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then the sub input button SB is operated under the condition that the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the menu screen is displayed and the display is started, the standby timer may be set to a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game is not proceeding), and the effect of the effect executed by the game machine is displayed. A moving image related to a story is repeatedly played, a message "power saving" is displayed, or a logo mark related to a gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the operation by the player is required as the condition for displaying the above-mentioned menu screen, while the operation by the player is not required as the condition for displaying the standby screen.

If Yes in step 7202, in step 7204 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a standby timer clocking flag (a flag that turns on when a standby timer, which will be described later, is counting) is off. To do. If Yes in step 7204, in step 7206 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing when the third stop button is turned on→off is set as the game end timing. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to transition to the standby screen from the end of the game, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. Set) to a predetermined time A (180 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing is reached, but in addition to this, operating the sub input button SB on the menu screen Therefore, the condition may be that the image displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is completed).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become zero. If Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Even if the result of step 7206 is No, the process proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer counting flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer clocking flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). Even if No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2110).

In addition, in the case of No in step 7204, in other words, when the standby timer timing flag is on, in step 7238 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing end condition is satisfied. To do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition that the timing of the standby timer is finished and the timer value of the standby timer is cleared to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the condition that the standby timer starts counting is that the reel is newly started to rotate. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212, and if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

Further, in the case of No in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen.In this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. The start condition, etc. are the standby screen end conditions. It should be noted that the standby screen may be changed to the menu screen (the menu screen may be displayed). For example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub input button SB while the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, when the standby screen is displayed due to the fact that the main character is walking in the forest is displayed and the game A has not progressed for a predetermined time, the main character is again executed by executing the bet operation. You will see a screen walking through the forest.

Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed due to the operation of the sub input button SB while the menu screen can be displayed. Then, in the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, which is 300 seconds) has elapsed without operating the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, all the reels are stopped by the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. 3 minutes (180 seconds, which is the predetermined time A) has elapsed from the timing of the release, and the standby screen is displayed because the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time. In this way, in this example, when the predetermined time B has passed since the menu screen was displayed, and when the predetermined time A has passed (after the third stop button is turned on→off) after the game ends. The standby screen can be displayed by means of, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<<Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example>>
Here, the configuration related to the menu screen and the standby screen applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-described embodiments, and there is no problem by appropriately combining one or more.

<Timing start timing of the standby timer>
As the timing to set the initial value to the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing, (1) the third stop button as the final stop operation (stop corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) Start the timing from the timing when the button is turned on and then off, (2) Start the timing from the execution timing of the display determination, (3) Start the timing from the payout completion timing based on winning, (4) Game As the end processing, the timing is started from the timing when the command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side, (5) The timing is started from the timing when the sub control board S side receives the command related to the game end You may. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing start timing of menu wait timer>
As a timing to set the initial value to the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed and start timing, the timing is started from the timing when the sub input button SB is operated to display the menu screen. You may. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Structure related to sub input button>
The menu waiting timer may be configured to be able to reset the initial value when the menu waiting timer is clocking, for example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Thus, the menu waiting timer may be set to a predetermined time B (a timer value to be set in the menu waiting timer, for example, 300 seconds) which is an initial value. As an example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, the menu waiting timer is set to 300 seconds to start counting, and 100 seconds later, when the menu waiting timer timer value is 200 seconds, the cross key SB2 is pressed. The menu waiting timer may be reset to 300 seconds by the operation. Further, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is displayed (the screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the menu screen is displayed). May be configured to reset the initial value to the menu standby timer by operating the cross key SB on the transition destination screen to which the transition has been made (may be the menu screen). By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB, the transition destination screen to which the screen has changed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the display of the screen is started may be operated. The menu waiting timer may be reset to its initial value.

<Structure related to stop button>
While the standby timer is counting, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the bet operation is not executed. Depending on the situation, even if the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) is operated, the standby timer may not be reset to its initial value. As an example, as the final stop operation, after turning on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turning it off, the standby timer is set to 180 seconds and the timer starts counting, After that, in the situation where the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset again even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as it is.

<Configuration related to bet operation>
When the third timer button (stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation while the standby timer is counting, and then the bet operation is executed ( When the bet button D220 is operated to bet or the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 to bet), the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is clocking, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the bet operation is executed. The standby screen may not be displayed due to the lapse of time when other operations are not executed. In the case of such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the passage of time from the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has passed from the betting operation. May be set to 0 or reduced. With this configuration, the number of remaining game medals becomes less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game by leaving less than the specified number of game medals in the credit (no bet is placed), the bet button is used when the clerk at the game hall cleans the game machine. Even if the player operates and bets, the sound is not output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on the condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer, the menu standby timer) for displaying the standby screen has become “1→0”. With this configuration, when the bet operation is performed or when some abnormality occurs in the timer measurement, the timer value reaches “0” without going through “1” like “20→0”. Even if it is done (when it is cleared to zero), the standby screen is not displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintentional display of the standby screen. It may be configured to display the standby screen in case of). A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure for payment button>
While the standby timer is counting, as the final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turn it off, and then there are one or more credits. In the situation, when the credit settlement is executed by operating the settlement button, a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button or the timing when the credit settlement is finished (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the time of returning to the outlet D240).

<Configuration related to setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, after turning on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) and then turning it off, the setting key switch was turned off → on while the power was on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. In addition, as the final stop operation, after turning on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turning it off, open the front door after the power is turned on. The setting key switch may be turned off→on, and the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of closing the front door.

<Structure regarding occurrence of predetermined error>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error related to the main control board M side (for example, a game medal is a medal selector DS). It may be configured to display the standby screen when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the predetermined error was released, when an error occurred when the data stayed inside.

<Configuration related to front door>
As the final stop operation, after turning on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turning it off, the standby timer starts counting the time, and then the front door is opened and opened. It may be configured to continue the time measurement of the standby timer even when the above is maintained. Also, as the final stop operation, after turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turning it off, the standby timer starts counting the time, and then opens the front door, After that, the standby timer may continue counting even when the front door is closed.

<Structure 1 during AT>
Turn off the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) as the final stop operation in a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is the "normal game state") When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing set to ON, the standby screen can be displayed, while the final stop operation is performed in a situation where the AT is in progress (for example, the AT-related state is the “AT-in-progress state”). As a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. You may. Similarly, the standby screen may not be displayed during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, and the ART even after the lapse of the predetermined time A after the end of the final stop operation. In addition, in a situation where the AT is in progress (for example, the AT-related state is the “AT in progress”), the third stop button (corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is used as the final stop operation in the game in which the push-order navigation is executed. The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the stop button was turned on and then turned off, while the AT is in progress (for example, the AT-related state is the “AT-in-progress state”). In a situation where the push order navigation is not executed, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time as the final stop operation in the game. The standby screen may be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Structure 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button or the like in a situation where the AT is in progress (for example, the AT-related state is “AT in progress”), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. The standby screen can be displayed by, and (2) the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) is restored after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. May be.

<Structure 3 during AT>
Turn off the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation in a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is the "normal game state") When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the timing set to, the standby screen is configured to be displayed, and in a non-AT state (for example, a state related to AT is a “normal game state”), The menu screen is displayed, and when the predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen, the standby screen can be displayed. ), the menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen, the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) ). That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured such that “predetermined time A=predetermined time B<predetermined time C”. The time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other configuration 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2 ) A screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) By operating the sub input button It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, while the game screen is displayed from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen is continuously displayed even if the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen that was displayed before the menu screen may be displayed. Also, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is placed, a menu screen is displayed. When the bet button is operated while the standby screen is displayed, a bet is displayed before the menu screen is displayed. A screen (a normal screen displayed during a game when the standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on) may be displayed. Also, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is placed, a menu screen is displayed, and the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is the specified number. In the above situation, when the player bets by operating the bet button (for example, the max bet button that allows three bets by one operation), the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) In the situation where the normal screen displayed during the game is displayed, the standby screen is displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of bets, the bet button is displayed. A menu screen may be displayed when a bet is operated by operating a max bet button (for example, a bet of three can be betted by one operation).

<Other configuration 2>
It has multiple display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by entering the password on the menu screen, it is possible to take over the game history up to the previous time and play as the predetermined condition). If not, the moving image for introducing the story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the moving image for introducing the character may be displayed as the standby screen. .. In addition, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen both when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Depending on whether or not to display the story introduction or the character introduction, the frequency may be different.

<Other changes>
In this example, the first BB combination is executed by winning the first BB, and the second BB combination is executed by winning the second BB, which is lower profit for the player than the first BB. The winning combination may be configured such that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be won in duplicate (providing a combination of "first BB+second BB"). When configured in such a manner and when "1BB+2BB" is won, it is possible to stop and display the symbol combination (1BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the highly profitable 1BB, and after the execution of the 1BB is completed, The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be allowed to be stopped and displayed (the fact that the second BB is won is carried over even while the first BB is being executed). If you win "1BB + 2BB", you can win "1BB + 2BB" by executing the profitable 1BB first, for example, when the closing time of the amusement park is approaching. In such a case, the low profit second BB is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be ended without executing the high profit first BB. Can be prevented.

After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified immediately or may be notified after the player has hidden (after a predetermined game has passed without notification). In that case, the winning probability of the re-game may be increased in the latent period after the operation of the first BB is completed. In addition, when the game is hidden, an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB may be executed (for example, "BB condominium chance time!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40). .. In such a case, if the second BB is not won after the completion of the first BB, unless it is provided, it is definite that the production occurrence=the second BB is won. Therefore, only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable to configure to execute the effect suggesting the winning possibility of the second BB even after the operation of the first BB ends (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above. , For example, “BB condominium chance time!!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even if only the first BB is won and the operation of the first BB is completed and the first BB is again won, the execution of the effect suggesting the winning possibility of the second BB is not stopped. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the winning of the second BB is once notified, and then the winning of the first BB is notified (for example, the display of "BB condominium chance time!" → The display of "sorry" → "The second". (1BB is being won!) etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB ends after the winning of multiple wins during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT preparation, etc. Although the number of remaining games is reduced), the internal reduction of the number of remaining games may be interrupted. In addition, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the payout number from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be cumulatively displayed and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example, (1) in the case where the first BB and the small winning combination A have been won, the first BB is preferentially stopped and controlled. (2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B have been won, the small winning combination B is preferentially stopped and controlled. That is, it is possible to provide a small winning combination whose stop control is prioritized over the BB winning combination and a small winning combination whose stop control is prioritized for the BB winning combination. (3) In the case where the first BB and the small winning combination A are repeatedly won, when the small winning combination A wins, or some of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination A (for example, at the time of the first stop, the first 2) (when stopped), the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (notifying that the small winning combination A can win) is performed. That is, the one that informs the first BB combination that is normally controlled to be stopped with priority over the small combination A is the result of the first stop or the second stop (a stop mode after execution of the first stop or the second stop). Accordingly, if the first BB combination is not winning (the small combination A can be won) regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped, the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small winning combination A wins as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player in accordance with various game situations that change during the game, and the contents notified by the effect display device S40 etc. It is possible to prevent inconsistent winning roles. (4) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are won, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is given during the rotation of all reels.

Further, the main control board M may be configured to include a display device (7-segment etc.) for displaying the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) stopped and displayed. In the case of such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs an inconsistent effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when the symbol combination of replay-replay-replay is stopped on the activated line, an effect (for example, lighting a lamp in green) that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack capable of outputting (not inputting) from the side of the sub-control board S may be provided, and the configuration having the following features may be adopted. (1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by the sub input button of the gaming machine. (2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, it is output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine. ). (3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, the error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Also, during the AT state or during BB execution, even when a game is played using the earphone jack, the effect sound may be output from the gaming machine. Further, the volume when not using the earphone jack and the volume when not using the earphone jack may be separately stored. Even when the earphone is pulled out, the volume for using the earphone jack may not be immediately cleared (to the initial value). For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, all the volumes may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). It is preferable that the earphone jack is provided at a place where it does not interfere with the game (for example, when an earphone is inserted in the earphone jack, the earphone cord is not entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever). ).

In this example, (1) the re-playing combination is performed after the BB is finished when the number of the specified number is equal to or more than the certain number when the BB is executed, and after the BB is finished when the number of the number is less than the certain number. The winning probability of may be changed. (2) There may be a plurality of RT states to be transitioned to when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after the end of "RT1" or to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state). (3) The RT state is shifted when a predetermined winning combination is won. In other words, the transition of the RT state is not made to correspond one-to-one with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the condition device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game). (4) It is possible to install the 0th RT transition, to win the 0th winning combination, and to win the 0th winning combination. In other words, no matter which press order is stopped, no matter which stop operation is performed at any position, one or more winning combinations are provided with 0 winning combination, and the RT state is changed by winning the 0 winning combination. It may be possible to obtain a double winning combination of a 0-card combination and a 7-card combination or a double-winning of a 0-card combination A and a 0-card combination. It should be noted that, when a winning combination of 0 coins is won, one of the 0 coin winning combinations that shifts to RT and the 0 coin winning combination that does not shift to RT may be selected depending on the pushing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card combination and the BB-combination in duplicate, and to give priority to the 0-card combination.

In addition, as in this example, the pressing order of the pressing order bell is 6 selections (“left→middle→right”, “left→right→middle”, “middle→left→right”, “middle→right→left”, "Right->Left-Middle", "Right-Middle-Left" 6 choices), and the push-order re-game push order is 3 choices (first stop is left, middle, right 3 choices) In this case, the push order display on the push order display device D270 is different between the push order navigation display relating to the push order bell and the push order navigation display relating to the push order replay. The display may be different from the three-order push-order navigation display. As an example, as a push-order display according to 6 options, “=1” in the case of “left→middle→right”, “=2” in the case of “left→right→middle”, and “middle→left→” “Right” is “=3”, “middle→right→left” is “=4”, “right→left→middle” is “=5”, “right→middle→left” In the case of, it is displayed as "=6", and as the push order display for the three options, "=7" when the first stop is left, and "=8" when the first stop is middle. , "=9" when the first stop is on the right may be displayed.

In addition, in this example, the configuration may be as follows. (1) The AT display game number, which is the number of games that have been continuously consumed in the “AT in progress state”, the “specialization omission state”, or the “additional specialization state”, is configured to be displayed on the production display device. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the state is changed from "AT in progress" to "normal game state", and if the player wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress", While continuing to add the number of digested games and adding them, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), and after the "AT state" is changed to the "normal game state", it is again within a specific game. When the player wins the AT lottery and shifts to the “AT in progress” state, the previous AT exhausting game number is not taken over, and the AT exhausting game number is newly counted from 0 game. (2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display for prompting the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40 (for example, " If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in the game where the push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) Performance The display areas of the push-order navigation display and the display urging to stop the reels on the display device S40 do not overlap, and (2-2) the display urging to stop the reels is not displayed. (3) When the power is turned “ON→OFF→ON” in the game in which the push-order navigation is occurring, it occurs before the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The pressing order navigation (display on the pressing order display device D270 and/or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of. (4) The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT are states related to an AT in which the push-order navigation occurs differently in the game in which the common bell is won, or in which the push-order navigation may occur. The frequency with which the push-order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won is different between the state with respect to a certain AT and the state with respect to another AT that is a state in which the push-order navigation can occur. (5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example) in which the probability of winning the replay is the highest, the proportion of games in which push-order navigation occurs is greater than the proportion of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the total winning rate of the bell role and the re-game role is 1/2 or more. With such a configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting tired during AT. It may be configured as described above.

Here, the characteristic points of the above-mentioned game section will be described in detail below.

<<Normal Section>> (1) The push-order navigation is not displayed on the push-order display device D270. (2) The press order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) The command (signal) relating to the condition device in which the profit rate of the player varies depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) The lottery for shifting to the “advantageous section” can be executed except during the internal winning of the BB and the execution of the BB.

<<Standby Section>> (1) The push-order navigation is not displayed on the push-order display device D270. (2) The press order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) The command (signal) relating to the condition device in which the profit rate of the player varies depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) The lottery for shifting to the "advantageous section" is not executed. (5) After winning a BB in the "standby state", the "advantageous section" starts from the next game.

<<Advantageous section>> (1) The push-order navigation can be displayed on the push-order display device D270. (2) The push-order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) A lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” (for example, shifting from the “high probability state” to the “AT in progress state” as a state regarding AT), a lottery for increasing the number of AT games, and the like can be executed. (5) During the "advantageous zone", the advantageous zone indicator YH is constantly lit. (6) When the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game counter YKc-1 becomes 0, if the BB or the push order navigation is not executed at least once in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is basically However, as an exception, when the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), BB and push-order navigation are performed once in the "advantageous section". It is configured such that the "advantageous section" can be ended even if neither is executed. (7) Measurement of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is executed in all the games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the game counter value is added even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristic points related to the lottery for setting the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below. (1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the hand lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined when the number of games has passed. (2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability depending on the set value is established, the setting lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established. (3) When a certain condition device is satisfied and the setting lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the setting values are different. (4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high probability state”, and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT in progress state”, Etc. does not differ depending on the set value). (5) "Advantageous section" setting If you win the lottery, basically it will be the "advantageous section" from the next game (setting to "advantageous section" in the BB combination established in "normal section" If you win the lottery, it can be a "standby section" in the next game).

Here, the characteristic points relating to the change in the performance of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below. (1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all the set values may be that a predetermined number of games have passed and a predetermined condition device is satisfied). .. (2) When a condition device having different lottery probabilities depending on the set value is satisfied, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is satisfied. Neither the number of AT games nor lottery is executed. (3) When the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. Neither the number of AT games nor lottery is executed. (4) During execution of the BB, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB. Does not run. Neither the number of AT games nor lottery is executed. (5) If the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value during the execution of the BB, the lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB. Can be performed. A lottery or the like in which the number of AT games is increased can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example. Further, the following configurations may be applied alone or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<<Point 1>> (1) It is configured to have a "gase high probability state" as a state relating to an AT that is in an "advantageous section" but is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state". (2) The continuous effect is composed of at least a predetermined number of G or more continuous games. (3) There is a normal hand that does not win at 100% in the AT lottery and a special hand that wins at 100% in the AT lottery, and when continuous production is executed with the normal hand as a trigger, and the AT lottery is not won. In this case, if a special winning combination is won during the continuous effect, an effect for notifying that the AT lottery has been won is executed even during the continuous effect (replacing the continuous effect). (4) The higher the number of remaining games with high securing obstacles, the higher the probability of selecting continuous production with high expectation (expected degree of bonus winning, expected degree of AT lottery), and the remaining games with high securing obstacles The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting continuous productions with low expectations. (5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the number of games for which high security is obstructed, the higher the probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher degree of expectation (expected degree of bonus winning, expected degree of AT lottery winning). (6) If the number of remaining games in the number of games with high security failure is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that causes a loss is not executed, but the winning continuous production (bonus win, AT lottery win) Can be performed. In other words, when the number of remaining games of the number of high securement obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the effect of completing one game can be executed both in the case of losing and in the case of winning, but in the case of continuous effect, Can only be done if. (7) If the number of ceiling Gs in the advantageous section (1500 games) is less than or equal to the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed. (8) The selection tendency of the effect differs depending on whether the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value or greater than the predetermined value (the frequency of occurrence of continuous effects, the expected jackpot degree of the predetermined effect, etc.). (9) If a new transition to the "advantageous section" is made in the middle of continuous production of a loss in the "normal section" (for example, defeating production), (9-1) rewriting the continuous production (to the "advantageous section" transition game) Stage change production "When there is a character, there is a character, and Stechen suggestive lines" etc.). The rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (win). (9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the sub-control board S has made a transition in the game when the game shifts to the “advantageous section” during the execution of the continuous effect, and the percentage of the sub-game in the game when the continuous effect is not executed. The ratio of notifying that the control board S has made a transition is different.

<<Point 2>> (1) A player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section". For example, it can be selected by operating the sub input button. (2) For the stay stage A group, 1: the lottery result of whether or not to be the "advantageous section" is announced in advance when the start lever is turned ON in the game, and for the stay stage A group 2: whether or not it is the "advantageous section" The lottery result will be announced later at the end of the game (or at the time of betting the next game (when the re-game stop is displayed, when the start lever is operated)). (3) When the "normal section" is entered from the "advantageous section" and the stay stages other than the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. When the "normal section" is changed from the stay stage other than the "advantageous section" and the production group A, the stay stage is maintained. (4) The AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and in the stay stage A group is different from the AT expectation degree when the advantage section indicator is off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, from the one with a low AT expectation level, "the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is on and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is on and the stay stage A group is other than the stay stage A group" (5) Percentage of stay stage transitions (stay stage group A → stay stage group B) triggered by the production (including 1G completed production and continuous production) in the game from "normal section" to "advantageous section" And the ratio of the transition of the stay stage caused by the effect in the game in which the "favorable section" is changed to the "normal section" is different.

<<Point 3>> (1) As the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games in the number of highly secure obstacles) increases, the expectation level (the expectation level in the AT lottery, the bonus is won) The probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation level is high, and the smaller the number of guaranteed games (the number of remaining games in the number of highly secure obstacles) in the “advantageous section”, the higher the expectation level (the degree of expectation of winning the AT lottery). , There is a high probability that a stay stage with a high degree of winning the bonus) will be selected. (2) When the number of remaining guaranteed games in the “advantageous section” is less than or equal to a predetermined value (four or less games), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts. (3) If a production with high expectations is selected without staying at a stay stage with high expectations (expectations of winning the AT lottery, expectations of winning the bonus), the expectations are high. (Expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning the bonus) Expectation level (winning in the AT lottery) is higher than when the production with high expectation is selected while staying in the stay stage The degree of expectation that they are doing, and the degree of expectation that they are winning the bonus) are high.

<<Point 4>> (1) If you win the BB in the "Restorability production state", (1-1) You may or may not execute the AT additional lottery in the BB. Good. (1-2) After the BB is completed, the state may be changed to the “AT in progress state” or may not be changed. (1-3) The AT additional lottery may be executed during the BB, or may not be executed. (1-4) When the state shifts to the “AT in progress” state after the BB ends, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the “recoverability production state”. (2) The AT addition lottery may or may not be performed in the "state of reproducibility production". When the AT addition lottery is executed, (3) When the player presses the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 set replay in “Restorability production state”, avoidance navigation occurs and resurrection effect (success) The number of games to be added is notified at the timing after executing. (4) If the winning combination that can be moved to the "advantageous section" in "Restorability production state", the advantageous section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while "Restoration production state" If the winning combination that won't win the resurrection lottery and that can move to the “advantageous section” in the next game is won, the advantageous section indicator can be turned on at the start timing of the next game. (5) In the case where the specification is such that the AT addition lottery is not performed in the "resurrection possibility production state", but the AT addition lottery is not performed, (5-1) the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "revival possibility production state" For example, if you win the watermelon A), the number of AT games will not be added, but if you win a part (eg, watermelon A) that can be added in 1G (“AT in progress”) that executes the revival effect (success) AT The number of games can be added. (6) When "Battle production 3G + revival production (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the production at the end of AT, a bonus when the revival production (success) is executed by winning a bonus in the revival production execution game The number of AT games does not increase during the period, but the number of AT games increases during the bonus when the bonus effect is won and the revival effect (success) is executed in the battle effect execution game (any of 3G). You can Moreover, the performance tendency during the bonus may be different.

<<Point 5>> (1) When there are a game state A and a game state B as states relating to an AT that is an "advantageous section", (1-1) the expectation of winning the AT additional lottery is "gaming state A> advantageous" The state becomes "state B" (the game state A is more likely to be added to the AT game number than the game state B or the AT added number is larger). (1-2) The number of additions that can be added when winning the combination X in the game state A and the number of additions that can be added when winning the combination Y in the game state A are different. (1-3) The number of additions that can be added when winning the combination X in the game state B is the same as the number of additions that can be added when winning the combination Y in the game state B.

<<Point 6>> (1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are as follows: when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop and before the second stop (B), and after the second stop and the third stop. Different from before (C). (1-1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are in the order of "A<B<C" from the one that is inconspicuous to the player. (2) When the state of "AT in progress" and "RT1" is changed to "Low probability state" and "RT1" when AT is finished, when the push order combination is won, the push order display device pushes. Displays the forward navigation, but does not display the push navigation on the effect display device (displays "????"). (3) If the winning 18 (falling hand) is won at the third stop in the game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display form as the display form after the second stop. .. (4) When the start lever is operated in the case where the power is turned off and the initial process related to the display on the effect display device is not completed, the initial process related to the display on the effect display device is not completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the voice from the speaker (for example, "left!"). (5) Even if the player is in a state related to the AT, which is highly profitable for the player such as “additional specialization state”, when the winning combination is won, the falling avoidance suggestion effect is preferentially displayed. (6) The "advantageous section" is maintained even if the falling hand is won in the "advantageous section". (7) If the falling combination is configured to be a pushing combination (determining whether or not to stop and display depending on the pushing order), a winning push combination (pushing bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and the pushing order is selected. When the navigation is executed and the push order navigation is stopped in a different push order, the display on the effect display device may go dark, while when the winning combination is won, the push order navigation is stopped in a different push order. In the case of, the display of the effect display device does not go dark (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect does not go dark).

<<Point 7>> (1) In the case where the BB relating to the BB with the setting difference is configured to shift to the “RT3” and the “AT preparation state” (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment). (1-1) In the "RT3", a winning combination with a high probability is won to win the AT additional lottery (100% may be won or a certain probability may be won). (1-2) Different RT states to be transitioned after the BB ends depending on the type of BB combination, and an execution mode of the AT addition lottery according to the role that is likely to appear in any of the RT states (role to execute addition lottery, addition The lottery winning probability and the number of AT-added games) are made different. (1-3) Bonus A→RT1→Promotion Replay A→RT3 (High Replay Probability), Bonus B→RT2→Promotion Replay B→RT3, and so on. The winning rate or the average number of additional games is different. (1-4) When bonus A→RT1, bonus B→RT2, and promotion replay A and promotion replay B are provided, the winning probabilities of promotion replay A and promotion replay B between RT1 and RT2 are Be different. (1-5) Bonus A→RT1 and bonus B→RT2 are configured so that the promotion replay and the fall replay can be won respectively, and the winning probabilities of the promotion replay and the fall replay are different between RT1 and RT2. (1-6) After the BB with setting difference ends, the dedicated RT state is entered (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then the promotion replay is used as a trigger to transition to the “addition specialized state”.

<<Point 8>> (1) Having 1 type BB-B1 and 1 type BB-B2, after the 1st type BB-B1 ends, the process moves to "RT3" and after the 1st type BB-B2 ends When configured to shift to "RT4". (1-1) "RT3" and "RT4" differ in the AT addition lottery execution mode (the role of executing the addition lottery, the addition lottery winning probability, the number of AT addition games). (1-2) The production tendencies are different between the BB start production according to the type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start production according to the type 1 BB-B2 (the selection rates of the BB start production with high expectations are different). (2) In the "AT preparation state" and "RT3", when the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed before the re-game 06, the process moves to "RT4" and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", the re-game player who is promoted to "RT3" wins. When "RT4" is changed to "RT3", the treasure box open addition effect is not executed even if the subsequent re-games-E1 to E3 are won. (3) It has a plurality of types of BB combinations, and even if a BB combination is won, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize which BB combination has won, and depending on the type of BB, after the BB combination ends. Different RT states, the execution mode of the AT additional lottery when the promotion re-game combination is won is different depending on the RT state. In such a case, the selection tendency of the treasure box acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of the BB (the gold treasure box, the silver treasure box, the copper treasure box, etc. are set. The number distribution is different).

<<Point 9>> (1) Proportion of the same production mode in the BB start effect related to BB with setting difference won in AT and the start effect related to BB with no setting difference in AT and non-AT There is a difference in the ratio of the same production mode in the BB start effect related to the BB with setting difference that is won and the start effect related to the BB without setting difference that is won during non-AT.

<<Point 10>> (1) When the BB with no setting difference is won in the "normal section" rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the setting value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the "advantageous section" There is a higher probability that an effect that suggests the set value will be selected. (2) In the BB won during non-AT, different BB start effects are selected according to the setting difference, but in the BB won during AT, the same BB start effect is selected regardless of the setting difference. (3) A ratio in which the BB start effect is the same effect mode between the BB with a setting difference won during AT and the BB without a setting difference won during AT, and the BB with a setting difference won during non-AT and the non-AT The proportions in which the BB start effects are in the same effect mode are different between the BB having no setting difference and being won.

<<Point 11>> (1) "No difference in setting (winning rate that does not differ depending on the set value) + BB" When winning, "Advantageous zone indicator lights up, which can be executed when winning a combination without setting difference" The probability of selecting "Advantageous zone indicator off + Performance A" that can be executed when winning a "winning combination with a different setting (winning rate that differs depending on the setting value)" rather than the probability of selecting "+ Production B" Higher (“Rare role + BB time” encourages the winning of BB rather than the production that drives the transition to the high probability state (for example, the production that transitions to the stay stage where you can stay in the high probability state) ( For example, battle production) is easier to execute}. (2) When a predetermined winning combination (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high-probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of highly secure obstacle games is “50%→3G, 40%→20G, 10%. →50G”, the battle is lost when 3G is selected, and the battle is won in other cases. Further, the expectation of the length of the highly accurate game number (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who has won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of inspiring whether or not continuation is possible at the highly accurate 20G (an effect of inspiring whether it is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is definitely 50 games) is executed. ..

<<Point 12>> (1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section", and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value. (1-1) In the “advantageous section”, the predetermined freeze effect is not executed. (1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more easily executed in the “normal section” than in the “advantageous section”. (1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference. (1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference. (1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of losing.

<<<Configuration applicable to this example>>>
A configuration applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations described in detail below is applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and the configuration of 1 described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described in detail below may be applied. Here's what you can do.

<<Memory map configuration>>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a partial configuration of a memory map in the RAM (which may be referred to as a first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the spinning body type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) “set value data”: an area for data relating to a number for managing the setting stage, (2) “external signal system data”: external signal output Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM checksum data": data used in checksum calculation processing executed at power-on, calculated from data stored in RAM at power-off Area for storing the stored data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, “0”) in the checksum calculation process executed at power-on, (4) “control command buffer”: sub Area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side, (5) "Stack pointer temporary save buffer": information used when power is restored and is stored in the current stack pointer when power is shut off. Area for storing data stored therein and information stored in the stack pointer when power is restored, (6) "unused area": area for storing area not used for game, (7) "saved data" 1 to save data 8": areas are used in the order of RAM where data saved by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, etc. may be written to the maximum by design. In the case of such a configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected malfunction (such as unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than "7FF8H". There is a possibility that the stack pointer points to the address of. In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of “saved data 1 to saved data 8” secured as an area of data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, data that has no influence on the progress of the game (there is little influence) on the address (address near "7FF8H") that may be indicated by the stack pointer when the unexpected trouble occurs. Data) is preferably stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing "setting value data" at an address that is at least one address away from "save data 1 to save data 8" secured as an area for data to be saved in advance, a game is played. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not bring a disadvantage not only to the player but also to the game hall. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary save buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored, and (4) "control command buffer" Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be transmitted to the sub control board S side, and (3) "RAM checksum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored. Since the data (2) “external signal system data” is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, it is data that has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "setting value data" is data relating to the setting value that affects the result of the game, and therefore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a low setting value, a significant disadvantage will occur to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage occurs in the game arcade. As described above, (1) "setting value data" is important data for normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the same figure, (1) “setting value data” is the highest-order data (data stored in the higher-order address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "set value data" and (7) "save data 1 to save data 8" include (2) "external signal system data" and (3) "RAM checksum data". , (4) “control command buffer”, (5) “stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, and (6) “unused area” are stored. With such a configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the RAM that is not used for the game is provided. Thus, the gaming machine can be configured so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) "External signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "Unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses for storing the five data items is changed, and, for example, the order of “(3)→(2)→(4)→(5)→(6)” is stored in order from the higher address. Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of “(6)→(5)→(3)→(2)→(4)” from the higher address. Further, (6) the "unused area" may not be provided. The data stored in the RAM areas of (2) to (5) above does not prevent the insertion of game medals even if the data stored in the RAM area has been changed (game medals). (There is no error that makes it impossible to input).

The following data may be stored in the area for storing the “setting value data” shown in FIG. 59, in other words, in the area (1) in FIG. 59. (A) Total score data: An area for storing data regarding the number of game values that plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in the enclosed rotating body type gaming machine that does not actually use game medals (total When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes. (B) Minimum game time: minimum game once Data for counting the time (subtracting the counter value for each interrupt process) (minimum game time for one time is 4.1 seconds) (C) Acquisition number counter at BB operation: BB ends Counter (decreases the counter value corresponding to the value that gives the player a gaming value) for determining whether or not the following condition (payout number) has been satisfied (D) the acquired number counter at the time of MB operation : A counter for determining whether or not the condition (the number of payouts) for ending the MB is satisfied (the counter value is subtracted corresponding to the value that gives the game value to the player). A plurality of (A) to (D) and “setting value data” may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. In the case where a plurality of data can be stored, all of the plurality of data are stored at addresses higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (areas for storage are provided). It is preferable to configure so that With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to a player or a game hall. Furthermore, if the address is higher than at least the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected malfunction (such as unexpected power failure) occurred. In that case, a situation may occur in which the stack pointer points to an address higher than “7FF8H”, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the game hall.

<<Operation when re-play stop is displayed>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the operation in the winning game of the re-play applicable to the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. Note that the configuration illustrated below exemplifies a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the replay is stopped.

First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON→OFF), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off substantially at the same time. After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, a 2-bet lamp is set as an automatic bet operation relating to the replay that has been stopped and displayed D212 lights up. Then, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as the automatic bet operation related to the replay that is stopped and displayed, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lighting timing. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on (the throwable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the characteristic points of the operation in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 relating to the next game, in which the replay is stopped and displayed, are configured to light up at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert the game medal, the player can recognize that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually confirming that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is lit after the throwable lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by turning on the throwable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially at the same time as described above, the player can smoothly make a decision regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and the wrong game medal can be displayed. It is possible to prevent closing and operation of the start lever D50.

<Structure 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is constantly lit from the bet operation timing relating to the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed to the end of the game of the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning is performed, and it is possible to notify that the re-playing has been won, so that the progress of the game is advanced. Can be smooth.

<Structure 3>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the display of the re-game being stopped is prior to the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by illuminating the re-game lamp D290 first, the fact that the re-game has been won is announced first, and then the start lamp D180 is lit and the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game winning. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the display of the re-game being stopped is prior to the lighting of the throwable lamp D300. In this way, by illuminating the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified that the re-game has been won, and then the insertable lamp D300 is lit to notify that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to grasp the game situation smoothly.

<Structure 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation by the replay win has been performed. Since the fact that the re-game has been won can be announced promptly, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the display of the re-game being stopped is prior to the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation by the replay win has been performed. Since the fact that the re-game has been won can be announced promptly, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 7>
The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 relating to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are turned on, and then the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on (the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned on. They do not light at about the same time). With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game winning is performed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 8>
The turn-off timings of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. When a plurality of lamps (2 bet lamp D212 and 3 bet lamp D213) are turned on, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. You will be able to quickly grasp the game state.

<Structure 9>
The lighting timing of the re-playing lamp D290 based on the re-playing being stopped and displayed is before the turning-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-playing is stopped and displayed. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation by the replay win has been performed. Since the fact that the re-game has been won can be announced promptly, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 10>
The re-playing lamp D290 is turned on when the re-playing is stopped and displayed before the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off after the re-playing is stopped and displayed. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation by the replay win has been performed. Since the fact that the re-game has been won can be announced promptly, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 relating to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the game can be smoothly advanced.

<<Other actions 1>>
Here, an operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-play winning game applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as other operation 1.

<Structure 12>
The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 may be constantly lit from the bet operation timing relating to the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed to the end of the game of the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game winning has been performed, and it is possible to promptly notify that the re-gaming has been won, so that the game progresses. Can be smoothed.

<Structure 13>
The turn-on timing of the re-play lamp D290 based on the stop-display of the re-play and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop-display of the re-play may be configured substantially at the same time. I would like to inform the player that the automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2 bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game state, so the 2 bet lamp D212 will be turned off once. By doing so, the game state can be grasped smoothly, and the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 relating to the next game in which the re-playing lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light before it.

<Structure 14>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-play and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-play may be configured substantially at the same time. I would like to inform the player that the automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3 bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game state, so the 2 bet lamp D212 will be turned off once. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 relating to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light before that.

<Structure 15>
When a replay is won in a certain game, and a replay is also won in the next game of the certain game, the replay lamp D290 is turned on based on the fact that the replay of the certain game is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the re-play lamp D290 may be kept lit until the game of one game after another is finished. In this way, by continuing to turn on the replay lamp D290, it is possible to promptly notify the player of the winning of the replay, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as a re-game lamp D290, a 3-bet lamp D213, a 2-bet lamp D212, a 1-bet lamp D211, a start lamp D180, a throwable lamp D300, etc., triggered by a third stop operation (or a re-game symbol stop display). Control may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform notification by the lamp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Structure 17>
The re-game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 may be configured to light up at substantially the same timing. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform that the lamp is lit based on the replay stop display.

<Structure 18>
Based on the display of the replay being stopped, the 3 bet lamp D213, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 1 bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially at the same time, and then the 3 bet lamp D213, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 1 bet lamp D211 are turned on. You may comprise so that it may light simultaneously. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly inform that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the replay is won is three.

<Structure 19>
Based on the fact that the replay is stopped and displayed, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are restarted. The gaming lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the replay is won is three, and it is clear that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay. Can be notified.

<<Other actions 2>>
Here, further, an operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-play winning game applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as another operation 2 by using FIGS. 61 to 63. I will describe.

<Operation diagram 2 when replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, an operation applicable to the spinning-roller type gaming machine of the present example will be described in detail.

First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. At about the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and the two bet lamp D212 and the three bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing. Then, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (2) in the figure. Then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, the stop button is released (ON→OFF) at the timing of (4) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing of (5) in the figure, and the start lamp D180 and the closing state are turned on. The possible lamp D300 lights up substantially at the same time. The 1-bed lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operation figure 3 when the re-game stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON→OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-charge lamp D300 are lit substantially at the same time. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation figure 4 when replay stop display>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON→OFF), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, at the same time as the re-game lamp D290 lights up, the start lamp D180 and The throwable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation figure 5 when the re-game stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (ON→OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Turn off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the re-game lamp D290 are turned on substantially at the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time.

<Operation figure 6 when re-play stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON→OFF), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, at the same time as the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, the two-bet lamp is turned on. D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (4) in the figure. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on at the timing (5) in the figure. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-charge lamp D300 are lit substantially at the same time. The 1 bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operation figure 7 when the re-game stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON→OFF), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective and the re-play lamp D290 is activated. The start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are lit almost at the same time. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operation figure 8 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (ON→OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Turn off at about the same time. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the re-game lamp D290, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300. And light up at about the same time.

<Operation diagram 9 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON→OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Then, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. Then, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (5) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-charge lamp D300 are lit substantially at the same time. The 1 bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operation Figure 10 when the re-game stop is displayed>
First, in the game that is won for the re-play (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and one bet lamp D211, two bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. .. Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON→OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are lit substantially at the same time. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

In addition, among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, with respect to the configurations similar to the above configurations 1 to 19, the same effects as the above configurations 1 to 19 can be created.

In addition, the above-mentioned stop display timing of the re-game symbol, operation timing of the stop button, turning on/off timing of the re-playing lamp D290, turning on/off timing of the 3 bet lamp D213, turning on/off timing of the 2 bet lamp D212, 1 It should be supplemented that the configurations regarding the timing of turning on/off the bet lamp D211, the timing of turning on the start lamp D180, and the timing of turning on the insertable lamp D300 can be combined with any configuration (timing).

In addition, in the above description, the game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the replay, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game medal cannot be inserted during the stop display of the replay. It may be configured (applicable to all the configurations described above). In the case of such a configuration, the throwable lamp D300 remains off while the replay is stopped and displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned “substantially simultaneous” may be recognized as being visually simultaneous when the player visually recognizes it, and may be, for example, a process (lighting/off timing) executed within a period in which the interrupt process is executed 10 times. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<<Bet Button Lamp Configuration>>
The configuration relating to the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning-roller type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

Processing for changing the bet button D220 from invalid to valid is executed by the processing of the main control board M, and then the main control board M transmits a command for turning on the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control The board M may be configured to send a command to the effect that the bet button D220 has been activated to the sub control board S side), and then the sub control board S sends the bet button lamp S50 sent from the main control board M. The process for turning on the bet button lamp S50 may be executed by receiving the command for turning on. With such a configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages turning on/off on the side of the sub control board S, but the bet button D220 is effective depending on the game situation on the side of the main control board M. The bet button lamp S50 can be turned on with certainty, and even if the player visually recognizes the turn-on of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (the bet button D220) is valid, the main control board M side It can be configured so as not to cause a discrepancy with the game situation.

<<Configuration of stop button lamp>>
The stop button lamp S60 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The process of making the stop button D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) invalid and valid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub-control board. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the enabling process is performed) is transmitted to the S side (the main control board M sends the stop button lamp to the sub control board S side). D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to be transmitted to the effect that the command is activated}, and then the sub control board S is the main control board. The processing for turning on the stop button lamp S60 may be executed by receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 manages turning on/off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on by the player, and the player visually recognizes that the stop button lamp S60 is turned on to stop the button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not is valid, it can be configured so as not to cause a discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<<Configuration of reel unit RU applicable to this example>>
As shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the spinning drum type gaming machine according to the present example includes each of the reels M50 (M51, M52 and M53) rotatably via the reel unit RU. 64. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning body type gaming machine according to the present example is an integral unit that rotatably accommodates all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape and has an opening RU10 formed therein. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52, and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Incidentally, as will be described later in detail, each of the three reels is formed by attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top portion RU20 and a bottom portion RU30 with the opening portion RU10 interposed therebetween. By mounting the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed in the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. There is. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<<Pedestal BU>>
The pedestal BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate shape. The end portion of the pedestal portion BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side surface, the back surface, etc. of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal portion BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is placed on the base BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
A plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed in the front end of the pedestal BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to the respective screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed so as to correspond to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, for example.

The numbers and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may correspond to each other and may be arranged along the horizontal direction, and the reel unit RU may be stably placed on the pedestal part BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal BU, or the reel unit RU may be attached by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal BU. Both the RU and one reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53) may be attached to the pedestal BU.

<<How to fix reel unit RU>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the corresponding screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position of the base BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base BU.

Besides the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be removably attached using a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet or the like. It suffices that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal part BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In this example, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal BU, but the configuration is not limited to this. The reel unit RU may be fixed (hangingly fixed), or the reel unit RU may be provided with through holes RU40 on both side surface portions and fixed to the inside of the housing by a screw BS. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, a configuration relating to the position of the screw BS and a dropping position of the screw BS described in detail below (for example, a configuration relating to the screw BS arranged at the position closest to the position where the front door DU is opened and closed). ) Is applicable.

<<Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS>>
FIG. 66(a) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear right side, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear left side. 66(a) and 66(b), an arrow indicating the movement of the screw BS described later is also shown. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b) for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (may be referred to as a main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to circulate, and the opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. R. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals thrown from the above-mentioned medal slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30. The hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as a hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, and the like.

Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right side inclined portion H54, and a left side inclined portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced on the right side of the hopper H40 is guided by its own weight toward the hopper bottom portion H52 described later. The left side inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40 and guides the medal introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom portion H52 by its own weight. Further, the left side inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left-side inclined portion H56 and is arranged so as to cover an upper portion of a substantially left half of a disc H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of game medals are linked in the hopper bottom portion H52 and cannot fall, and the game medals can be smoothly guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52.

By providing the right-side inclined portion H54, the left-side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57, any game medal introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 are accumulated in the hopper bottom portion H52. In this way, the right-side inclined portion H54, the left-side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores the game medals inside the hopper H40.

A disc H50 as a rotating body is arranged on the hopper bottom portion H52. The disc H50 is rotationally driven by the above-mentioned hopper motor H80, and the game medal is ejected from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotation operation of the disc H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal exit H60.

<Discharge guide H62>
Inside the front side wall H42, a discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 that is formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is placed in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located below the left side of the inclined surface H64. Although the width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, the inclined surface H64 is formed to be slightly widened downward (from the left side to the right side).

The discharge guide portion H62 guides the game medals in the upper part of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals are stored in the hopper H40 and before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40. This is a member for reducing the number of medals that are used. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges the game medal to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores the game medals inside the hopper H40, while the discharge guide portion H62 stores the game medals. It functions as a discharging inclined portion that discharges to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right side inclined portion H54 and the left side inclined portion H56.

Further, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, each of the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 has a downward sloping inclination. The final target of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward is provided upright along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The protruding wall H58 can prevent a medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the hopper bottom portion H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially rectangular columnar shape and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 in the upper part, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<<Removal of screw BS of reel unit RU>>
The front door DU is attached to the rotating body type game machine so as to be openable and closable with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (left side as viewed from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side when viewed from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact or collision with the back box is generated and propagates to the back box. Since the impact occurs on the right side of the rotating body type gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the rotating body type gaming machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually weaken on the left side of the rotating body type gaming machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three positions on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right side screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the right side receives the largest impact. Therefore, the right side screw BS screwed into the right side screw hole BU10 is most easily loosened by the impact, and when the screwing is released, the right side screw BS falls off and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 may be impacted, loosened and dropped by the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 is assumed to have a small impact to some extent, but there is a possibility that the left screw BS loosens and falls depending on the extent of propagation of the impact and the time of use.

<<Position (1) of screw BS and hopper H40>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged below the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right side screw BS among the above-mentioned three screws BS.

When the right-side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and is rolled by the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by its own weight and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right-side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is used. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the disc H50 from being disturbed or damage the disc H50, and to stably operate the hopper H40.

In the example described above, only the right side screw BS is targeted, but the three left side screws BS, the center screw BS, and the right side screw BS are all located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Alternatively, the reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BSs can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU is apt to generate impact due to contact or collision with the back box. Members such as screws attached to the right side (right side when viewed from the player) of the above may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<<Position (2) of screw BS and hopper H40>>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS among the above-mentioned three screws BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right side screw BS. In addition, in FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it falls freely downward (arrow 2A) as it is, and as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64), it is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, first, it falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped center screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and is rolled by the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the own weight of the central screw BS and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

The dropped right screw BS and the central screw BS are prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from hindering the rotation operation of the disc H50 or damaging the disc H50. It can be operated stably.

In the example described above, the right-side screw BS and the central screw BS are targeted, but the left-side screw BS is also positioned so that the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU are positioned above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Good. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BSs can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form the protruding wall H58 protruding upward in the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the projecting wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS, which is dropped and placed on the inclined surface H64, from dropping to the hopper bottom portion H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS bounces when it falls on the inclined surface H64. It is possible to prevent the screw BS from dropping to the hopper bottom portion H52, and prevent the screw BS from hindering the operation of the disk H50 or causing a failure.

In this way, even if the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU is detached due to the vibration due to the opening and closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40 and the medal assistance is performed. By being configured to drop into the tank HS, the manager of the game arcade can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<<Hopper H400>>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (right side of the right side wall H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is possible to share the dropped right side screw BS with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by storing it in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS drops, the hopper H400 passes through the inside of the hopper H400, and further through the bottom opening H410, the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right-side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<<extension part RU50>>
In the above-mentioned example, when the screw BS is dropped, it is free to drop toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, the extension portion EN may be provided below the reel unit RU and the pedestal portion BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, the screw BS does not immediately fall, but can be dropped to the medal auxiliary tank HS after being guided by the extension portion EN once. In this way, by the extension portion EN, the position where the screw BS is attached and the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS can be aligned, and the degree of freedom of the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged can be increased.

<<Composition of medal auxiliary tank HS>>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes are formed on the inner surface of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection substrate CC (see FIG. 65) are provided on the lower portion of the back surface of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have a long shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to project forward. The two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding full detection electrode through holes HS20 and project toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL (see FIG. 69(c)) of the stored game medals gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. 69(c) is a sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost part UL shown in FIG. 69(c) is a line (for example, an envelope) connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost part UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For simplicity, the uppermost portion UL is shown as a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE are conducted through a plurality of medals, the two full detection electrodes DE are connected to each other. An electric circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection substrate CC outputs a signal indicating that the two full detection electrodes DE are electrically connected. By doing so, when the game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE, the medal full error can be detected.

The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two and may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three electrodes, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes, and one newly provided one is provided. A medal full error can be detected by establishing conduction between the full detection electrode and any one of the above-mentioned two full detection electrodes. Even when the game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored biased to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), the medal full error can be detected.

<< material of screw BS and material of medal >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is formed of a steel material. Further, the material of the medal is non-magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is formed by plating brass or stainless steel. With such a configuration, even when the screw BS drops into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using the magnet or the like.

<<Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE>>
The left-side screw BS, the center screw BS, and the right-side screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the pedestal BU. FIG. 69(b) is a front view showing the whole of the screw BS. This screw BS has a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69(b)) shorter than the distance EL (see FIG. 69(a)) between the two full detection electrodes DE (of the screw BS). Total length BL<distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS (for example, the right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE. There is no conduction with the full detection electrode DE of (the screw BS does not get caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69A is a plan view of the back side portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE projects inside the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Relationship Between Seat Length HR of Screw BS and Diameter ED of Full Detection Electrode DE>>
The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69(b)) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69(a)) (in the radial direction of the seat surface of the screw BS). Length HR <diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS is not caught by one full detection electrode DE, Even when the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately removed, and the screw BS alone does not accidentally conduct electricity.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69(c), one full detection electrode DE of the two full detection electrodes DE (for example, the right full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69(c)) is already stored. When in contact with a medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69(c)) and the screw BS temporarily contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not caught by the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69(c)). The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

As an example, the reel unit RU has been described as an integral type unit that accommodates all three reels. The possibility of detaching the screw BS by detachably attaching to the pedestal portion BU by the same also arises. Therefore, the structures of the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS, and the like can be similarly adopted.

<<Reel band configuration>>
FIG. 70(a) is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70(b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel strip MO is curved. FIG. 70C is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the break M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70D is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the "white seven" symbol in an enlarged manner. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and the BB is started by stopping and displaying "white seven/white seven/white seven" on the activated line. The reel band MO has a thin plate-like long shape (strip shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel strip MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. Further, it has a light-transmitting property, and the pattern can be illuminated from the back surface by the light emitted from the rotating body backlight.

The reel strip MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other, and are attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged in parallel with each other and their centers are located on the same rotation axis. Further, the interval between the two frames is arranged to be substantially the same as the width of the reel strip MO. By sticking the reel strip MO between the two frames along the outer circumference of the two frames, the reel M50 can be formed.

<Overlapping part M58 and break M59>
The reel strip MO is formed such that the length of the reel strip MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the entire length of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (superimposed portion M58) where the reel bands MO partially overlap with each other occurs near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps with each other, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

As shown in FIG. 70C, the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and the first end M55 forms a break M59. When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW as described above, first, when the reel band MO is started to be attached, the reel frame MW is started to be attached to the reel frame MW, and then the reel frame MW is attached to the reel frame MW. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel strip MO is pasted along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 to the first end M55, and finally, the The reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and the attachment up to the first end M55 is completed. When the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the first end portion M55 ends past in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end portion M55 is pasted on the reel strip MO. The portion M55 is in an overlapping state.

On the other hand, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the reel strip MO is gradually rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel strip MO is moved to the first end portion. Sticking along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, and finally, sticking the reel band MO on the upper side of the first end M55 and sticking to the second end M57. Over. When the reel strips MO are pasted in this order, the second end portion M57 ends past in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end portion M57 is placed on the reel strip MO. M57 will be in a state of overlapping.

Here, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 is finished to be attached in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the two end portions M57 overlap, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end portion M57 (air resistance is large). The air easily enters between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below the second end M57, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 gradually comes off easily.

On the other hand, the reel strip MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end portion M57, and then the first end portion M55 is finished to be attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end M55 overlaps the upper part, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the second end part M57 overlaps the reel band MO described above. In comparison with, it is difficult for air to contact the cross section of the first end M55 (small air resistance), and it is difficult for air to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below the first end M55, The reel strip MO in the vicinity of the first end portion M55 is in a state of being hard to peel off.

As described above, when the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel strip MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel strip MO after the pasting is completed in the direction.

<Various errors>
Thus, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion M55 or the second end portion M55 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any one of the ends M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is formed of resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. Further, when the reel frame MW is assembled, it may be deformed and an error may occur. Further, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the size of the reel frame MW ( The outer circumference) may be attached in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large pattern (for example, "white seven") is arranged on the reel strip MO below the overlapping portion M58, the mounting position of the reel strip MO is desired due to these various errors. If the large symbol overlaps the reel band MO on the upper side of the overlapping portion M58 when it is deviated from the position, it is assumed that the large symbol is covered by the reel band MO on the upper side.

In addition, depending on the gaming state, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and push it, and if the bonus symbol is arranged near the break M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and push it. When the bonus symbol is stopped, the break M59 may be visually recognized when visually recognizing the bonus symbol. When the above-mentioned various errors occur, it is assumed that the player may visually recognize not only the symbol but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbol. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable to the player, so the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy, but in that case, the gap of the break M59 and the symbol If the position deviation of the symbol is visually recognized, the joy that the symbol combination that is the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed may be reduced.

<In case of bonus design>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at a position closest to the break M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (such as a bonus symbol) is longer than LL. The shortest pattern (length SL in the longitudinal direction) is arranged at the position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the symbol having a short length in the longitudinal direction at the position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, even if various errors occur, these The design can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (break M59), and the design can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-mentioned various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59 or the deviation of the position of the symbol. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to cherry) in the longitudinal direction are shown. Although illustrated as the same SL, if the bonus symbol (white seven) is shorter than LL which is the length in the longitudinal direction, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol are made different. Is no problem. Further, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the break M59 are not limited only to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may be any bonus symbol, for example, a re-gaming symbol (a symbol which can form a symbol combination corresponding to a re-gaming). Alternatively, a watermelon symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon) may be arranged near the cut M59. Further, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located in the vicinity of the break M59 are compared, but the invention is not limited to this. The length in the lateral direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) may be longer than the length in the lateral direction of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the break M59.

In the above-mentioned example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol having the longest length in the symbol direction (bonus symbol etc.) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction SL of the symbol whose length in the longitudinal direction is shorter than LL. Although the arrangement of the symbols is determined by comparison of, the length in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO) is LT, and the lateral length of the symbol is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the part of the symbol most protruding upward and the part of the symbol most protruding downward along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short-side direction are the lengths of the difference between the part of the symbol most protruding upward and the part of the symbol most protruding downward along the short-side direction.

<In the case of a small role pattern>
Furthermore, in addition to the bonus design, such as a watermelon design or a cherry design, which is not displayed on the activated line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if it is won, in other words, it is arranged apart from the maximum number of sliding pieces. Designs in which there are at least one or more places (designations that may correspond to rare roles, designs that may be missed, etc.) are also targeted designs, and are intended to be visually recognized by the player. Is. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, the player may not be notified of the winning of the rare role before operating the stop button, and even in such a case, the player wants to win the rare role. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that makes it easy to obtain a winning combination (which is most profitable to the player). There are also gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations, such as a small payout number when the player wins a prize. In such a case, the operation timing of the stop button (the operation that is most profitable for the player) In many cases, the stop button is operated. It should be noted that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is most profitable to the player may be referred to as an optimum game method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are left reel upper stage, middle reel upper stage, right reel upper stage (upper straight line), left reel middle stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel middle stage (middle stage straight line), Lower left reel, lower middle reel, lower right reel (straight straight), upper left reel, middle middle reel, lower right reel (straight straight down), lower left reel, middle middle reel, upper right reel (straight upward straight) ) And 5 lines, and the specified number is 3 sheets. In addition, when there is a watermelon role and a cherry role as rare roles, when the watermelon role wins, when "watermelon watermelon watermelon" is displayed in a straight line on the activated line and the cherry role wins Is configured to stop and display "Cherry, any, any" (any indicates that any symbol may be displayed) on the activated line in a straight line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol have a rare role, there are at least one or more places which are arranged apart from each other by at least the maximum number of sliding pieces.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged part of the reel strip MO. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, on the reel band MO, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order, and these symbols are located away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is located in. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel that makes it easy to detect the winning of the rare role and also makes it easy to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing by the above-mentioned optimal game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare combination, stop during three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row. By operating the buttons, it is possible to win the prize regardless of whether the winning role is watermelon or cherry. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper stage of the cherry symbol to the lower stage of the watermelon symbol is the range in which the stop display is possible, and is shown in the same figure. As described above, even when any of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57 is displayed. (There is no cut M59 in the vicinity of the pattern placed on the two watermelon frames, and there is no break M59 in the vicinity of the pattern placed two frames below the cherry). It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the positions of the symbols and the like.

As shown in the figure, the symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to win the rare combination are near the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is possible to prevent the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 from being located at the position where the reels are frequently stopped and displayed, by arranging that they are not provided in the reel. Even when the deviation of the marks occurs, the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbol can be configured to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

The number of steps for one round of the reel in this example is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, 336÷20=16, which is a remainder of 16, so that 20 frames (symbols) are divided into 16 17-step frames (symbols) and 16 16-step frames (symbols). The reel is made up. In addition, it is preferable that the break M59 is configured so that it is not visually recognized by the player as much as possible, so that the frame (pattern) adjacent to the break M59 has 16 steps with relatively few steps. Is preferred.

In addition, as the configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine in this example, it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medals used in a general rotating body type gaming machine, and a pseudo game medium that is dataized is used. Alternatively, the game may be advanced. Further, when configured in this way, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the rotating body type gaming machine can be improved because there is no need to insert and pay out a substantial game medal (for example, a game medal insertion opening). It does not have a payout opening, the front door and the back box are integrated, etc. to close the gap into which foreign matter is inserted), and reduce the risk of using illegal game medals, Can be configured to improve security against fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed-type rotating-game machine). It should be noted that the configuration of the enclosed rotating-type gaming machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are collected as one total score, and the main control board M and payout control are performed. The board H (may also be referred to as a game value control board or a game value control means) or another board may execute the total score increase/decrease processing and the display processing.

Also, it is equivalent to a substantive game medal used in a general rotating body type gaming machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed type rotating body type gaming machine. You may comprise. The "score" may be referred to as "score information", "score", "score information", "game value", and "game value information". The physically existing physical game medals can be handled directly by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed rotating type gaming machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling the actual game medals. The score is not an actual game medal, but a pseudo game medium that is dataized so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. In addition, the “credit” is a score for temporarily accumulating in a bettable state or a payable state among the points, and is mainly data managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" is all the scores that can be thrown into the enclosed rotating body type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general spinning-type gaming machine that uses substantial game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the enclosed rotating type gaming machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a "game medal" in the present specification is "score", "score information", " There is no problem to handle as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and "point", "point information", "point", "point information" as appropriate. , "Gaming value", "gaming value information", there is no problem. Incidentally, it is not necessary to have “credit”. Also, there is no problem in replacing the credit amount display device with a total score display device.

(Second embodiment)
In the present embodiment, an AT in-progress state or the like is provided as a state relating to the AT that is advantageous to the player, and a push order navigation is executed in the AT in-progress state (so-called AT), thereby providing an advantageous state to the player Although the interest of the game is improved by providing the above, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing the AT is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a spinning-roller type gaming machine capable of executing an AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment will be described as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third game) according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second). That is, in step 1450, after executing the conditional device number management process described above, step 4100 (second). In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a rotation start freeze execution determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

In addition, after executing the above-described AT in-state start control processing in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes stop freeze execution determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3500. Transition. As will be described in detail later, in the second embodiment, the freeze is performed at the start of rotation of the reel (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel is stopped (when the final reel is stopped, when the third reel is stopped). (The reels do not start rotating for a predetermined time, the bet operation related to the next game for a predetermined time cannot be executed) may occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the rotation start freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT has newly changed to the “AT in progress” from the game. Here, "newly in the AT state" means that the state regarding the AT becomes the "AT in-state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as AT first hit), As an example, (1) win the BB in the "high probability state" → shift to the "advantageous BB internal state" → display the BB symbol (bonus symbol) in a stopped state and shift to the "advantageous BB state" → BB When it ends, it moves to the "AT in progress" newly, (2) If you win Cherry in "High probability state", you win the AT lottery with 1/2, and after you win the AT lottery, the omen state { It is a state related to the AT for making the player have an expectation regarding whether or not the player has won the AT lottery, and even when the AT lottery related to the cherry winning is not won, it is the same as the “predictive state”. In the case where it is configured to shift to the "formation of a gasse" that is a production mode (background production, etc.)}, the cherry is won in the "high probability state" and based on the winning of the cherry. Since it won the AT lottery, it shifts to the "predictive state" → a predetermined number of games that are the end conditions of the "precursive state" have been executed, so the game state transition such as newly transitioning to the "AT in progress state" is "new Has entered the AT state.” On the other hand, as an example of a case that does not correspond to "newly in AT state", (1) staying in "AT state" → AT counter value becomes 0, so "AT continuous battle state" { Transition to “AT in progress” state (state in which there is a possibility of relocation)}→Transition to “AT in progress” again, (2) Win BB in “AT in progress” → “ "Benefit BB internal state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, "Benefit BB state" shifts → BB ends, game state transition such as "AT in progress" again, "new Has entered the AT status".

Returning to the description of the flow chart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the AT start freeze execution flag (when it is turned on, the freeze is executed at the start of reel rotation). ) On. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side to receive the command, so that the sub-control board S side Then, the AT start effect is executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). It should be noted that the freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have freezes of various types (execution conditions and execution times).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the AT start freeze execution flag. Or not. If Yes in step 1568 (second), in step 1570 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, at step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a freeze execution timer (decrement timer, and the execution time of the freeze executed when a new "AT in progress" state and "AT" are executed. The start-time freeze execution time (in this example, 5 seconds) is set in the timer for measuring the freeze execution time that is executed when the "middle state" ends, and the new "AT mid-state" is set. In this case, the freeze execution time) is set to start the timer, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If Yes in step 1574 (second), the process moves to step 1552. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the execution time of the freeze at the start of the “AT state” has elapsed. Even if No in step 1568 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the freeze (sometimes referred to as a freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the “AT in progress” is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, during the freeze execution, the AT start effect is executed on the side of the sub control board S. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of the AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem even if the execution time is changed, and it is preferable to set it in accordance with the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at AT start is longer than the freeze execution time at AT end. Has been done. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. It can be an expensive game machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze-at-stop execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) of FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. “The AT counter value has newly become 0” means that the AT counter value becomes “1→0” in a situation where the AT counter value is being subtracted such as “AT in progress”. It does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to the AT is the "normal game state".

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 4202, the process moves to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining game number counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The advantageous section remaining game number counter value has newly become 0" means that the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is being subtracted in the situation where the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is being subtracted such as "AT state". This does not include the case where the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is always 0, which is the case where “1→0” is set and the state relating to the AT is the “normal game state”. If Yes in step 4204, the process moves to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the freeze execution timer (decrement timer, which is a decrement timer, is executed when the new "AT in progress" state and the "AT in progress" state are executed. A timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed at the time of termination and a freeze execution time at the time of termination (in this example, 3 seconds, a freeze executed when the “AT in progress” ends). (Execution time of) is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side to receive the command, so that the sub-control board S side Then, the AT end effect is executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is zero. If Yes in step 4210, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the execution time of the freeze at the end of the “AT in progress” has elapsed. In addition, in the case of No in step 4204, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. In the same figure, an example of the case where the power cutoff does not occur during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power cutoff occurs will be described in detail.

First, in (a) of the figure, a case where the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state regarding AT is newly set to the “AT in progress” is operated (the start condition of the game is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. To be done. Further, as the effect mode of the AT start effect, "warp execution!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second (while the AT start effect is being executed, the background effect dedicated to the AT start effect is always executed). .. Incidentally, in this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds. Then, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Then, when 4 seconds elapse from the start of execution of the freeze, "AT50G START!!" is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 as the effect mode of the AT start effect. Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the execution of the freeze, the execution of the freeze ends, the execution of the AT start effect ends, and the rotation of the reel starts. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of “AT50G START!! It will be switched to a possible background production. In addition, in the first game in the AT state, when the above-described push-order navigation is executed, (1) freeze execution starts→five seconds has elapsed, freeze ends→reel starts rotation and effects The pressing order navigation is displayed on the display device S40. (2) Freezing starts execution→frozen ends after 5 seconds elapses→reel starts rotation→reel drive state becomes reel constant speed state and effect display device S40 It may be configured such that a push-order navigation is displayed by pressing. With such a configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing becomes later than the conventional timing due to the execution of the freeze, the player mistakenly operates the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

Next, a case where a power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state regarding AT is newly set to the “AT in progress” is operated (the start condition of the game is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. To be done. Further, as the effect mode of the AT start effect, "warp execution!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second (while the AT start effect is being executed, the background effect dedicated to the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). Then, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when two seconds have passed from the start of execution of the freeze, the power is cut off (for example, a power failure occurs in the game arcade). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is still executed. After that, when the total time from the start of the execution of the freeze excluding the power-off is 5 seconds, the execution of the freeze ends, the execution of the AT start effect ends, and the rotation of the reel starts. It will be. As described above, in this example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect) and then the power is restored from the power cut, the execution time of the freeze is the same as that before the power cut. It will be executed continuously. As an example, in the case where the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the start of the freeze execution, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze execution is executed. When the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, the freeze is executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

Similarly to the freeze execution time, if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored from the power off, the execution time of the AT start effect is turned off. It will be executed continuously from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect differs depending on whether the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or not. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect. When the power is not cut off, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 at a timing 4 seconds after the execution of the AT start effect is being executed, while the AT start effect is being executed. When the power is cut off, the display "S50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 after the power is restored regardless of the timing of the power cut. The display "AT50G START!!" may be referred to as the AT start game number display. Further, in the same figure, as the AT start game number display, it is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the time of starting the AT state) is 50 games. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the AT game number addition lottery is configured to be executable in the “advantageous BB state” executed immediately before shifting to the AT state, the AT in the “advantageous BB state” is executed. It is configured such that the AT remaining game number obtained by adding the AT remaining game number obtained in the lottery winning to the AT initial game number of 50 games is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the AT start game number display. Good. As an example, when the number of remaining AT games of 30 games is obtained by the lottery for adding more AT games in the “advantageous BB state”, it is configured to display “AT80G START!!” as the AT starting game number display. May be. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but similarly for the AT end effect, the effect mode of the AT end effect is that the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the case where there is not (for example, in the case where the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET 〇〇” is displayed 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect. On the other hand, when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET ◯◯” is displayed after returning from the power cut regardless of the timing of the power cut.) Further, it is an effect that is displayed during execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and if the power is cut off during execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, an effect that is immediately displayed after the power is restored. In that case, it is not limited to the display of the number of games at the start of the AT, and there is no problem as long as the display can be progressed smoothly by being visually recognized by the player.

With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute the freeze depending on whether the new AT state is entered or the AT state is finished. The AT start effect is executed during the freeze operation when the AT state is newly entered, and the AT end effect is executed during the freeze operation when the AT state ends. In the case of such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, after the power failure is restored, it is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after the recovery from power failure, even if an unintended power failure (for example, a power outage at the amusement hall) occurs during the execution of the freeze, the number of games remaining in the AT, etc. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation by immediately displaying the information necessary for the player to grasp the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed depending on whether the new AT state is entered or the AT state is ended, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. , BB may be configured to be executed at the start or BB end, or may be configured to be executed based on the winning condition device or the staying game state.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze, the freeze execution period=A When the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze If the power is cut during the execution of freeze, the execution period of freeze is B, and if the execution period of the freeze is C after the power is cut, A=B+C. Is configured.

When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above is executed.

<<<<Configuration 2 Applicable to this Example>>>>
A configuration applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations described in detail below is applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and the configuration of 1 described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described in detail below may be applied. Here's what you can do.

<<<Lamp unit configuration>>>
First, with reference to FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, a configuration regarding lighting of a lamp unit (a generic term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail.

FIG. 77 shows a lamp unit lighting configuration image. In the figure, a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. Each item shown in the figure is a partial excerpt to the last, and for example, the items shown in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items of “red” to “no color”. First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 has a lighting color, and is 8 for "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red+green", "blue+green", "blue+white", and "no color". The element 1 has different types of lighting colors. The lamp unit according to the present example is composed of a plurality of LEDs. When the lighting color is "red", it means that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red+blue". In the case of “,” it indicates that, out of the total number of LEDs, the N LEDs are lit in red and the L LEDs are lit in blue (N=M+L). .. There may be only one combination of the order of the LED lit in red and the LED lit in blue, or there may be a plurality of combinations (when a plurality of combinations are provided, the lighting color is “ A plurality of lighting colors may be provided such as "red+blue 1" and "red+blue 2"). In addition, “no color” indicates that the light is turned off (not turned on), which is the lighting color selected when the light is always turned off. Note that, as described above, the numbers of the items forming the elements 1 to 6 in the figure are only some extracts, and in the element 1, three or more colors such as “red+blue+green” are selected. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which is "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", "no lighting". The element 2 has seven types of lighting times. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always on, and "no lighting" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is the turn-off time, which includes "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lights off". The element 3 has seven types of extinguishing times. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always off, and "no lighting" is the lighting time that is selected when the lighting is always on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is configured by combining the lighting time which is the element 2 and the extinguishing time which is the element 3, and is "0.1 seconds lighting→0.1 seconds. Turn off, "Turn on for 0.1 seconds → Turn off for 0.3 seconds", "Turn on for 0.2 seconds → Turn off for 0.3 seconds", "Turn on for 1 second → Turn off for 0.1 seconds", "Turn on for 3 seconds → 0. The element 4 has seven types of lighting time patterns of "3 seconds off", "always on", and "always off". As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of “lighting for 0.1 seconds→lighting off for 0.1 seconds”, lighting time of “0.1 seconds” as element 2 and turning off of “0.1 seconds” as element 3 It is composed by combining with time. The "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "always" which is the element 2 and the lighting time of "no lighting" which is the element 3. Has been done. Further, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when it is always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "no lighting" which is element 2 and the lighting time of "always" which is element 3. Has been done.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is the element 1 and the lighting time pattern which is the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is the element 1, the lighting time which is the element 2 and the lighting time which is the element 3. For convenience of explanation, in the figure, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as the lighting element contents, and the identification elements distributed according to the lighting element contents are shown as the lighting element types. As the lighting elements, lighting element type a: “0.1 second red lighting→0.1 second unlit” lighting element type b: “0.1 second blue lighting→0.1 second unlit” lighting element type c: “0 .. 1 second red lighting→0.3 second off” lighting element type d: “0.1 second red+blue lighting→0.3 second off” lighting element type e: “0.2 second red+blue lighting→0. 3 seconds off” lighting element type f: “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” lighting element type g: “1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” lighting element type h: “1 second Blue + white lighting -> 0.1 seconds off" lighting element type i: "3 seconds green lighting -> 0.3 seconds off" lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green lighting -> 0.3 seconds off" lighting element type k: "Always red lighting" lighting element type l: "Always blue lighting" lighting element type m: "Always green lighting" lighting element type n: "Always white lighting" lighting element type o: "Always red + green lighting" lighting Element type p: “Always blue+green lighting” lighting element type q: “Always blue+white lighting” lighting element type r: 18 lighting elements of “always off (no color)” are provided as elements 5. .. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of “0.1 second red lighting→0.1 second light off”, the element 1 “red” and the element 4 “0.1 second light→0.1 second light off” The lighting time pattern (the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the extinguishing time as described above) is combined. The “always red+green lighting” is configured by combining the element 1 “red+green” and the element 4 “always lighting”. The “always off (no color)” is configured by combining “no color” which is the element 1 and “always off” which is the element 4.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or more lighting elements that are the element 5. In the figure, for convenience of description, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as the lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting pattern contents are shown as the lighting pattern types. As the lighting pattern, pattern 1: “a→a→a→a” pattern 2: “b→b→b→b” pattern 3: “a→b→a→b” pattern 4: “a→a→g” →g" pattern 5: "g→f→j" pattern 6: "i→h→b" pattern 7: "g→f→b" pattern 8: "i→j→g" pattern 9: "g→g" →g” pattern 10: “k” pattern 11: “l” pattern 12: “m” pattern 13: “n” pattern 14: “o” pattern 15: “p” pattern 16: “q” pattern 17: “r 17 types of lighting patterns are included as the element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a→a→a→a”, element 5 “red lighting for 0.1 seconds→lighting off for 0.1 seconds” is repeated four times. In the case of pattern 8 “i→j→g”, after executing the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting→0.3 seconds lighting off”, lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue+green lighting→0” It is configured to execute ".3 seconds off", and execute the lighting element type g: "1 second white on→0.1 second off". The lamp units may be lit by further combining the lighting patterns as in pattern 1→pattern 4, or as in pattern 1→pattern 4→pattern 1→pattern 4→pattern 1→... “Pattern 1→Pattern 4” may be repeatedly lit until the lighting termination condition is satisfied. The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when a game situation such as a predetermined error release is changed, or to be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to the present example is configured to be turned on by the combination of the lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of the element 6 is configured by the combination of the lighting elements of the element 5 and the element 5 The lighting element of is configured by a combination of the lighting color of the element 1 and the lighting time pattern of the element 4, and the lighting time pattern of the element 4 is configured by a combination of the lighting time of the element 2 and the lighting time of the element 3. Has been done.

It is to be noted that although the configuration relating to the lighting of the lamp unit is described in detail as including the elements 1 to 6, it is not limited to this and the number of the elements may be increased or decreased, or the elements 1 to 6 may be increased or decreased. May be changed (for example, the lighting brightness of the element 1 is set).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-based notification mode. In the figure, a lighting pattern of a lamp unit (which may also be referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of a rotating body back lamp S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) which are applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. A) and a sound output from the speaker S20 (also referred to as a speaker sound) in each situation of the game will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is a partial excerpt, and, for example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the type of BB (conditions related to BB The lighting pattern may be made different depending on the type of device) or the game state of winning the BB, and in one BB, the lighting mode (lighting cycle) combining a plurality of lighting patterns is repeatedly executed until the BB ends. It is supplemented that it may be configured to. Further, regarding the error, the medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of the error. In addition, in all of the configurations 1 to 6, during a normal game (error is not occurring, and it is not immediately after power-on, is not displaying the standby screen, is not in the setting confirmation mode, and is not in the setting change mode, And the lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in a situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. It is configured to be one or a combination of a plurality of them. Since the normal game is configured to have various game states such as a low probability state and an AT state, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected depending on the game state may be different. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. It should be noted that when the power is turned on, the state is from immediately after the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (immediately after the power is turned on).

<<Configuration 1>>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with a relatively small light amount (light amount smaller than normal light amount) Speaker sound: A dedicated sound loops while a medal empty error occurs until the error is cleared (Repeat playback)
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: A dedicated sound is output for a predetermined time when the power is turned on <while the standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Normal light intensity lighting Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to setting confirmation mode <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“1 second white lighting→0.1 second dark” is repeated 3 times) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to setting change mode <BB execution>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds lighting" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds Off)) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted with normal light amount Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to the BB being executed is looped (repeatedly reproduced) as described above. The effect executed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the effect that was executed before the power failure or the game state before the power failure occurred.

As in configuration 1, it is configured such that only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the error occurrence such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as a lighting color forming the lighting pattern. , Red color is used when a medal empty error occurs, while red color is not used during normal play (configuring that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs) , It is possible to easily discriminate between the case where the error has occurred and the case where the error has not occurred, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. Further, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit immediately after power-on and during normal game, the player or manager can easily discriminate between immediately after power-on and during normal game. Therefore, it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. In addition, the player can proceed with the game without stress without misidentifying that an error has occurred despite the normal game, and the manager can clearly identify the game machine in which the error has occurred. Becomes Further, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit depending on whether the standby screen is displayed or the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily perform the standby screen display and the normal game. It is possible to make a distinction, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. Further, during the display of the standby screen, it is possible to suppress the power consumption due to the use of the flashing lighting pattern even though the player is not playing the game. Further, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit in the setting confirmation mode and in the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily perform the setting confirmation mode and the normal game. It is possible to make a distinction, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, can quickly determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, and even if he forgets to turn off the setting key switch can do. Also, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit in the setting change mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game. It is possible to make a distinction, and it is possible to smooth the sales of the game hall and the progress of the game. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting change mode, and can quickly determine the unintended setting change mode. Further, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit depending on whether the BB is being executed or the normal game is being executed (the state where the BB is not being executed), the player or the manager can make the BB executing and the normal game. It is possible to easily discriminate the middle state (the state where the BB is not being executed), and the player or the manager can clearly discriminate the state of the game.

Incidentally, as described above, the difference between when the error relating to the lamp unit occurs and the normal game, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game, setting As the difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, a lighting color that is not used during the normal game (element 1) may be provided, a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game may be provided, and a turn-off time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game may be provided. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during a normal game.

<<Configuration 2>>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light amount Speaker sound: Looping a dedicated sound during error occurrence of medal empty error until error cancellation
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (flashes) in a dedicated pattern during standby screen display
Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light amount Speaker sound: No output <BB is being executed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds lighting" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds Off)) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted with normal light amount Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to the BB being executed is looped (repeatedly reproduced) as described above.

<<Configuration 3>>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (“Red for 0.1 seconds and turned off for 0.1 seconds” is repeated 4 times) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Dedicated during medal empty error until error cancellation Loop sound (play repeatedly)
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white) Back lamp lighting mode: Normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white lighting→0.1 second lighting”→“0.2 second blue+green lighting→0.3 second lighting”→“3 second green lighting→0.3 second lighting” ) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light amount Speaker sound: No output <BB is being executed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off" ) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted with normal light amount Speaker sound: Loop sound for exclusive use during BB (repeated reproduction) As described above.

<<Configuration 4>>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light amount Speaker sound: Until the error is cleared, a dedicated sound is looped (repeated playback)
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <while the standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second "Off" → "Blue for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second "Off" → "Blue for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB is being executed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds lighting” → “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds lighting” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds lighting” ) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during BB (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above. The warning sound output from the speaker when a medal empty error occurs and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are the same warning sound. During the setting confirmation mode, the speaker outputs the voice saying "A medal empty error is occurring", from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and in the setting change mode. It may be configured to output from a speaker. Note that, for an error different from the medal empty error, a warning sound and a voice "In error." may be output from the speaker in the same manner.

<<Configuration 5>>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light level Speaker sound: Until the error is cleared, a dedicated sound is looped (repeated playback)
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always extinguished (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: lighting → extinguished (lights when the normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Displaying standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted at normal light level Speaker sound: Special sound during setting confirmation mode <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted at normal light level Speaker sound: Special sound during setting change mode <BB execution>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds lighting" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off)) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted with normal light amount Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to the BB being executed is looped (repeatedly reproduced) as described above.

<<Configuration 6>>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (“Red for 0.1 seconds and turned off for 0.1 seconds” is repeated 4 times) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Dedicated during medal empty error until error cancellation Loop sound (play repeatedly)
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second light off" → "1 second white light → 0.1 second light off"->"White for 1 second, then off for 0.1 second") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Sound for exclusive use during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second light off" → "0.1 second red light → 0.1 second light off" → "1 second white light → 0.1 second light off"->"White for 1 second, then off for 0.1 second") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Special sound during setting change mode <BB execution>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second lighting" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds lighting" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off)) Back lamp lighting mode: Lighted with normal light amount Speaker sound: Sound dedicated to the BB being executed is looped (repeatedly reproduced) as described above.

It should be noted that in the figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but the configurations are merely examples, and a lamp unit lighting pattern, a back lamp lighting mode, and a sound output from a speaker for each game situation. May be combined from each configuration, and may be changed in any way. Regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, regarding the lamp unit, the difference between the time when an error occurs and the normal game, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the display of the standby screen and the normal game As the differences, the difference between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, the elements 1 to 6 described above. It is preferable to configure any one of (see FIG. 77) that is not selected during the normal game.

Further, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as the error, but the invention is not limited to this, and the display determination error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit when the error occurs and during the normal game. , The difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the difference between displaying the standby screen and the normal game, the difference between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the setting change mode and the normal game As the difference between the inside and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, any one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) is selected that is not selected during the normal game. Depending on the type of error that has occurred, for example, the medal empty error and the display determination error may be different from one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit. Any of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) relating to the lamp unit may be different.

Further, when the re-play combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be informed that the symbol combination related to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed by the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the game state, the lamp unit is configured to turn on when the re-play combination is won and the symbol combination related to the re-play combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of element 1 to element 6 Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination relating to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed without winning the re-gaming combination. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the re-winning combination has been won.

<<<Configuration related to opening and paying out front door>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a configuration regarding payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In addition, "normal" shown in the figure, for example, in the "low probability state", winning the prize-B (common bell), the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize 04) is stopped and displayed. 11 shows a case where 11 game medals are paid out. In addition, when "Payout occurs before opening the door" or "Payout occurs after opening the door", you win the prize-B (common bell) and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize 04) is stopped and displayed. Is illustrated. It should be noted that in the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<<Configuration 1>>
<In case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). It may be referred to as turning on), and the winning display 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not being pressed (the third stop button is being changed from being pressed to being not being pressed by the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.) When the button is not pressed, it may be referred to as turning the third stop button from ON to OFF), the game medal corresponding to the prize 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before opening the door>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before opening the door in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF, the game medal corresponding to the prize 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals is output, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 notifies the front door DU of the opening of the front door DU (in the figure). The sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are simultaneously output. After that, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU remains open, that is, the front door opening notification sound starts to be output when the front door DU is opened, and then is output even if the front door DU remains open. The output is configured to end when a specific time elapses after the opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to confirm or change the setting, the front door opening notification sound is continuously output until the setting confirmation or the setting change is completed. The setting can be confirmed and the setting can be changed without stress without prevention. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound is ended at the same time as the output of the payout sound is ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output end timing of the payout sound and the output of the front door opening sound are output. There is no problem if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after opening the door>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 outputs the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open. It That is, the front door opening notification sound is output by opening the front door DU regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF, the game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 is used. The payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are simultaneously output. After that, a specific time has elapsed from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Then, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound.

As in the configuration 1, the game medals can be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU, so that the front door DU is forgotten to be closed when the manager of the game hall supplies the game machine with the game medals. Even in the case where the game is exhausted (it is not closed tightly), the game medals can be normally paid out, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be simultaneously output, so that the status of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the configuration 1 described above, it is preferable to set the output mode (tone color, pitch, tempo, etc.) so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be easily distinguished.

<<Configuration 2>>
<In case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). It may be referred to as turning on), and the winning display 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not being pressed (the third stop button is being changed from being pressed to being not being pressed by the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.) When the button is not pressed, it may be referred to as turning the third stop button from ON to OFF), the game medal corresponding to the prize 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before opening the door>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before opening the door in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF, the game medal corresponding to the prize 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals is output, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 notifies the front door DU of the opening of the front door DU (in the same figure). The sound A) is output, and the output of the payout sound ends. After that, a specific time has elapsed from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The predetermined period of time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after opening the door>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation in which two reels out of the three reels are stopped and the other one reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 outputs the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open. It That is, the front door opening notification sound is output by opening the front door DU regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door open notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. After that, under the situation that the payout of the game medals is being executed, a specific time has elapsed from the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is finished, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning prize 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the payout of the game medals corresponding to the prize 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

As in the configuration 2, the game medal can be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU, so that the front door DU is forgotten to be closed when the manager of the game hall supplies the game machine with the game medal. Even in the case where the game is exhausted (it is not closed tightly), the game medals can be normally paid out, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, by preventing the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound from being output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the situation where it becomes difficult to determine the situation of the gaming machine due to the mixture of the timbres of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In the configuration 2, the payout sound is output even while the front door open notification sound is being output, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively low compared to the volume of the front door open notification sound (volume 0 is also It may be configured to include).

<<Other configurations>>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is open, a game medal is inserted, a max bet button (a bet button D220 in this example) is operated, and a bet button lamp S50 (both a max bet lamp is also included. It may be configured so that the lighting of a chargeable lamp or a bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp) is effective. That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (the credit increases or the game medal is Bet). In such a case, a bet sound (or a medal insertion sound) corresponding to insertion of a game medal or operation of a bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even when is not open, the betting sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) is supported. The betting sound may not be output.

<<<Power-off and payout configuration>>>
The operation that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example and that is performed when the power is cut off while the third stop is being pressed when the small winning combination is won will be illustrated below. Note that any of the configurations exemplified below is applicable to all the embodiments according to the present example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect produced by blinking the back drum backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Structure 1>
In a game that wins a small role (for example, the common bell of winning 04), press the 3rd stop button (turn it on) to win the small role -> the power is cut off while pressing the 3rd stop button (A power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.) → The power is restored while the third stop button is pressed → The power is restored and the game medal corresponding to the small win is paid out. May be.

Further, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed down as in the configuration 1 described above, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed. In this case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

With this configuration, even when the power is cut off when the player is pressing the third stop and the power is immediately restored, the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. It should be noted that even if any of predetermined operation members controlled by the main control board M side (for example, a start lever, all stop buttons, a bet button (max bet button), a settlement button, etc.) is operated, another predetermined operation member is operated. If the operation member is not operated, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed. For example, when returning from power-off, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the payout of game medals based on winning is not executed. Good. In the case of such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or the start lever (the operating member which is turned on among the operating members controlled by the main control board M side is 1). It may be configured such that the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed (by only one) (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side is It may be configured such that the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed by all the operation members to be controlled being turned off.

As an example of the situation where the power supply is cut off, the power switch is turned on, the power supply cable is disconnected, a power failure occurs in the game arcade, the power supply cable is pulled out from the insertion port, Etc. are considered, and in any case, it is applicable to the above-mentioned structure.

<Structure 2>
In the game in which a small win (for example, the common bell of prize 04) is won, press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small win → Open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (Opening the front door DU causes a door opening error), power is cut off (power switch is turned off, etc.) → Power is restored with the third stop button pressed (power switch is turned on) → Close the front door DU while pressing the third stop button to release the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist in a predetermined direction) → The door opening error is released The game medal corresponding to the small winning combination may be paid out as described above.

Further, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the door opening error is released while the third stop button is pressed down as in the configuration 2 described above, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is released. When is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the door opening error is released.

<Structure 3>
In a game that wins a small role (for example, the common bell of winning 04), press the 3rd stop button (turn it on) to win the small role -> the power is cut off while pressing the 3rd stop button (A power outage occurs in the game hall) → Release the finger from the 3rd stop button (turn the 3rd stop button from ON to OFF) → Restore the power → Return the power and pay out the game medal corresponding to the small win May be configured as described above.

Further, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the power is cut off while the third stop button is being pressed and the power is restored after the third stop button is released, as in the configuration 3 described above. When the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small win is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small win is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small win is not output. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

In the case of the configuration 1, the configuration 2, or the configuration 3 described above, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not it is turned on) as a process after the recovery from the power failure. Before performing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), the payout process of the game medal based on the winning (the process executed in the game progress control process) may be executed. In addition, as described above, in the situation where the symbol combination in which the small winning combination is a prize is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is being pressed, and then the power is cut off while the third stop button is being pressed. Alternatively, the game tokens may be paid out based on the winning by releasing the third stop button, and in such a case, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect corresponding to the payouts are performed. May be configured not to be executed (when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed without the power interruption, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<<Configuration of confirmation mode and payout>>>
The following is an example of the operation applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is held down when the small winning combination is won. Note that any of the configurations exemplified below is applicable to all the embodiments according to the present example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the configuration described in detail below is in the state where the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side such as the start lever, all stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the adjustment button, etc. When the various operation members controlled by are not operated (not on) and the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode. The case where it is done is illustrated. In the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in effect, or not.

<Structure 1>
In the game in which a small win (for example, the common bell of prize 04) is won, press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small win → Open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (Opening the front door DU causes a door opening error) and turns on the setting key switch (does not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → Closes the front door DU while pressing the third stop button. The door opening error is canceled (for example, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 and twisted in a predetermined direction). The setting confirmation mode may not be entered even if the third stop button is released.

Also, in the case of such a configuration, betting is possible while the setting key switch is still turned on, and the reel can be started to rotate by operating the start lever while betting is being performed, and the stop button It may be configured such that the reel can be stopped by operating (the game can be advanced). Further, after that, if the setting key switch remains on, betting may not be possible (gaming of game medals is not possible), or betting is possible but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the game may not be executed if the setting key switch remains on. It should be added that, in the case of such a configuration, the effect display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect. Moreover, when the front key DU is opened in a situation where the re-game symbol is not stopped and displayed while the setting key switch is still on (after the operation of the above-mentioned configuration 1), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured to obtain, or may be configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the re-gaming symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may display the fact that the setting confirmation mode is set.

<<<Configuration related to lighting of Max-Bet lamp>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. 83, an operation regarding lighting of a max bet lamp (also referred to as a bet button lamp S50) applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. Note that the configuration illustrated below exemplifies a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the replay is stopped. The max bet lamp is controlled by the sub control board S side or the main control board M side that is provided inside or in the vicinity of the max bet button and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, it is turned on when the max bet lamp is turned on (or blinking), turned off when the max bet lamp is turned off, and turned on when the bet lamp D211 is turned on and 1 bet OFF when the lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2 bet lamp D212 is ON, OFF when the 2 bet lamp D212 is OFF, and ON when the 3 bet lamp D213 is ON, It is illustrated that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, that the start lamp D180 is on (or blinking) is on, and that the start lamp D180 is off. Further, in the figure, when inserting game medals one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (detection of the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 such as the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, etc. However, as a bet button, one game medal can be bet by one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button as a bet button. A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button capable of betting two game medals by one operation (off→on) may be provided. In such a configuration, one bet to the medal slot D170 Even if the same action as the game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, or the second insertion sensor D30s) is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button, there is a problem Absent.

<<Configuration 1>>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Then, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bet lamp is turned on and the two bet lamp D212 is turned on. Then, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in the configuration 1, the max bet lamp is configured to be “turned off→lighted” every time one game medal is inserted, so that the maximum time period during which the game medal is guided from the medal insertion slot D170 into the gaming machine is max. Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid. Further, by accurately notifying the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the period in which the insertion of the game medal is invalid, It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown in during the invalid period and the game medal is not normally thrown, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

When the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, the third bet lamp D213 is turned on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off as in the configuration 1. Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that the specified number of three game medals have been bet.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is still lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

Like the configuration 2, the third game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player uses the 3 bet lamp D213 by pressing the max bet button. By being configured to light up as soon as possible after being operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on in accordance with the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be made smooth, and the player is spared. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted into the game machine or the player feels distrust of the performance or behavior of the game machine due to the slow operation.

<<Configuration 3>>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is still lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

As in the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on almost at the same time, so that the next game can be played. It is possible to notify the player of the fact that the game can be started as soon as possible, and the progress of the game can be made smooth, while the player inserts extra game medals and the performance of the game machine due to the slowness of movement. It is possible to prevent a situation where the user feels distrustful of the behavior.

<<Configuration 4>>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Then, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bet lamp is turned on and the two bet lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is blinking, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the start lamp D180 is turned off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, when the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp is turned off before the timing of turning on and off (in the middle of turning on). In addition, in the figure, the case where the third game medal is inserted in the blinking state where the max bet lamp is repeatedly turned on and off, and therefore the third game medal is inserted, is illustrated. The max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing when the third game medal is inserted, but when the third game medal is inserted in the state where the max bet lamp is off when the bet lamp is blinking. The max bet lamp remains off after the third game medal is inserted.

Even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all lit up in the non-bet state like the configuration 5, the number of inserted game medals (the first token, By varying the combination of turning on/off of the start lamp D180, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 depending on the second and third cards, the player can play the current game situation (how many game medals). Will be bet) will be understood.

<<Configuration 6>>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is still lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 lights up at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2), The 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

Like the configuration 6, the third game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3 bet lamp D213. By being configured to light up as soon as possible after being operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on in accordance with the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be made smooth, and the player is spared. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted into the game machine or the player feels distrust of the performance or behavior of the game machine due to the slow operation.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is still lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. Then, the start lamp D180 is turned on (begins to blink). After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on.

As in the configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on substantially at the same time. In other words, the player can set the 3 bet lamp D213 to the max. By configuring to turn on the bet button as soon as possible, the 3 bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly according to the operation of the player, and the progress of the game can be smoothed and the game can be played smoothly. It is possible to prevent a situation where a person inserts an extra game medal or feels distrust of the performance or behavior of the gaming machine due to the slowness of the operation.

In the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6 and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is turned on = the max bet lamp is turned on, but it is a lighting mode in which the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. As long as it is the same as the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on=the max bet lamp may blink. Further, in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on=the max bet lamp may be turned on. Further, similarly, in the configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is turned on=the start lamp D180 is turned on, but it may be a lighting mode in which the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. Similarly to the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on=the start lamp D180 blinks. Further, also in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on=the start lamp D180 is turned on. The max-bet lamp may be configured to be controlled on the side of the sub control board S or may be configured to be controlled on the side of the main control board M.

<<<Configuration when operating the payment button>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the operation at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. The following configuration exemplifies a case where three gaming medals are bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, when the max bet lamp is lit (or blinking) is ON, when the max bet lamp is off is OFF, when the operation of the settlement button is newly detected is ON, the settlement button Is not detected, or the operation of the settlement button is not newly detected is OFF, the 1 bet lamp D211 is ON, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is OFF is OFF, Turns on when the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on, turns off when the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off, turns on when the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and turns off when the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing), OFF when the start lamp D180 is OFF, ON when the startable lamp D300 is lit (or flashing), ON The fact that D300 is off is shown as OFF, and that the credit amount display device D200 is decremented by 1 is shown as OFF→ON→OFF by 1 decrement. Further, in the figure, a case is shown in which game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170, but as a bet button, different from the max bet button, one operation is performed by one operation (off → on). A 1-bet button that can bet a game medal or a 2-bet button that can bet two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. In such a case, the medal slot There is no problem even if the same action as inserting one game medal into D170 is applied to one pressing of the one bet button. In addition, the configuration illustrated below may be configured such that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even during the stop display of the re-gaming, or the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be displayed during the stop display of the re-playing. It may be configured such that the gaming medals that are currently playing cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition that the betted game medals are paid out from the outlet D40 by operating the settlement button D60 (a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button is turned “on→off”. May be set to “ON”, or may be set to “ON for 0.5 seconds or more”.

<<Configuration 1>>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from OFF to ON), the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the bet is made. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started), and then four game medals, which are credits accumulated in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200, are released. It is paid out from the exit D40. Further, the payable lamp D300 is turned on at the timing when the game medal to be finally paid out (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 becomes 1→0) is paid out.

As in the configuration 1, the betted game medal is settled (paid out) before the credit, thereby confirming that the credit becomes 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if the player immediately leaves the seat, it is possible to prevent forgetting to settle the bet game medal. In particular, when the game is finished in a situation where the number of credits is a small amount such as 1 or 2, the player is relatively likely to finish the game without obtaining sufficient game medals. The attention of the person may be distracted. Even in such a case, in order to prevent the player from unintended disadvantages, the betted game medals are settled (paid out) before the credits. Since it is configured, in the configuration 1, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are set before the credit number displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted. , And the throwable lamp D300 are turned off.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from OFF to ON), the max bet lamp is turned on, and the three betted game medals are paid out from the outlet D40 (payout is started). After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the throwable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bed lamp D211 is turned off and the throwable lamp D300 is turned on. In the configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

When it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once as in configuration 2, the betted game medals are paid out, but no credit is paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the max-bet lamp D300 to turn on the max-bet lamp at a timing before the turning-off of the insertable lamp D300, the player mistakenly sets the settlement button. If you have operated, only the game medals that have been bet will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits. By making a notification, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<<Configuration 3>>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from OFF to ON), and the start lamp D180 and the chargeable lamp D300 are turned off. The three betted game medals are paid out from the discharge opening D40 (payout is started), and then the four credits accumulated in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are paid out. The game medal will be paid out from the outlet D40. Further, after the timing of releasing the finger from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of 3 bet lamp D213→2 bet lamp D212→1 bet lamp D211. Further, the payable lamp D300 is turned on at the timing when the game medal to be finally paid out (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 becomes 1→0) is paid out.

<<Configuration 4>>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from OFF to ON), the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are extinguished, and the three betted game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (starting payout). Be done). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bed lamp D211 is turned off and the throwable lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

As in the configuration 4, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the max bet lamp is lit at a timing later than the lighting of the insertable lamp D300. , When the player desires to change to the one bet after betting three, the player operates the settlement button D60 once to settle the three betted game medals and then one game medal Since the throwing or the 1 bet button is to be operated, in such a case, the progression of the game can be made smooth by lighting the throwable lamp D300 before the max bet lamp.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from OFF to ON), the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the bet is made. Three game medals are paid out from the outlet D40 (payout is started). Then, the throwable lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In the configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<<Configuration 6>>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (off→on timing), the throwable lamp D300 is turned off. Then, the start lamp D180 is turned off. The three betted game medals are paid out from the discharge opening D40 (payout is started), and then the four credits accumulated in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are paid out. The game medal will be paid out from the outlet D40. Further, after the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the three bet lamps D213→the two bet lamps D212→the one bet lamp D211 are turned off in this order. In addition, the payable lamp D300 lights up after the game medal to be finally paid out (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 becomes 1→0) is paid out. The max bet lamp remains off.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals have been bet on the rotating body type gaming machine and the bets are not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned on. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throwable lamp D300 is lit. Then, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (off→on), the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 is turned off. After that, the insertable lamp D180 is turned off, and the three betted game medals are paid out from the outlet D40 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off. Then, the throwable lamp D300 is turned on. The max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<<Difference in operation due to power off timing>>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S depending on the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing the first mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is the timing chart of the timing of power-supply to the gaming machine and power-off. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd aspect.

The first mode is a mode in which the power-off occurs after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the sub-program of the sub control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program of the main control board or the sub program of the sub control board is started.

In this example, the power cut is a state where the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the gaming machine power switch is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, the power cable is disconnected, or a power failure But it's okay. It also includes the case where the power supply is unintentionally stopped in the game arcade. The timing when the power is cut off is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is pulled out, and the power cable is disconnected. It is the timing when the power outage occurs and the timing when the power failure occurs.

In FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), ΔT1 is from the start of power supply until the voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches a low level (which may be referred to as an off level) after a power failure occurs. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the supply voltage to the main control board M from the timing of power failure. ΔT4 is the time until the low level is reached, ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the sub program of the sub control board S is activated, and ΔT5 is the main control board. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is activated. Here, the relationships of ΔT5<ΔT1, ΔT2<ΔT3, ΔT5>ΔT3, and ΔT4<ΔT5 are established.

<<<first aspect>>>
<<Change in power status>>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, power is cut off at time t3, and power supply to the game machine is stopped.

<<Operation of main control board>>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2) and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. In the figure, the case where the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board is shown. In addition, the time from the start of power supply to the time when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be varied (random). Also, although the case where the time from the start of power supply to the sub control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and power supply to the sub control board is started. The time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (randomly). Even with such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the time at which power supply to the sub control board is started. It is preferable that the time is longer than the maximum value (maximum time) from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

Then, at time t3, the power is cut off. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and is substantially maintained at the maintenance level from time t4. It will be constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and the power supply unit E keeps a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain time (time t4 to time t5) even when the power is cut off. (Maintenance level) can be output (the processing at power-off will be executed in the situation where the voltage of the sustain level is supplied). In this example, the time to maintain the maintenance level (time from time t3 to time t5) from the start of power-off process execution (when power-off is detected) is the time at which the timer interrupt process can be executed at least 20 times. (Time during which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times) can be guaranteed.

After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and becomes an off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed by the main control board starts from time ta when time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant to ΔT5. By executing this main program, the processing of the main control board START (power-on) shown in FIG. 13 is executed.

As described above, in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, when the setting key switch is off, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 are executed, and the process of step 1040 causes a timer interrupt Is started.

When the setting key switch is turned on in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 of FIG. .. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined period T. The period T in which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power failure occurrence>
When power failure occurs, the power supply unit E outputs a power failure detection signal. The main control board M has an input port to which a power failure detection signal is input. The power failure detection signal is a high level signal when the power failure has not occurred, and is a low level signal when the power failure has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not the power is cut off depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high level signal or a low level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects a power failure in the determination processing in step 1604 of FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power-off has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low level signal in both of the two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

In this way, in this example, the occurrence of power failure is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 of FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power interruption can be detected. On the other hand, when the power interruption occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power interruption cannot be detected.

As described above, when the power-off occurs after the execution of the main program is started and the power-off occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. 14, It is possible to detect that power interruption has occurred due to interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power failure has occurred, the power failure processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<Operation of Sub Control Board>>
<Starting subprogram>
The sub-program executed on the sub-control board S is started from time tb when ΔT4 has passed from time t2 when the power supply voltage became constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S does not miss the command transmitted from the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the power supply to the main control board M is started, and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the power supply to the sub control board S is started. Is shown as the same time tb, the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the power supply voltage from the start of power supply to the sub control board S to The time to reach the supply level may be different, and even in such a case, from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the start of the main program of the main control board M. Is preferably longer than the time from the start of power supply to the sub control board S until the start of the sub program of the sub control board S, and the power supply voltage on the main control board M side is The time from reaching the supply level to starting the main program of the main control board M is the time from when the power supply voltage on the sub control board S side reaches the supply level to when the sub program of the sub control board S is started. It is preferable to configure the time longer than the time.

<<<second aspect>>>
FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. The second mode is a mode in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program executed by the main control board M is started. That is, this is a mode in which the power is cut off before the time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level and ΔT5 elapses.

As described above, in the second mode, since the power is cut off before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated), the power cut is generated by the main program. That is, the game machine is stopped (the supply voltage reaches the low level) due to the power interruption, without the power interruption processing shown in FIG. 36 being executed.

<<Operation of main control board>>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the game machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2) and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

After that, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to the occurrence of the power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is substantially maintained at the maintenance level from time t14. It will be constant. After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and becomes an off level at time t16.

As described above, in the second mode, the execution of the main program is started after the power failure occurs, but the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 of FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is set to the off level before the temperature rises.

In addition, although the first mode and the second mode are illustrated in the figure, the configurations applicable to the gaming machine according to this example are (1) immediately after power supply to the main control board M is started ( For example, the power supply is cut off after the timer interrupt process is executed once after the power supply to the main control board M is started→The power supply unit E causes the main control board M to start before the execution of the main program is started. The power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M becomes an off level (the execution of the main program is not started) (2) Power supply to the main control board M is started → Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M Immediately after the power supply level reaches the supply level (for example, after the time for executing the timer interrupt process once after the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level), the power is cut off → The main program is executed The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M before the start is turned off (the execution of the main program is not started) may be configured as described above.

<<<Relationship between setting key switch status and power supply status>>
FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the setting key switch state in the first mode, the power feeding state, and the situation, and FIG. 89(b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 3 is a table showing a relationship between a power supply state and a power supply state.

<<Relationship Between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in First Mode>>
<State 1>
First, in the state 1 of FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine is in the normal state, that is, in the state where the game is being executed or in the state where the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is "off". The “power supply state” is “on”.

<State 2>
In the state 2, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" is "off". At this time, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "ON" while the "power supply state" remains "OFF".

<State 4>
Next, in the state 4, the power is supplied while the setting key switch is in the "on" state, so that the "power supply state" is switched to the "on" state. When the "power supply state" is turned "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, the first mode is a mode in which the power is cut off after the execution of the main program is started. The control board START (power-on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13 described above, the setting key switch is determined to be on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , Change from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. As described above, when the setting key switch is “ON” and the “power supply state” is “ON”, the setting change mode is entered, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. This allows the setting value to be changed. Further, the setting change start command is transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of step 1622 of FIG. 32, so that the sub-control board S can inform that the setting change mode is in progress.

<State 5>
Next, when the power supply is cut off in the setting change mode and the setting change device control process is being executed, the "power supply state" is changed to "off". When the power is cut off, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is called and executed, and by the process of step 1902, the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is the return address. Is stored in the storage area as.

<State 6>
In state 6, the setting key switch is operated to switch the setting key switch to “off” while the “power supply state” remains “off”.

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied and the "power supply state" is switched to "on" while the setting key switch is "off". When the "power supply state" is turned "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “OFF”, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the processing of step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 5 is restored, and execution is started from the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the process of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. To be done. As described above, in the first mode, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and when the power supply is off, the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply is turned on to shift to the setting change mode. This is the basic action when shifting to the setting change mode, but even if you turn off the power supply in the setting change mode, turn off the setting key switch, and then turn on the power supply, Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, the setting change mode is set. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode (for example, a power failure occurs in the game hall), it is possible to return to the state before the power was cut off, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It is possible to make it difficult to generate various operations.

<<Relationship Between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in Second Mode>>
<State 1>
State (1) of FIG. 89(b) is the normal state of the gaming machine, that is, the state in which the game is being executed or the state in which the game can be executed, like the first mode, and the setting key switch is " It is "off" and the "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2 as well, similarly to the first mode, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" is "off". At this time, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "ON" while the "power supply state" remains "OFF".

<State 4>
In state 4, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the “on” state, and the “power supply state” is switched to “on”.

<State 5>
In the state 5, with the setting key switch turned on, the power is cut off and the “power supply state” is switched to “off”. As described above, in the second mode, the power is cut off before the execution of the main program executed by the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the "power supply state" is once turned "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to state 4 is turned "on" (for example, by timer interrupt processing). The "power supply state" is switched to "off" after the elapse of the time of executing once. In other words, before the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is activated), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is off level. (State 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to “off” while the “power supply state” remains “off”.

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied and the "power supply state" is switched to "on" while the setting key switch is "off". When the "power supply state" is turned "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the processing in step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 2 is restored, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the second aspect, even when the setting key switch is “on” and the “power supply state” is “on”, the main program of the main control board M is not executed. When the power supply is turned off, the setting key switch is turned off, and then the power supply is turned on, the setting change mode is not set. .. By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode is changed to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. Even if the setting key switch is turned on, it can be configured so as not to shift to the setting change mode, and a gaming machine that is less likely to cause a problem can be configured.

<<<Medal awarding control and payout sound output control>>
As described above, when the small winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the payout number of medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination is awarded to the player.

<<Medal-giving process>>
The process of giving a medal includes a process of adding as a credit number and giving it, and a process of actually paying a game medal out of the gaming machine and giving it.

<Credit number addition processing>
When the current credit number is less than the maximum accumulated number (for example, less than 50), the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the number of payouts until the credit number reaches the maximum accumulated number. This credit number addition processing is executed by the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout processing>
When the current credit number exceeds the maximum accumulated number, the CPU C100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H to give medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<<Awarding of medals>>
Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be awarded, the mode of only the process of adding the number of credits, the mode of only the process of paying out the game medals, and the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out the game medals ( There are three types of modes, i.e., a mode in which both the credit amount addition process and the medal payout process are executed).

<Mode of only credit number addition processing>
When the current credit number is less than or equal to the maximum reserve number, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the number of payouts until the credit number reaches the maximum reserve number. If the maximum number of stored coins is not reached even if the number of coins to be paid out is added, only the process of adding the number of credits is performed, and the process of giving medals is completed.

<Mode of shifting from credit amount addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current credit number is less than or equal to the maximum reserve number, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the number of payouts until the credit number reaches the maximum reserve number. When the number of credits reaches the maximum accumulated number, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals. The CPU C100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition from the payout number from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Mode of only paying out game medals>
When the current credit number has already reached the maximum accumulated number, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out the payout number of game medals from the medal payout device H.

<<Specific example>>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current credit amount is 47 and the medals of five payout numbers are to be awarded to the player, first, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the credit amount to 1 Add one by one. Specifically, the CPU C100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49 and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47→48 (first (time t1))→49 (second (time t2))→50 (third (time) t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of storages (50) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased further.

Next, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts three credits from the payout number from five payouts. 2 from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPU C100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. ..

<<Various times>>
<Unit processing time of credit number addition processing and unit processing time of game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, it takes a unit processing time a to increase from the credit number m to the credit number m+1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2−time t1=a to increase from the credit number 48 (first card) to the credit number 49 (second card), and the credit number 49 (second card). It takes time t3−time t2=a to increase the number of credits to 50 (third credit). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

Further, in the process of paying out the game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the (n+1)th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6−time t4=c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of the (first sheet) addition process from 47 to 48 (time t1) and the timing of the (second sheet) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2). Or the difference between the timing of the (second sheet) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2) and the timing of the (third sheet) addition process from 49 to 50 (time t3).

Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference between the start timings of two consecutive payout processings. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the fifth sheet processing (time t6) and the start timing of the fourth sheet adding processing (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined to have a constant cycle.

<Time e for switching from credit amount addition processing to game medal payout processing>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of reserves, and when all of the number of payouts are not given, the process is switched to the process of paying out game medals. The switching time e is required for the CPU C100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process.

<<Comparison of time>>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is a time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. And both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

As described above, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a by adjusting the time required to drive the medal payout device H. By doing so, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e differs from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By increasing the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals, and to smoothly switch from the arithmetic process of the CPU C100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40. ..

Further, the switching time e can be set shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals, and by ending the process of paying out game medals early, the next game can be started immediately. The consumption of game medals can be increased, the profit of the game hall can be increased, and the operating efficiency of the game machine can be improved.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the payout process of the game medals, the payout is different from the fixed cycle, and the feeling of elation when the payout of the game medals to the medal tray starts. Expectations can be given to the game.

The switching time e can be matched with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made equal to the unit processing time a, medals can be awarded to the player at a constant cycle, and the addition processing of the number of credits and the payout processing of the gaming medals are equivalent medals. It is possible to give a sense of security to the player by indicating that.

<<Output of game medium addition sound>>
When starting the credit addition process (time t1), the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub control board S. Upon receipt of this payout start command, the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium addition sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S when the payout of game medals is completed (time t7). The sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium addition sound from the speaker S20 upon receiving the payout end command. As described above, the CPU C100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and all of the payout number of game medals corresponding to the winning small prize is given to the player. It is determined whether or not it is given. When the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that all of the payout number of game medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination has been given, the CPU C100 terminates the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S, and outputs from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium addition sound ends. In the case where the game medium applying sound is repeatedly reproduced (outputted) in a predetermined cycle, the game medium applying sound is immediately output at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. The output may be finished, or the output of the game medium giving sound is finished at the timing when the cycle of the game medium giving sound outputted at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command is finished. It may be configured to do.

The game medium addition sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit addition sound data at least once. The unit addition sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the one-time reproduction time of the unit addition sound data is d, and the CPU SC of the sub-control board S reads the unit addition sound data from the RAM, and when the payout start command is received, the payout end command is issued. By repeatedly reproducing the unit-added sound data a plurality of times until the reception of, the game medium-added sound is output from the speaker S20.

<First mode>
The first mode of the game medium addition sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit addition sound data is repeatedly reproduced at every reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received. By reproducing in this way, the game medium addition sound is output at a constant cycle. As described above, even when switching from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out the game medals, the game medium addition sound is output at a constant cycle, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable about the payout and It is possible to give a sense of security by indicating to the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process are given the same value.

<Second mode>
Further, the second mode of the game medium addition sound shown in FIG. 90 is to reproduce the unit addition sound data for each reproduction time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only the time f after the credit number addition processing is completed. This is a mode in which the unit addition sound data is reproduced, and thereafter, at the time t4, the reproduction processing of the unit addition sound data is started again together with the start of the game medal payout process. When switching to the payout process of the game medals, the game medium giving sound is output at a timing different from a fixed cycle, so that the game can be given an uplifting feeling and an expectation that the payout of the game medals to the medal receiving tray will start. ..

In addition, while paying out the game medals from the medal payout device H, when there are no more game medals in the hopper H40 and a hopper error occurs (for example, when it is determined Yes in the process of step 1279), The control board S stops outputting the game medium addition sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout is possible, the main control board M again sends a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium application sound. .. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when a hopper error occurs, the game medium addition sound is continuously output. However, the volume of the game medium addition sound is changed to a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. The output is made at a volume lower than the volume (volume may be 0), and the hopper error is canceled, so that the output of the voice indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated and the game medium addition sound is output. The volume may be restored.

<<<arrangement of integrated circuit on substrate>>>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a substantially board-shaped rectangular printed board MP. A CPU C100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, etc. are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and a circuit pattern of a conductor is mainly formed on the back side of the printed circuit board MP. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) includes two longitudinal ends ML1 and ML2 that are parallel to each other and extend in the longitudinal direction, and two lateral ends MS1 and MS2 that are parallel to each other and extend in the lateral direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is attached so as to stand upright in the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is vertically installed, the long end portions ML1 and ML2 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the short end portions MS1 and MS2 are arranged in the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. Further, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short-side end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short-side end portion MS2, and the short-side end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short-side end portion MS1.

In the following, the longitudinal end portion ML1 side is referred to as the upper side, the longitudinal end portion ML2 side is referred to as the lower side, the lateral end portion MS1 side is referred to as the left side, and the lateral end portion MS2 side is referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the lateral direction is CSL. The CPU C100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body. When the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of mounting the CPUC100 on the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to mount the CPUC100 in an appropriate direction so that the CPUC100 can perform a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the CPUC100, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC100 is formed.

In this example, the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100 coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is arranged in alignment with the direction of the IC to be described later, When the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, it is possible to reduce the mistake of attaching the CPUC100 in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized in the state where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, it is possible to arrange the CPUC100 in a direction in which the printed model number, maker name, etc. are easily visible.

When the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 sequentially increase in the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the lateral direction is ISL. Like the CPU C100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body. When the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, even in the work of mounting the IC on the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to mount the IC in an appropriate direction so that the IC performs a desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the IC, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the IC is formed.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP such that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. In this case, mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction can be reduced.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number of the IC and the manufacturer's name can be easily visually recognized while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, it is possible to arrange the IC so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily viewed. Can also

When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC sequentially increase in the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP to form electrical connection with other electronic components. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the lateral direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP to form an electrical connection with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S or the like via a connector and can send and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by the broken line in FIG. 91, only the resistor is arranged inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, and the IC is not arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPU C100 is a predetermined length or less. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the short-side length CSL of the CPU C100. Various currents (currents that change with time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. As described above, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and the noise emitted from the IC is reduced. , The operation of the CPU C100 can be prevented.

Further, the predetermined length from the outer circumference COR of the CPU C100 may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor. Since a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can serve as a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. Therefore, by not disposing the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is disposed at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL) and emitted from the resistor. The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPU C100.

<Relationship between height of CPUC100, height of IC and height of other parts>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC 100 is highest, the IC height IHT is next highest, and the resistance height RHT is lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only the components having a height less than the height CHT of the CPU C100 are arranged inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPU C100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPU C100 is a predetermined length or less. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor.

In the work of mounting the CPUC 100 on the printed circuit board MP, a mounting tool (not shown) is used. The mounting tool is a tool for sandwiching the CPUC 100 at the tip of the mounting tool and mounting the CPUC 100 close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the CPUC 100 is clamped by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is clamped. Therefore, when the CPUC 100 is attached, the tip of the attachment must be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and a space for the tip of the attachment is provided so that the tip of the attachment does not interfere with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure.

For this reason, in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, only the components that are less than the height CHT of the CPU C100 are arranged. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other components. The area CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or shorter than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor.

It should be noted that only the components having a height less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged only in the peripheral area of the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and in the peripheral area of the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP in the printed circuit board MP. It may be configured such that components outside the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are attached to the outside, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP are components below the height CHT of the CPUC 100.

As described above, by disposing only the electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPUC100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100, it is possible to secure a space in which the tip portion of the mounting tool can be brought close to, Even if the mounting tool is used, the CPUC 100 can be mounted on the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

Although the main control board M has been described as an example in the above-described example, all of the boards on which electronic components such as CPU and IC are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, the door board D, the rotating board K, and the power supply board E. Can be applied to.

<<<Configuration related to AT lottery>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the rotating-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all the above-described configurations when configured to have an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is an AT lottery possible state. In the figure, a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the AT lottery, such as a low-probability state and a high-probability state, are not included. For example, one game state such as a high-probability state in the present embodiment. The AT lottery can be executed only in. Further, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of BB.

If Yes in step 1401-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type in step 1401-2, and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery, which is provided in order to reduce the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device having no lottery probability setting difference). In the modified example shown in the same figure, the condition device for which there is no setting difference is watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replay roles, or some replay roles), It is a push order bell, and in this processing, it is determined whether or not the condition device for which there is no setting difference is won. In addition, although there is a setting difference in the lottery probability between the loser and the common bell (there is a difference in setting), in this processing, it is configured not to judge whether the loser or the common bell is won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type and the RAM area for storing the winning number and the effect group number are different from each other. With such a configuration, an area for storing a winning number, which is an area in which information regarding a condition device having a setting difference in the winning probability and information regarding a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability are separately stored, and an effect group. An area for storing a number and an area for storing an AT lottery type, which is an area in which information regarding a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information regarding a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction Can be configured so as not to be confused.

If Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table and sets the AT lottery type to set the predetermined RAM area (step 1401-2). It is temporarily stored in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area (will be overwritten), and the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Even if No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right part of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when a condition device that does not cause a setting difference in a situation where AT lottery can be executed is won, when watermelon B is won, "0" is selected as AT lottery type, and when cherry is won Is "0" as the AT lottery type, "1" as the AT lottery type if you win the watermelon A, "2" as the AT lottery type if you win the replay, and if you win the push order bell “2” is set as the AT lottery type.

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right part of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18/ when the AT lottery type is "1". In the case where the AT lottery type is "2", the number is 256 and the number is "0→1→2" in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the AT initial game number in the AT counter. Note that, unlike the present embodiment, the present modification is configured to set the AT initial game number in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and set the AT initial game number in the AT state start control process. It is configured not to do so (when winning in addition to the AT game number, the AT game number may be added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to be the “AT in progress”, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1430). Even if No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1430).

In the conventional gaming machine, as the AT lottery, there is a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination and a lottery process (lottery process that refers to the winning combination) that is executed when a condition device with no setting difference is won. When it is configured to have, it is necessary to execute the AT lottery at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, (Corresponding to the processing of step 1401-2), and the lottery processing that is executed when the condition device with no setting difference is won (corresponding to the processing of step 1401-4 in the figure) Can be executed once in the lottery process (corresponding to the process of step 1401-6 in the figure).

As described above, the configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine is exemplified as the gaming machine, but the above-described configuration is applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machine, ball playing machine, arranging ball, game machine and casino machine. it can.

Incidentally, among the above-mentioned configurations, the configuration relating to the setting of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, the setting/reset button, etc. (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) is applicable to the pachinko game machine having the set value. Applicable.

<<<Configuration related to push-order navigation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example>>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute the push-order navigation. Here, the execution mode of the push-order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Note that the configurations described in detail below are applicable to all the embodiments.

Further, regarding the push-order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as the push-order navigation. (1) Display of the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying “=3”, it is possible to instruct the pressing order of “middle→left→right”. In addition, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction and an instruction display, and the game for executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game. (2) Display of an operation mode (an image that suggests) of the stop button advantageous to the player on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push-order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying “123”, it is possible to instruct (indicate) the pressing order of “left→middle→right”. (3) Outputting a sound suggesting the operation mode of the stop button, which is advantageous to the player, from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push-order navigation. As a specific example, by outputting "left" when the start lever is operated, it is possible to instruct (indicate) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. (4) Illuminating (blinking) of the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S so as to suggest the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player is referred to as push-order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button is turned on, thereby instructing (indicating) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible. (5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub-control board S has a player Illuminating (blinking) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to is referred to as push-order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel is lit, so that it is possible to instruct (indicate) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

In the following, the push order navigator is displayed for the game in which the push order combination (the combination in which the payout number and the transition state of the RT state may differ depending on the push order such as the push order bell and the push order re-play combination) is determined as the winning combination. The timing when the button starts and the timing when the push-order navigation ends will be described. By determining the winning combination as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute the pressing order navigation for notifying the player the most advantageous operation mode of the stop button (reel stop order or operation timing of the stop button). Is configured.

<<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
<Execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>
First, when there is no weight, in other words, when the minimum game time has elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is 0), the push order when the game is executed by operating the start lever The navigation execution mode will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), and in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the body rotation starts. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating (executed in step 1260 of FIG. 18). In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

Immediately after executing the body rotation process, “=3” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of a push order navigation in the push order display device D270, "=1": instruct a "left → middle → right" push order "=2": instruct a "left → right → middle" push order “=3”: Indicate the pressing order of “Middle → Left → Right” “=4”: Indicate the pressing order of “Middle → Right → Left” “=5”: Specify the pressing order of “Right → Left → Middle” Instruction “=6”: It is configured to instruct the pressing order of “right→middle→left”.

It should be noted that the display mode when executing the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 is not limited to the above-described display mode, and for example, the right digit (lower digit) may be displayed without displaying "=". May be displayed with a numeral, or a display mode which is not a numeral corresponding to the stop button (or reel) may be displayed only on the right digit (lower digit). Also, the right digit (lower digit) is a display corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next time, and the left digit (higher digit) is a display showing the pressing order of the entire game. Good. With such a configuration, the display mode of the right digit (lower digit) may change each time the stop button is stopped, while the left digit (higher digit) is the same regardless of the stop button stop operation. It becomes a display mode.

After "=3" is displayed as the press order navigation on the press order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the press order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40, "123": instruct the pressing order of "left → middle → right" "132": instruct the pressing order of "left → right → middle" "213" : Indication of pressing order of "middle → left → right" "312": Indication of pressing order of "middle → right → left" "231": Indication of pressing order of "right → left → middle" "321": " It is configured to instruct the pressing order of “right → middle → left”.

It should be noted that the display mode in the case of executing the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-described display mode, and may be a display mode other than the arithmetic numerals, for example, Chinese numerals. Alternatively, it may be an image of a character that is not a number, an image of a symbol, or the like. Further, in addition to the display mode corresponding to all the stop buttons, for example, "1--" (only in the pushing order navigation for notifying that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) instructing only the first stop is displayed. You may perform such a push order navigation.

The “display” may mean that all the elements to be displayed have been completely displayed, or that the elements to be displayed have started to display. For example, displaying "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" have been displayed on the effect display device S40, or the display of "123" has started on the effect display device S40 ( The effect at the start of display may have occurred). Similarly, the “display end” may mean that all the elements for which display should be ended are not displayed, or that the display transition for starting not to display the elements for which display should be ended is started. For example, ending the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" are not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the display of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be that the copy has begun to be deleted (eg, an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, "erasing the display" may mean that all the elements whose display should be erased are not displayed, or that the display transition for starting the display of the element whose display should be erased is not displayed. .. For example, deleting the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" are not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the display of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be that the copy has begun to be deleted (such as the effect of deleting the display). Similarly, deleting the display of "1" on the effect display device S40 means that the left stop button is operated in the situation where all "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40, and then the effect display device. It may be that "1" is not displayed in S40, or that part of the display of "1" on the effect display device S40 has begun to be erased (such as an effect when the display is erased).

After the pressing order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes effective. After the reel starts rotating, the reel drive state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, so that the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 or the effect display device S40. Therefore, as shown in FIG. By enabling the push order navigation to be displayed in front, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the push order (a situation in which the push order is wrong).

In addition, in FIG. 94, the push-order navigation in the push-order display device D270 is displayed (display is started) earlier than the push-order navigation in the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 will be described. When "winning-A3" is determined as the winning combination, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a command relating to the winning/replay winning information as a control command in step 1622 as a timer interruption process. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command processing of step 2250 based on the command relating to the winning/replay winning information received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M (as the command processing, the pushing order navigation such as step 2360 is performed. Execute push order navigation display process to display).

Here, the process in the case of displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command relating to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the command data is saved, the command analysis processing is performed, and the sub main board (in the sub control board S From the board) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S), the process of transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation is sequentially performed, and the display of the push order navigation from the reception of the command related to the winning/replay winning information. It takes about 16 ms until the command according to the aspect is transmitted. Further, the effect control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. In addition, as an example, the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S is a command related to winning/replay winning information, but this is merely an example, and other commands such as a command related to an effect group number may be used. Well, it may be appropriately designed depending on the execution timing of the desired effect.

Further, when the push-order display device D270 controlled on the main control board M side displays the push-order navigation, the push-order display device D270 is configured to be turned on by dynamic lighting. When the cycle is set to 2 ms, five 7-segment LED units are sequentially turned on for each timer interrupt process, and therefore it takes about 10 ms at maximum until the lighting is completed. With this configuration, the push order navigation is displayed after the trigger (for example, the operation of the start lever) for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled on the main control board M side occurs. More than the time until completion, an opportunity to display a push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, reception of a command related to winning/replay winning information from the main control board M side) ) Is generated until the display of the push-order navigation is completed is longer.

Here, the period in which the display of the push-order navigation in this example can be started will be described in detail using the process executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPU C100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to progress the game. It should be noted that the processing executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M in this example will be described only in specific steps for simplifying the description, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in the determination processing of step 1251 that the start lever D50 is operated, the reel rotation start preparation processing is executed in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing of step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing of step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the rotation of the reel is started. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 is a period corresponding to the wait period until the reel rotation is started, for example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) by the game interval minimum time timer M70 as a predetermined condition. This is a period that occurs because the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured by the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not satisfied, and may be referred to as the minimum game time. Next, in step 6114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel acceleration state end timing of step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the constant speed state of the reel, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process of setting is executed. In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any time from when the operation of the start lever is executed to when the operation of the stop button becomes effective. It suffices that the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the timing.

As described above, the period from the timing of operating the start lever D50 to the activation of the stop button is described according to the process executed by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, but in the present example, the main control board M is used. According to the processing executed by the CPU C100, the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid (the operation of the reel stop button is also called valid), We will specify the period separately. For example, in FIG. 94, a case where the push-order navigation by the push-order display device D270 is performed immediately after execution of the body rotation start process, and the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed during the reel acceleration state is illustrated. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 94, the case where the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state is illustrated, but the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S side, and then the sub-control board. It means that S executes the drawing process and the push-order navigation is displayed during the period of the reel acceleration state. The configuration relating to the display of the push-order navigation on the sub-control board S side is configured as follows. Good. (1) Start lever operation→Minimum game time elapses→Main control board M executes spinning cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation→Update reel drive state to accelerated state→Main control board M push order display device D270 Press to display the navigation sequence with dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S receives a command related to winning/replay winning information → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process triggered by the command and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → The main control board M executes the reel rotation start processing to start reel rotation→updates the reel drive state to the acceleration state→the main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 by dynamic lighting→main control Substrate M sends a command relating to winning/re-game winning information to sub-control substrate S side → Sub-control substrate S side receives a command relating to winning/re-game winning information → Main control substrate M predetermined to sub-control substrate S side Command is transmitted → The sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process triggered by the predetermined command and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → The reel drive state Update to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes spinning cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Update reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M Dynamic display of push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 → Main control board M sends a command relating to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → Sub-control board S side winning/replay winning information Command is received → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process triggered by the command to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → minimum Game time elapses → Main control board M executes spinning cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Update reel drive status to accelerated status → Main control board M dynamically lights push order navigation on push order display device D270 Displayed → The main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning/replay winning information → Main control board M is a sub-control Predetermined command is transmitted to the board S side → Sub control Substrate S receives the predetermined command → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Sub control is triggered by the predetermined command The substrate S side may execute the drawing process and display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. That is, the sub-control board S side designs the time value from the reception of a predetermined command from the main control board M side to the execution of the drawing process to determine the display timing of the push-order navigation on the sub-control board S side. Alternatively, the main control board M side may design the timing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub control board S side to determine the display timing of the push-order navigation on the sub control board S side.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be described. The state related to AT is the state during AT (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the body rotation starts. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

After that, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the press order navigation on the effect display device S40, "=3" is dynamically displayed as the press order navigation on the press order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the press order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the press order navigation of the press order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40 is at a timing after executing the barrel rotation start processing, and the push-order navigation by the push-order display device D270 is at a timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button is enabled. Executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→minimum game time elapse→reel). (Start of rotation→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state→period until operation of stop button is valid), for example, push order navigation is started on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably prevent the situation where the player cannot recognize the push-order navigation regardless of which display device the player is watching due to the delay in the timing of playing. You can

<Effect 2>
Further, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the situation in which two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs, which reduces the player's game burden. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can be reduced.

<Structure 3>
In the AT state, when a push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, not only the effect display device S40 but also, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, the pressing order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter, referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (medium decoration panel) or a sound output from the speaker S20. Various configurations are also possible. In the configuration 3, when the instruction game is executed, the push-order navigation can be executed by the reel window frame lamp D310. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position (near the reel) corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is configured of, for example, an LED or the like like the start lamp D180. Lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, sound output from the speaker S20, and the like are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S, as in the effect display device S40. That is, when the push-order navigation is executed by these effect means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the effect display device S40. By performing command processing (herein, referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) at 2108 and step 2250, it is possible to perform push-order navigation. Since the reel window frame lamp D310 is preferably provided at a position where the player can easily see it, for example, the upper side or the lower side of the reel window D160 (a reel from which the player can see the reel). It is preferable that the reel is provided in a space above or below the window D160 so as to correspond to each reel.

Configuration 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The state related to AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), and in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the body rotation starts. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

Immediately after the execution of the cylinder rotation start process, “=3” is displayed (starts to be displayed) in the push-order display device D270 as a push-order navigation by dynamic lighting. After "=3" is displayed as the pressing order navigation on the pressing order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) is turned on (starts lighting) as the pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. .. After that, "213" is displayed (starts display) as the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed is “push-order display device→reel window frame lamp→effect display device”, and the display of the push-order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310. The timing to be performed is later than that of the pressing order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the side of the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After the command is received, the command data is stored and the command analysis process is performed, and then the sub-main board (the board in the sub-control board S) is pressed to the effect control board (the board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning/replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation. Further, the effect control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation, and immediately executes the lighting process when there is no problem in the content of the command (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M transmits a command relating to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side triggers the reception of the command to produce the effect display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. In the case of executing the pressing order navigation by, the display of the pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lighting display) is performed before the display of the pressing order navigation by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command relating to the winning/re-game winning information, but may be the command relating to the effect group number.

In this way, by displaying the push-order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. It can be executed earlier, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pushing order (a situation in which the pushing order is wrong).

It should be noted that the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed may be “push-order display device→effect display device→reel window frame lamp”. In such a configuration, the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, and then the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the lamp board. However, the command from the main control board M side that triggers the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. And may be different commands.

As described above, as the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts), the explanation is made in the case of “push-order display device→reel window frame lamp→effect display device”. The display order is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device", "effect display device → press order display device → reel window frame lamp", It may be configured such that “reel window frame lamp→effect display device→push order display device” and “effect display device→reel window frame lamp→press order display device”. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push-order navigation to the lamp board and the effect control board, the main control board M dynamically changes the push-order navigation on the press-order display device D270. You may comprise so that it may display on display (start of display), and the command from the main control board M and the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310 which trigger the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of may be a different command. In this way, according to the timing of sending a command from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying the push-order navigation by dynamic lighting (starting display), (1) by dynamic lighting of the push-order display device D270. The push order navigation is executed first (2) The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first (3) The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed first. It is possible to change the order of display (display start).

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the pushing order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state. → Until the operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push-order navigation lights the lamp ( In this example, a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed using, for example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit, and the player is unlikely to recognize the pushing order navigation (an advantageous operation mode of the stop button). Can be provided.

<Structure 4>
Next, as the configuration 4, a configuration for executing the notification of the push-order navigation by the sound output from the speaker S20 will be described. The configuration 4 is configured to notify the pushing order by voice in the instruction game. For example, the dialogue such as "left", "middle", "right" is output as voice from the speaker, and the stop is performed. The push-order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated) is executed.

The configuration 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The state related to AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), and in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the body rotation starts. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

Immediately after the execution of the cylinder rotation start process, “=3” is displayed (starts to be displayed) in the push-order display device D270 as a push-order navigation by dynamic lighting. After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "medium" is displayed as the push order navigation that outputs the sound through the speaker S20 (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation). Voice that indicates that) is output. After that, "213" is displayed (starts display) as the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed is “push-order display device→sound→effect display device”, and the timing at which the notification of the push-order navigation by voice output is started is the reel window frame. Similar to the lamp D310, the timing is later than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the side of the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After the command is received, the command data is stored and the command analysis process is performed, and then the sub-main board (the board in the sub-control board S) is pressed to the effect control board (the board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the output mode of the push-order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command relating to the winning/replay winning information to the transmission of the command relating to the display mode of the push-order navigation and the transmission of the command relating to the output mode of the push-order navigation. Further, the effect control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command relating to the output mode of the push-order navigation, and immediately executes the voice output process when there is no problem in the content of the command (the voice output process is executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side triggers the reception of the command to cause the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20. When the push-order navigation is executed, the push-order navigation is output (voice output) by the speaker S20 before the display of the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command relating to the winning/re-game winning information, but may be the command relating to the effect group number.

As described above, by performing the output (voice output) of the press-order navigation by the speaker S20 before the display of the press-order navigation by the effect display device S40, a simple notification can be executed to the player earlier. In addition, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice even if he/she is not looking at the effect display device S40, and operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (the pressing order is wrong). Situation).

As described above, as the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the explanation is made in the case of “push order display device→sound→effect display device”, but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The order in which they are done is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display is started), “push-order display device→effect display device→voice” may be configured. In such a configuration, even if the sub-main board sends a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, the sub-main board sends a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. The command from the main control board M that triggers the pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40 and the main control board M that triggers the pressing order navigation in the sound from the speaker S20 are displayed. The command may be different from the command.

Furthermore, as the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), "voice → press order display device → effect display device", "voice → effect display device → press order display device", "effect display device → sound → press" It is also possible to configure such as “order display device”, “effect display device→push order display device→voice”. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the voice control board and the effect control board, the main control board M performs the push order navigation on the press order display device D270. The display may be performed by dynamic lighting (start of display), or a command from the main control board M side and a pressing sequence in the voice from the speaker S20 that triggers the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the side of the main control board M that triggers the display of the navigation may be a different command. In this way, according to the timing of sending a command from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying the push-order navigation by dynamic lighting (starting display), (1) by dynamic lighting of the push-order display device D270. Push order navigation is performed first (2) Push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is performed first (3) Push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed first, and so on. It is possible to change the order of display (display start).

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button For example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is performed by voice (from the speaker S20 in this example) by setting the time period until the operation becomes effective. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed by using the output sound) and is unlikely to cause the player to recognize the push-order navigation.

<<Execution mode of push-order navigation when there is weight>>
First, if there is a weight, in other words, operate the start lever in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer interval minimum time timer M70 has a value greater than 0), and then the game is executed. The execution mode of the push order navigation in the case of being performed will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration 1 of FIG. 99 will be described. The state related to the AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-win combination is won), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

First, in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 by the timer interrupt process, so that "=" is displayed on the push order display device D270. The process of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting is executed. After that, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (display is started) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the pressing order navigation of the pressing order display device D270 is displayed before the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 100 will be described. The state related to the AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-win combination is won), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in the timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 (drawing described above. Perform processing). After that, the minimum game time elapses, the spinning drum rotation start processing is executed, and the reels start to rotate, and the main control board M becomes a constant speed drive state of the reels, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes effective), the process of displaying (=starting) "=3" by the dynamic lighting in the pressing order display device D270 as the pressing order navigation is executed. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed earlier than the push order navigation of the press order display device D270. Here, the sub-control board S executes the process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 based on the reception of the command related to the effect group number. The command that triggers the process of displaying (starting display of) the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and may be performed at the timing of displaying (starting the display) of the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M may be determined accordingly.

<Structure 3>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 101 will be described. The state related to the AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-win combination is won), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

In a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 (drawing described above. Perform processing). After that, the main control board M dynamically sets “=3” as the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum game time has elapsed and the reel rotation start processing is executed to start the reel rotation. A process for displaying (starting display) when lit is executed. In FIG. 101, when the start lever is operated in a situation in which a predetermined game time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interrupt processes) is required before the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device is displayed. The push order navigation of S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. Also, when the start lever is operated in a situation in which only a time less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interrupt processes) remains before the minimum game time elapses, or the minimum game time When the start lever is operated in a state where is already passed, as described above, the trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever). Operation) occurs until the display of the push-order navigation is completed, and the trigger for displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S (for example, the main control board M). Since the time from the receipt of the command related to the winning/replay winning information from the side) to the completion of the display of the push order navigation is longer, the push order display device D270 The navigating order of is displayed before the navigating order of the effect display device S40.

As described above, the example of the timing at which the push-order navigation is displayed (display start) on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been described, but the push-order navigation is displayed (display start). This is not the only timing that comes. For example, as a modified example of the timing at which the push-order navigation in FIG. 99 is displayed (start of display), in the effect display device S40 before the push-order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses. The push-order navigation is displayed (display starts), and the push-order navigation is simultaneously displayed (starts display) on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 during a period before the minimum game time elapses. Alternatively, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the push order display device D270, and after the minimum game time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed (display). Start), the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40 during a period before the minimum game time has elapsed, and the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 after the minimum game time has elapsed. May be displayed (start of display) such that the display timing (start of display) of the push-order navigation is divided before and after the minimum game time has elapsed.

<Effect>
In this way, the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→period when the minimum game time has not elapsed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration). State → reel constant speed state → period until operation of stop button is valid). With this configuration, it is possible to make the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 have different timings for displaying (starting displaying) the pressing order navigation. As an effect of differentiating the timing of displaying (starting display of) the pressing order navigation between the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, (1) the pressing order navigation in the pressing order display device D270 is more effective in the effect display device S40. When it is displayed before the push order navigation The start lever is operated and the timer interrupt immediately after the main control board M determines the effect group number based on the determination of the winning combination (here, the push order bell combination) By a process (for example, about 2 ms), the push-order display device D270 can be configured to be able to display (start display) the push-order navigation, and thus a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly informs the player of information related to the push-order navigation. Can be provided. (2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the press order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, Since information relating to the current game state or winning combination is often suggested on the effect display device S40, the player proceeds with the game while visually checking the effect display device S40. I will go. The size (display area) is larger than that of the push-order display device D270, and the effect display device S40, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, is configured to be able to promptly inform the player of information related to the push-order navigation. Even if the push-order navigation is newly executed while visually recognizing the device S40, the push-order navigation can be confirmed while visually checking the effect display device S40. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the gaming burden on the player without turning his eyes to the display device. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the push-order navigation cannot be recognized no matter which display device the player sees because the timing to start the push-order navigation is delayed on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Thus, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player.

Further, by differentiating the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 from the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices must be viewed at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can avoid the situation that the situation does not occur and that the player can visually recognize the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs, which can reduce the game burden on the player. ..

<Structure 4>
Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 102 will be described. Note that the configuration 4 has the reel window frame lamp D310. The state related to the AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-win combination is won), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S turns on (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as the pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. To execute the process. After that, the effect display device S40 executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push-order navigation. The timing at which the display of the push-order navigation by the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is earlier than that of the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is performed in the pushing order navigation. This is because it can be executed earlier than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum game time has elapsed, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the reels start to rotate. After that, before the stop button operation becomes valid, the push order display device D270 performs push order navigation as "navigation order". =3" is displayed by dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “reel window frame lamp→effect display device→push order display device”, and the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310. The timing to be performed is earlier than the pressing order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the main control board M sends a command relating to the effect group number to the sub control board S), the order in which the pressing order navigation is displayed is “press order display device→reel window frame lamp→effect display device” or There is a case where “reel window frame lamp→press sequence display device→effect display device”. Here, in the case of displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub-control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 is displayed. Just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses, since it takes about 32 ms to display (start display) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed). For example, when the start lever is operated (about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the push order display device The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display start) after the display of the push order navigation by D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Further, also in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever was operated (main control board M, just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapsed (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapsed). When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side), it takes time until the sub control board S side receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (display start) after the display of the push order navigation by the order display device D270. As described above, as the timing at which the push-order navigation by the push-order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started, the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state. →When the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push-order navigation can be appropriately determined.

<Effect>
In this way, by displaying the push-order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. It can be executed earlier, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pushing order (a situation in which the pushing order is wrong).

Even in a gaming machine such as the effect display device S40 that does not have a liquid crystal unit mounted therein, the push-order navigation can be executed by turning on the lamp (in this example, turning on the reel window frame lamp D310). Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push-order navigation.

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 103 will be described. In the configuration 5, the push order navigation is executed by the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The state related to the AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push-order navigation is executed when the push-win combination is won), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S by timer interrupt processing during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed. The sub-control board S receives the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, and then, as a push-order navi that outputs a sound from the speaker S20, "it is medium!" And a voice indicating that the operation is performed) and a process of outputting a voice. After that, the effect display device S40 executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push-order navigation. The timing at which the display of the push-order navigation by the voice from the speaker S20 is started is earlier than that at the effect display device S40. This is a process in which when the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the voice output process from the speaker S20 draws the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40. This is because it is executed faster than After that, the reels start to rotate after the minimum game time has elapsed, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the main control board M becomes faster than the operation of the stop button when the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant. A process for displaying (starting display) "=3" by dynamic lighting as the push-order navigation is executed by the push-order display device D270. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “voice→effect display device→push order display device”, and the timing at which the notification of the push order navigation by voice output is started is the push order display. The timing is before the device D270 and before the effect display device S40.

Even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 103, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) ( When the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S), the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed is “push-order display device→voice→effect display device” or “voice→ There is a case where it is "press order display device→effect display device". Here, in the case of displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub-control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 displays. Just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses, since it takes about 32 ms to display (start display) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed). For example, when the start lever is operated (the remaining 10 ms or so until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the push order display device In some cases, the press order navigation by the effect display device S40 is displayed (display starts) after the display of the press order navigation by D270 or the notification of the press order navigation by voice.

Also in the speaker S20, the start lever is operated (main control board M is a sub-control board immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the S side), it takes time until the sub control board S side receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push-order navigation may be announced by voice from the speaker S20 after the display of the push-order navigation by D270.

As described above, as the timing at which the display of the push-order navigation is started on the push-order display device D270, the start lever operation → the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → During the period until the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push-order navigation can be appropriately determined.

<Effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→minimum game time elapsed→reel rotation start→ (Acceleration state of reel → constant speed state of reel → period until operation of stop button becomes effective), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as effect display device S40, The push-order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of voice (voice output from the speaker S20 in this example), and the reel or the stop button is focused on in the situation where the effect display device S40 is not viewed. Even if the push-order navigation is executed, the player can recognize the push-order navigation by voice while paying attention to the reel or the stop button, so that the player cannot recognize the push-order navigation. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that is unlikely to occur.

An example of the timing of displaying the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 and the example of the timing of displaying the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 has been described with a weight and without weight, respectively. The timing of displaying the push-order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. From the start of the operation of the start lever D50 described above, the operation of the start lever → the minimum game time elapses → the start of reel rotation → the reel acceleration state → the constant reel speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid until the pressing sequence is properly activated. You can set the timing to display the navigation. Moreover, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 to be narrower than the above-described period. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) from when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a predetermined command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M until the pressing order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is. Furthermore, if the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40 is large, additional time is required accordingly. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated. Considering the time required from the determination of the winning combination until the push-order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 as described above, As the timing at which the display of the push-order navigation is started on the effect display device S40, as an example, a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed (when weight is present) → reel rotation start (when weight is not present) → reel acceleration It is preferable to set the period as the state→reel constant speed state→the period until the operation of the stop button is valid. By defining in this way, the period until the display of the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 is started differs from the period until the display of the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 is started. You can During these periods, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing to start displaying the push-order navigation on each display device.

For example, during the period from the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, voice, reel To describe an example of the order in which the push order navigation is notified by the window frame lamp D310, (1) push order display device→effect display device→voice→reel window frame lamp (2) push order display device→effect display device→ Reel window frame lamp → audio (3) push order display device → audio → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (4) press order display device → audio → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) press order display device → Reel window frame lamp→Production display device→Sound (6) Push order display device→Reel window frame lamp→Sound→Production display device (7) Production display device→Press sequence display device→Sound→Reel window frame lamp (8) Production Display device→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp→Sound (9) effect display device→Sound→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp (10) Effect display device→Sound→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device (11) Performance display device→reel window frame lamp→push order display device→voice (12) Performance display device→reel window frame lamp→voice→push order display device (13) Voice→push order display device→production display device→ Reel window frame lamp (14) sound → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (15) sound → effect display device → press order display device → reel window frame lamp (16) sound → effect display device → reel Window frame lamp → push order display device (17) sound → reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device (18) sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → press order display device (19) reel window frame Lamp→Press order display device→Production display device→Sound (20) Reel window frame lamp→Press sequence display device→Sound→Production display device (21) Reel window frame lamp→Production display device→Press sequence display device→Sound (22) ) Reel window frame lamp→Production display device→Voice→Press order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp→Voice→Press order display device→Production display device (24) Reel window frame lamp→Voice→Production display device→Press order Like a display device, start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid until the push order navigation is displayed (display start) Can be configured to determine the timing to be).

Further, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controls With the stop button lamp S60 to be performed, it is also possible to add a push-order navigation in which the stop button lamp S60 lights up (blinks) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in the timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights up (or blinks) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button for performing the first stop operation. Perform the process to Described below is an example of the order of displaying (starting displaying) the push-order navigation with the push-button navigation added by the stop button D40. (25) Push-order display device→sound→reel window frame lamp→stop button lamp 1 Only stop button lights (flashes) → production display device (26) press order display device → audio → stop button lamp (only first stop button lights (flashes)) → reel window frame lamp → production display device (27) push It is possible to configure the sequential display device→sound→stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) and the reel window frame lamp substantially at the same time→the effect display device, etc., but the order here is This is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in (27) above, the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 are turned on (blinking) at the same time, but it is also possible to further output the sound from the speaker S20 at the same time. Execution timing (push order display device D270) of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel) The order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in accordance with the transmission timing of the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the command regarding the push-order navigation of the stop button D40). When executing the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels are not turned on (blinking) but only the stop button lamps corresponding to the reels on which the stop operation is to be performed. It is preferable to control to turn on (blink). For example, when executing the pressing order navigation of “213”: “middle→left→right” by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp (lighting) corresponding to the middle stop button D42→the middle stop button D42 is operated→the middle stop Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to button D42 → Stop button lamp (light) corresponding to left stop button D41 → Operate left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to left stop button D41 → Right stop button Based on the progress of the game, the stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lights up) → the right stop button D43 is operated → the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button D43 (lights off) lights up corresponding to the reel. It is configured to blink (blink) and turn off.

Further, the case where the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) is executed by the sub-control board S has been described above. The control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) may be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push-order navigation by the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be described.

When controlling the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M, the start lever is operated, and the timer interrupt after determining the effect group number based on the determination of the winning combination (here, the pushing order bell combination) A process of turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is executed by a process (for example, if it is the first cycle from the determination of the effect group number, it takes about 2 ms until the stop button lamp S60 is turned on). It becomes possible to do. With this configuration, an example of the order in which the push-order navigation with the push-button navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added (display start) will be described. (28) Push-order display device→stop button lamp (Only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame Lamp→Production display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) and the pressing order display device can be configured substantially at the same time→Voice→Reel window frame lamp→Production display device, etc. However, the order here is an example, and the order is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), in the pressing order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 controlled on the main control board M side, the sound from the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20 controlled on the sub control board S side. , Which is started before the push-order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, the timing of executing the timer interrupt process for lighting (blinking) the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M side is changed, You may start the pushing order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 after starting the pushing order navigation on the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310). Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of the push-order navigation on the main control board M side (push-order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or sub-control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame) The order in which the pressing order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in accordance with the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the pressing order navigation of the lamp D310 and the sound from the speaker S20.

<<Configuration related to the end of display of push order navigation>>
Next, the end timing of the push-order navigation of the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be described. Similar to the timing at which the push-order navigation starts, the timing at which the push-order navigation ends can be freely designed to some extent according to the period in which the player finishes the game. An example of the period when the player finishes the game is the timing when the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all reels are completely stopped and a prize is awarded, the payout of the game medal based on the prize is completed, and the game is ended.

As the period for ending the display of the push-order navigation, the operation timing of the third stop button is used as a starting point, and the operation of the third stop button (press) → the third stop button is not pressed → prize determination → payout based on winning is completed It is possible to define it as either timing. In this example, as the timing at which the push-order navigation ends, the end timing of the push-order navigation is different for each push-order combination (push-order bell, push-order replay combination). For example, the timing at which the display of the push-order navigation by the push-order display device D270 ends is different depending on whether the determined winning combination is the push-order bell or the push-order re-gaming combination.

In Configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to describe the end timing of the push-order navigation, the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed, and the effect display device It should be additionally noted that the pressing order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button in S40 is also finished.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration 1 of FIG. 104 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 ends, and the effect display device S40 displays the push-order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) (display start). To be done. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

Here, the push-order navigation disappearance effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display relating to the end when the display of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device ends. In the figure, the right stop button is operated and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button is turned from off to on in the situation where "3" is displayed as the press order navigation on the effect display device S40. Is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, a command related to the detection is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. By executing the process of erasing the display of "3", the push-order navigation extinguishing effect which is erased after the display of "3" is transmitted is displayed.

After that, in a situation where the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push-order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Here, as a trigger for ending the pressing order navigation of the pressing order display device D270 and the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40, both "press the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). It is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), but in FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 precedes the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display disappears. This is the same as when the pressing order navigation is started, and even when the ending timing of the pressing order navigation is "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub-control board S draws a plurality of frames. It can be said that this is because the end of the push-order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed because the process of displaying is performed.

To describe the end of the push-order navigation in detail, in the push-order display device D270, the push-order navigation ends when the push-order display device D270 is turned on, then turned off, and then turned off, and the effect display device S40 is pressed. The display of the forward navigation → the start of the display of the push-down navigation disappearing effect → the end of the display of the push-down navigation disappearing effect (erasing complete) ends the push-down navigation. In this example, the timing at which the push-order display device D270 starts to turn off is referred to as turning off the push-order display device and starting display of the push-order navi disappearing effect (display start). It should be noted that the push-order display device turn-off may be replaced with the timing when the push-order display device D270 is turned off, or the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect ends. The timing of turning off the push-order display device and displaying the push-order navi disappearance effect (start of display) may be such that the push-order display device is turned off → displaying the push-order navi disappearance effect (start of display), or displaying the push-order disappearance effect. (Display start)→the push order display device may be turned off, or the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearing effect display (display start) may be performed at the same time.

In addition, the configuration in which the display of the push-order navigation ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above, but when the third stop button is operated, the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected) The timing for detecting that the sensor for turning on is switched from off to on is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, and may be referred to as “when the third stop button is pressed” hereinafter) and the third stop. After the button is pressed, the state where the third stop button is released (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from OFF to ON by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) , Which is a timing at which it is detected that the switch has been turned from on to off, and may be referred to as “when the third stop button is not pressed” hereinafter), and the push-order navigation ends in each of these states. It can also be configured to define the timing. For example, in the order of the timing at which the push-order navigation ends in the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, in more detail (when the push-order navigation does not end at the same time) (1) Interrupt on the main control board M side By the processing, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from OFF to ON, the push order display device is turned off, and the third stop button is detected from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. The command related to is transmitted → the sub-control board S side receives the command → push-order navigation disappearance effect display (display start) (2) In order to detect the operation of the third stop button by the interrupt processing of the main control board M side That the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side. Detect→Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side→Receive the command on the sub control board S side→Display the press order navigation disappearance effect (start display) (3) By the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from on to off → the press order display device is turned off → from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side to receive the command to display the pressing order navigation disappearance effect (display start) (4) The third stop by the interrupt processing of the main control board M side It is detected that the sensor for detecting the button operation is turned from OFF to ON → The main control board M side transmits a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side concerned Receiving a command → Displaying the effect of extinguishing the push order (display start) → Turning off the push order display device (5) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side turns the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button from on to off Detected → The main control board M side transmits a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → The display of the push order disappearance effect (start of display) → It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → The push-order display device is turned off (6) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from ON to OFF. → From the main control board M side to the sub control board S side 3 Send command related to detection of stop button → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Push-order disappearance effect display (display start) → Push-order display device goes off (when push-order navigation ends simultaneously) (7 ) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off→the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side The command related to the detection of → the sub-control board S side receives the command → the pressing order disappearance effect is displayed (display starts) and at the same time the pressing order display device is turned off (8) By the interrupt processing of the main control board M side, Detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is switched from ON to OFF → Send a command related to detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side It is possible to specify that the push-order display device is turned off at the same time that the command is received, and the push-order disappearance effect is displayed (display starts).

Further, for example, a display mode of the push-order navigation when the first stop button is pressed and the second stop button is pressed instead of when the third stop button is pressed will be described as a supplement. First, in the push-order display device D270, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on (or from on to off) by interrupt processing on the main control board M side after lighting is started. It remains lit until it is detected and turned off. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the first stop button is pressed (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from off to on (or from on to off) by the interrupt process on the main control board M side). Sending a command related to the detection of the first stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Disappearing the pressing order corresponding to the first stop button The display mode of the effect display (display start) and the push order navigation (for example, “2” display) corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is started to be changed (hereinafter, referred to as “second reel push order navigation display mode”). Also referred to as "change start"). The order in which these are executed is (9) display of the push-order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button (start of display) → start change of the display mode of the second reel push order navigation (10) second reel push order The display mode of the navigation may be changed from start to display of the push-order disappearance effect (display start) corresponding to the first stop button. Further, when the second stop button is operated, similarly, (11) display of the push-order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button (display start)→the third reel push-order navigation Start changing the display mode (12) Start changing the display mode of the third reel push-order navigation → Display the push-order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button (start display) Can be configured.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 105 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). Pressing the stop button causes the effect display device S40 to display (start display) the push-order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button). In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

Then, with the right stop button held down, the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push-order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Structure 3>
Next, the configuration 3 of FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is set to "3" instead of "=3". That is, numerical values are displayed in the right-hand digits of the push-order display device D270 as push-order navigation, and the left-hand digits are hidden. Further, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display a push order navigation display and a display of the acquired number of sheets.

The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the sub control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → The press order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start) To be done. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

After that, while the right stop button is being pressed, the symbol combination related to the push-order bell (the symbol combination that pays out 11 sheets) is stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push-order display device D270. After that, when the right stop button is released, payout for the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is started, and "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11" on the push order display device D270. The acquired number is displayed. After "11" is displayed on the push-order display device D270 (after the acquired number is displayed), the display on the push-order display device D270 is terminated (not displayed). As described above, the push-order display device D270 is configured to be capable of displaying both the push-order navigation and the acquired number display, and the display mode of the push-order navigation display is a numerical value only in the lower digit of the push-order display device D270. In the case where the display combination is displayed, both the push order navigation and the acquired number display are displayed on the push order display device D270 when the symbol combination for paying out the game medals in the instruction game is stopped and displayed. There is a risk that a person may misunderstand the push order navigation or the number of acquired sheets. Therefore, by arranging to display "0" while ending the display of the push order navigation and starting the display of the acquired number, regardless of the payout number related to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1 The player can recognize that the display of the acquired number is started (whether the number is 11 or 11). The value of “0” may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as the push-order navigation.

It should be noted that the end timing of the display of the push-order navigation of the push-order display device D270 is "3rd stop button not pressed (after release)", that is, "3" is displayed (function of the push-order display device) and is displayed as "0". Although it is assumed that the display is switched to (the function of the payout amount display device), the timing of “payout completion based on winning” may be set, for example, when the display of the push order display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the end timing of the press order navigation of the effect display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 precedes the push order navigation of the press order display device D270. You can see that it will end.

As another example, the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", "33" instead of "=3". The displayed push-order navigation will be described in detail. The left digits “1”, “2”, and “3” are associated with the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel on which the stop operation should be performed. There is some (for example, "1" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel M52). The right-hand digit “3” corresponds to the pressing order “middle→left→right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”) displayed on the effect display device S40, as in the above-described configuration. It is a thing. With this configuration, the pressing order navigation is displayed in the order of “23”→“13”→“33”, and the stop button is operated according to the pressing order. At the timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel stop operation should be performed is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation (“33” in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (pressing)→third stop button non-pressing→winning determination→winning prize). Period until the completion of the payout based on), for example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs, which is a game burden on the player. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the number of users.

Further, when the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) ends, the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side. If it is specified to be turned off (release the stop button), stop even if the player holds the final stop button (third stop button) with a sense of expectation for the result of the game It can be configured so that the push-order navigation does not end until the button turns from on to off. Here, if the push order navigation is erased immediately after the stop button is turned from off to on, there is no expectation that the result of the game may not be advantageous to the player. There is a possibility that the event will come off, so by configuring so that the push order navigation does not end until the stop button turns from on to off, it is possible that the result of the game will not be an advantageous result for the player It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce the expectation of the heel.

<Structure 4>
Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 107 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the sub control from the main control board M side A command related to detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display of the push-order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) At the same time, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends. In addition, in the game, a predetermined push order re-game is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player by stopping operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high re-game winning probability) Can be maintained) (for example, if the player wins the “replay-D2”, which is a three-option push-order replay in which the first stop is the highest profit).

Then, with the right stop button held down, the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push-order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, the right stop button is released (by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from on to off) and the symbol combination relating to the re-game. Is displayed in a stopped state, the automatic bet is executed and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. Will be lit).

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 108 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-related state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In the situation where the push order navigation related to 3 stops is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from the off state by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the sub control from the main control board M side The command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start) ) Will be done. In addition, in the game, a predetermined push order re-game is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player by stopping operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high re-game winning probability) Can be maintained) (for example, if the player wins the “replay-D2”, which is a three-option push-order replay in which the first stop is the highest profit).

Then, with the right stop button held down, the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push-order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, the right stop button is released (by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from on to off) and the symbol combination relating to the re-game. Is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 ends.

Thus, for example, in the case of having the configuration 1 of FIG. 104 and the configuration 5 of FIG. 108, etc., in the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, it is distinguished whether the push order bell combination or the push order re-gaming combination. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which even a player without a mark can determine which small winning combination has won by the difference in the end timing of the push-order navigation.

As described above, the pressing order bell as the pressing order combination or the ending timing of the pressing order navigation in the case of the pressing order replay combination has been described. In the effect display device S40, as the timing at which the push-order navigation ends, only the case of “when the third stop button is pressed” has been described as an example, but the timing is not limited to this. As the period when the game ends, if the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button is not pressed → winning determination → payout completion based on winning is completed, the timing to end the push order navigation is arbitrarily determined. Is possible. Further, in the push-order display device D270, as the timing at which the push-order navigation ends, the period in which the push-order navigation ends is different depending on whether the winning combination is the push-order bell or the push-order re-playing combination. ing. As an example of the case where the winning combination is the push order re-gaming combination, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is "when the 1 bet lamp is lit", and the push timing is displayed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211. The end timing of the pushing order navigation of the device D270 changes significantly. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211 is at the start of the next game, the end period of the push-order navigation when the winning combination is the push-order bell is "3rd stop button operation (press)→third". The timing is after "Stop button is not pressed -> Win determination -> Completion of payout based on winning prize", and "3rd stop button operation (press) -> Not press third stop button -> Win determination-Completion of payout based on winning-1 bet lamp When the first bet lamp D211 is turned on and the third stop button is not pressed, the third stop button is operated (pressed)→the third stop button is not pressed→the 1 bet lamp is turned on→win Judgment → Completion of payment based on winning” will be included, and the winning combination will be included within the ending period of the pushing order navigation when the pushing order bell.

Similarly to the timing at which the push-order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing at which the push-order navigation ends is also based on the third stop button operation (pressing) → the third stop button non-pressing → winning determination → winning. In the period of completion of payout, an example of the order in which the push-order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the voice, and the push-order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 are finished is described as follows: (1) Push-order display device→effect display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (2) push order display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (3) push order display device → Sound → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Sound (6) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Performance display device (7) Performance display device→Press order display device→Sound→Reel window frame lamp (8) Performance display device→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp→Sound (9) Performance display device→Sound→Press sequence display device→Reel window frame Lamp (10) Performance display device→Sound→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device (11) Performance display device→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device→Sound (12) Performance display device→Reel window frame lamp→Sound -> push order display device (13) audio -> push order display device -> effect display device -> reel window frame lamp (14) sound -> push order display device -> reel window frame lamp -> effect display device (15) sound -> effect display device -> Press order display device→reel window frame lamp (16) sound→reproduction display device→reel window frame lamp→press order display device (17) sound→reel window frame lamp→press order display device→reproduction display device (18) sound→ Reel window frame lamp→Production display device→Press order display device (19) Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device→Production display device→Sound (20) Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device→Sound→Production display device ( 21) Reel window frame lamp→Production display device→Press order display device→Sound (22) Reel window frame lamp→Production display device→Sound→Press order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp→Sound→Press order display device→ Production display device (24) Reel window frame lamp→Sound→Production display device→Press order display device In this way, the third stop button operation (press)→third stop button non-press→win determination→payment completion based on winning In the period, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push-order navigation ends.

Further, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controls A description will be given of an example of the order in which the push-order navigation in which the push-button navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added is completed. In addition, as the processing up to the end of the pushing order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, it is detected that the sensor for the main control board M to detect the operation of the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF. Transmits a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side by the timer interrupt process → the sub-control board S receives the command → a stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turns off (starts turning off). Further, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is switched from ON to OFF. → The main control board M performs the timer interrupt process to the first stop on the sub control board S side. Send a command related to button operation → Sub-control board S receives the command → Turns off the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button (starts turning off the light) and is provided inside the second stop button The stop button lamp S60 is turned on (lighting is started). (25) Press order display device→Production display device→Voice→Reel window frame lamp→Stop button (third stop button lamp is off) (26) Push order display device→Production display device→Reel window frame lamp→Voice→Stop A button (the third stop button lamp is turned off) or the like can be configured. As the timing of ending the push-order navigation by the stop button D40, like the reel window frame lamp D310 that executes the push-order navigation by turning on and off the lamp, the push-order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the voice, the reel It may be before or after the window frame lamp D310. Further, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game will be progressed based on <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>> and <<configuration related to display end of push-order navigation>> .. Concretely describing an example of the flow of one game from the display of the push order navigation (display start) to the end of the push order navigation,
1. Push order navigation display (display start)
Start lever operation→Display of push order navigation (display start) (push order display device D270)→Display of push order navigation (display start) (effect display device S40)
2. From 1st stop button operation to 2nd stop button operation 2-1. Performance display device S40
Display of the push-order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button (display start)→End of the display of the push-order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button→Change of the display mode of the second reel push-order navigation→ Display (display start) of a push-order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to operation of the second stop button → end of display of push-order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of the second stop button → third reel Change of display mode of push-order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270
The pressing order display device D270 is in a lighted state.
3. 3rd stop button operation-end display of push-order navigation 3rd stop button operation → push-order display device off → display of push-order navigation disappearance effect (display start) corresponding to operation of 3rd stop button → 3rd stop button Completion of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, one game flow proceeds. The example described above is just one example. The display of the push-order navigation (start of display) may include the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, and the like. The timing of the display of the push-order navigation (start of display) and the push order The order of displaying (starting displaying) the navigation is not limited to this. Also, 2. In the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, in the effect display device S40, the display of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to each stop button (display start) and the change of the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel are changed. The order to do is not limited to this. Also, 3. In the third stop button operation to the display end of the push order navigation, the order of display end of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends is more detailed. It may be prescribed (it can be further classified by pressing the third stop button or not pressing the third stop button).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the display device must be viewed at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden on the player that can visually recognize the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. The end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (third stop button operation (pressing)→third stop button not pressing→winning determination→payment completion based on winning) By setting the end time of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices can be different. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the player has to visually check at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs, which reduces the player's game burden and is user-friendly. A game machine can be provided.

<Display mode when pushing order is incorrect>
Here, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, an example of the configuration of the display mode of the push order navigation when the game is executed in the push order (or different operation timing) different from the push order navigation is described in detail. I will describe. Here, an example is shown in which the push order bell is won and the game in which the correct answer push order is “left→middle→right” is executed.

Under the situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button as the first stop operation. It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned on as an interrupt process on the main control board M side by operating (the correct pressing order corresponds to the left stop button) → main control A command relating to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the sub control board S side displays all "123" displayed on the effect display device S40. Perform the process of deleting. It may be configured as described above. As described above, when a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated in the game in which the push-order navigation is executed, all reels (or stop buttons) on the sub-control board S side. While the push order navigation corresponding to is deleted, the main control board M side is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. The push-order navigation on the main control board M side (the push-order navigation by the push-order display device D270) is for detecting the operation of the third stop button during the third stop operation (interruption processing on the main control board M side). It is configured to erase when it detects that the sensor has been switched from on to off.

<<Configuration related to reel control and push-order navigation>>
Next, a configuration relating to reel stop control and push-order navigation display control (effect display device S40) will be described. In addition, in the game, if a predetermined push order bell is won, and it becomes the most advantageous to the player (the payout number is large) by performing the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (for example, “Winning-A3”).

<Structure 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, the instruction game relating to the push order bell is executed in the AT state, and “213” is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the middle reel middle row is at the position where the 11th replay symbol is positioned, and the display corresponding to the middle reel press order navigation “1” changes to the press order navigation disappearance effect. The middle reel stop button remains pressed. In addition, the middle reel is controlled to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination that pays out 11 sheets, which is the maximum number of coins to be obtained, by performing the stop operation of the middle reel, which is the correct pressing order. In this example, the 15th bell stops at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. That is, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, the slide of the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is generated from the 11th replay A and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The control is performed so as to

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor until the reel is stopped after the stop operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <image of reel rotation speed> transits to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position at which the stop operation is performed and the position of the symbol forming the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is calculated, and a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms) In, by determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols forming the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game on the pay line, configure the symbol combination related to the condition device selected in the game Continue the rotation so that the symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game approach the winning line, the reel deceleration state of (6) is transitioned to, and the reel stop state of (7) is controlled to transition. To do.

After that, in the effect display device S40, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 109, the effect of disappearing the push order navigation of the middle reel is erased (display ends), and the middle reel stops and displays the 15th bell on the winning line. Therefore, the sliding control is continued. The middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as in the lower left stage of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes to a display mode in which the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is highlighted. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be stopped (the number is changed greatly, the number is moved, the number is illuminated, etc.). ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues the sliding control to stop and display the 15th bell on the pay line. The middle reel stop button is being pressed. It should be noted that the timing for changing to the display mode in which the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next is highlighted may be before the push-order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end), or may be changed. It may be after the navi disappearing effect is erased (display end) or at the same time as the push-order navi disappearing effect is erased (display end).

After that, after the depressed state of the middle stop button continues for a predetermined time, the 15th bell of the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the pay line. The predetermined time here is a time (for example, 190 ms) during which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. As described above, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the push-order navigation, the stop operation is performed before the reel on which the stop operation is performed is stopped and displayed (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured such that the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the process is performed can be erased and the display mode of the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next can be changed.

Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at a position where sliding of the maximum number of frames occurs has been described. When the stop operation is performed at the position, the timing for changing the display mode in which the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is highlighted is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Even in the case of 0 frame check, a display mode is displayed in which the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed is highlighted before the timing when the operation of the next stop button becomes effective. It is configured to change. With such a configuration, even in the case of 0 frame scan, the stop button is operated after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, and the player mistakenly presses the stop sequence to stop. Can be prevented. Further, it is more preferable that the timing of changing the display mode in which the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is highlighted is earlier, and the timing should be as early as possible even in the case of 0 coma. Is preferred.

In addition, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but the present invention can be applied to not only the push order bell but also all condition devices that generate a push order navigation. Further, as the effect means for notifying the pressing order, lighting by the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, when the push-order navigation using the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 or the speaker S20 is included, the display mode of the push-order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed on the effect display device S40. To execute the push-order navigation corresponding to the next reel (in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is lit, and in the case of voice, the dialogue corresponding to the next reel is output as voice). It is possible to configure.

In addition, as the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push-order navigation>> in the present example, the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40 is described as an example of the production means that executes the push-order navigation, For example, the reel window frame lamp D310, the voice, and the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) may be configured to include a push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside. Good. The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (blinking) and extinguishing the reel window frame lamp, and the push order navigation by voice is "left", "right", "medium" from the speaker S20. Is executed by outputting the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) provided inside the stop button lamp S60, and the pressing order navigation is the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off D41.

For example, the reel window frame lamp D310, the voice, and the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) are added to the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push-order navigation>> in this example. ) Is included, (1) reel window frame lamp D310 (1-1) extinguishing the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed (1-2) the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next Lighting of the lamp corresponding to (2) Sound (2-1) Output of sound corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (3) Stop button D40 (3-1) On the reel on which the stop operation is performed Turning off the corresponding lamp (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (4) Performance display device S40 (4-1) Pushing order corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed Disappearance effect is displayed (display end) (4-2) The display mode is changed to highlight the push-order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next. The configuration can be defined. Any order may be set as the order of executing these configurations (1-1) to (4-2). For example, the order of execution may be determined for each effect means (as an example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp→sound→stop button→effect display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel. Alternatively (as an example, the processing is performed in the order of the processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is performed→the processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next), or may be configured by combining these.

In addition, in the present example, the <<configuration related to reel control and push-order navigation>> is described with reference to FIG. 109. In FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is described as an example. The configuration to which this example is applicable is not limited to the first stop operation. For example, when the second stop operation is performed, even when the third stop operation is performed, it is applicable. At the time of the third stop operation, a process corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (for example, a change to the "display mode for highlighting the push-order navigation in the effect display device S40", a reel window frame lamp) The process of "lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next" in D310) is not executed.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, even when the stop button is operated according to the push-order navigation and the stop corresponding to the reel corresponding to the stop button executes the stop control accompanied by the slip of the maximum number of frames, in the effect display device S40. End of push-order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from start to end of disappearance effect display), and change in display mode of push-order navigation display corresponding to stop button to be stopped next (start of highlighting) Can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, so it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop button before recognizing the stop button to be stopped next. ..

<<<<<<Third Embodiment: Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor>>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of the process of adding the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medal, and passes a predetermined passage condition (the passing game medal satisfies the standard, If the error is not determined (for example, it is not determined to be an error), the game medal flows down through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without an error. Then, the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided further behind the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and the game medals that have been accepted by satisfying the dimensional standards are the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. When passing, if it is determined that the game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal, and credit can be added. When the game medal passes, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and a signal thereof (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s is Information on time from turning on to turning off, information on timing when the second closing sensor D20s is turned on, information on time from turning on the second closing sensor D20s to turning off, etc.) It is adapted to be supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credit can be added can be determined by the on/off state of each of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s.

<<<Third Embodiment Timing Chart for Detecting Game Medals by Insertion Sensor>>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (OFF→ON) at the timing 1 in the figure. Next, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage (OFF→ON) of the game medal at the timing 2 in the figure. The time information and the like relating to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signals. Subsequently, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s ends the detection of the game medal (ON→OFF) at the timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s to the end of the detection of the game medal is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4 ms≦A<183 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. Further, the time B from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the end of the detection by the first insertion sensor D20s is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2 ms≦B< 115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. After that, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s ends (ON→OFF) the detection of the game medal at the timing 4 in the figure. The time C from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the end of the detection by the second insertion sensor D20s is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4 ms≦C<183 ms). If so, it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. In this way, it is determined whether the game medal normally passes through the medal selector DS at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off. The game medals inserted at any timing when the D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off are detected as bet medals, and credits are added.

<<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>>
<<Configuration 1>>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of a timing at which the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credit is added will be described in detail. 111 to 112 are flowcharts that reflect the processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing according to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credits are added when the insertion process is normally executed for the inserted game medals. In the flowchart of FIG. 111, the description of the same content as that of FIG. 17 is omitted (steps 1220 to 1225, and step 1232 and subsequent steps). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226-1 (fourth), in step 1224-2 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is on and the second closing sensor D30s is off. It is determined whether or not (the image diagram in the upper middle part of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off→on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). If Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226-3 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is on and the second closing sensor D30s is on. Judgment (image diagram in the upper right part of FIG. 113: the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). If Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), in step 1226-6 (fourth) the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on. Judgment (image diagram in the lower left part of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on→off when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), in step 1226-8 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted, and the credit addition processing is performed. Done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is off (the image diagram in the middle and lower stages of FIG. 113). The second insertion sensor D30s is turned on→off at the timing when the medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that the insertion of one normal game medal is completed, and, for example, when the bet number satisfies the specified number, the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. Processing such as setting is performed, and the process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging sensor D30s is on. Conventionally, the credit addition process is executed at the timing of “the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging sensor D30s is on→the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging sensor D30s is off”. However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but an error occurs at this timing. If so, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is executed. It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even if the credit addition process is not executed in time.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, a position closer to the medal slot 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s is not executed. It is also possible to prevent a goto act (for example, Clemangoto) from being performed by the first input sensor D20s provided in the game machine, provide an illegally strong game machine, and eventually provide a user-friendly game machine.

<<<3rd Embodiment Subroutine due to input sensor error>>>
In addition, in the case of No in step 1226-3 (fourth), step 1226-6 (fourth), step 1226-9 (fourth), step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth) The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in step 1226-10 (fourth) whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error occurrence condition is satisfied. It should be noted that, as the medal insertion error here, for example, there is an insertion medal backflow error, an insertion number error, an insertion medal retention error, etc. Based on the above, it is determined whether any of the errors has occurred (the generation condition differs depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on the detection of on/off of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s in FIG. If Yes in any of Step 1226-4 (4th), Step 1226-7 (4th), and Step 1226-10 (4th), the medal insertion error processing is executed in Step 1226-5 (4th). To be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command (to the sub side). Command (which is a command relating to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1226-14 (fourth). Incidentally, in 1226-13 (fourth), the information related to the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub control board side. The error undetected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). It is not necessary to execute the information setting process. Although error processing will be executed according to the type of error that occurred, the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from the state where no error has occurred. Even if the setting process is executed when the type of error is changed from the state in which the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred to the second error (for example, payout medal retention error) Good. In Step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently occurring error has been canceled. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the error flag currently occurring is turned off in step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of the error detection based on the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been described. It is possible to detect an error based on the detection of the game medal by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s provided in the vicinity, and an example of the error detection based on the detection of the game medal of the insertion acceptance sensor D10s will be described below. ..

<<<Detection of Error Based on Third Embodiment Third Embodiment Monitoring Counter>>>
<<Configuration 2>>
An insertion acceptance sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the size, and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard size, and it is determined that they are not compatible by this function. The formed medals (or other foreign matter) are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that the matched game medal has passed, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is changed from OFF to ON, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. When the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M adds 0→1 by a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an insertion monitoring counter) that counts passage of game medals. Then, the main control board M monitors the insertion of a game medal at a timing (corresponding to a timing of 4 in FIG. 110) at which the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on and off, for example, when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS. The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, in the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, if any problem occurs regarding the insertion of the game medal, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be normally performed. .. For example, when the second throw-in sensor D30s is not turned on and the subtraction process of the throw-in monitor counter is not performed and the throw-in monitor counter continues to be incremented, the throw-in medal retention error can be detected. In addition, when the second closing sensor D30s is turned on from before the closing acceptance sensor D10s and the subtraction processing of the closing monitoring counter is performed before the closing monitoring counter becomes negative, It is possible to detect a throwback medal backflow error.

<Effect>
As described above, the configuration is made such that the error determination can be performed based on the detection of the game medal by the three sensors of the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. It is possible to reliably detect various errors, and it is possible to provide an illegally strong gaming machine, which in turn can provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<Third Embodiment Output of Medal Insertion Sound>>>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after detecting the inserted game medal as the bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging sensor D30s is on has been described, but the first charging sensor D20s is off and the second charging is performed. An error may occur when the sensor D30s is turned on (for example, an inserted medal retention error due to an abnormally long time of the second insertion sensor D30s being on). In the third embodiment, the credit addition processing is executed at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on. Therefore, for example, it is assumed that an error occurs after executing the credit addition processing. It In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition processing and the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described in particular.

<<Configuration 3>>
First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. More specifically, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, it is 68 ms when the upper limit value of B, 115 ms, is subtracted from the upper limit value of 183 ms for the period C. That is, during this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M "medal insertion acceptance→set a command related to medal insertion acceptance→transmit a command to the sub-control board side→set an error detection command (when there is an error)" By executing the processing as described above, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<Configuration 4>>
As a modification of the timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPU C100 of the main control board M processes "set a command relating to medal insertion acceptance→execute credit addition processing→transmit a command to the sub control board side→set an error detection command (when there is an error)" You may go.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the medal insertion is accepted at the timing of "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on→the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on". This process is executed, and the timer interrupt process thereafter causes the main control board M side to transmit a medal insertion acceptance command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side outputs a medal insertion sound. .. On the other hand, when the state of “the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on” continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, after the medal insertion sound is already output, the insertion medal is inserted. In order to determine that a retention error has occurred (because the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), the player outputs an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error. It is possible to confirm the sound of inserting medals before, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is anxious that the game medals are not normally inserted and the game medals are lost due to the inserted medals retention error.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, at timing B, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. Although it is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the credit addition processing until the error is detected in the second loading sensor D30s, the CPUC100 of the main control board M intentionally operates during this period. The command related to the medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub-control board side. After that, after setting the error detection command by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, the command related to the medal insertion reception is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes “credit addition processing→detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→transmits an error detection command to the sub-control board side→sets a command relating to medal insertion acceptance→sub-control By transmitting the command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the board side", the medal insertion sound is generated after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable that the command related to the medal insertion acceptance be transmitted to the sub side by a timer interrupt process different from that when the error detection command is transmitted.

<<Configuration 6>>
As a modified example of the timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M “detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→transmits an error detection command to the sub-control board side→sets a command relating to medal insertion acceptance→executes credit addition processing→sub-control It is also possible to perform a process of "sending a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the board side".

<Effect>
With this configuration, at the timing of "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on", the insertion medal is first. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the state in which the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is transmitted and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. Then, after the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is executed, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. Becomes When the state of “the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on” continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, an insertion medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. In order to determine that (the state in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), the player has an error relating to the insertion medal retention error before outputting the medal insertion sound. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can immediately recognize that the game medal has not been normally inserted.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, at timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s and after the error is released. Although it is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time when the credit addition process is performed until the error is detected by the second loading sensor D30s, the CPUC100 of the main control board M intentionally operates during this period. The fact that the command relating to the medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub control board side is the same as the second timing, but after the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the insertion error flag in step 1226-15. In addition, the command relating to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes “credit addition processing→detect error flag→set error detection command→send error detection command to sub-control board side→... (error cancellation processing during this time).・・→ Set error undetected command → Send error undetected command to sub control board → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Send command related to medal insertion reception to sub control board side By executing the configuration, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound after canceling the error.

<<Configuration 8>>
As a modification of the timing C, the timing of the credit addition processing may be different. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M “detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→transmits an error detection command to the sub-control board side→... (error cancellation processing during this time)...→error not detected Set command → Send error undetected command to sub-control board side → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Execute credit addition processing → Send command related to medal insertion reception to sub-control board side Good.

<Effect>
With this configuration, at the timing of "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on", the insertion medal is first. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the state in which the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is transmitted and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After the error is resolved, an error undetected command is transmitted to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is ended. After the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is executed, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. Becomes When the state of “the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on” continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, an insertion medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. It is determined that (the state in which the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), the error is further resolved, and the output of the error sound is ended. The player can confirm the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error before outputting the medal insertion sound, and can also confirm the medal insertion sound after the error is resolved, so that the player normally operates after the error is resolved. It can be recognized that a game medal has been inserted.

<<<Third Embodiment: Medal Error Detection by Shooting Sensor>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, detection of an error using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows a flow path member (referred to as a chute body in the third embodiment) of the medal after passing the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS. It is a figure. In FIG. 114, a chute sensor D40s is provided below the first charging sensor D20s and the second charging sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s is a normal medal insertion similar to the first charging sensor D20s and the second charging sensor D30s. In particular, the third embodiment is configured to be able to detect an error (for example, inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) after the credit addition process has already been executed. ing.

The error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. For example, consider a case where game medals are accumulated further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the route of the game medals in the chute body is about the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the route of the game medals in the chute body, the game medals passing through the route one after another. And the inserted medal retention error occurs. In the third embodiment, the position for three game medals from the position where the game medals are accumulated is the position detected by the shoot sensor D40s, but the position provided with the shoot sensor D40s is not limited to this.

The detection of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is detected by the shoot sensor D40s when the game medal passes, similarly to the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal (shoot sensor D40s). Is turned on, information on the time from when the shoot sensor D40s is turned on to when the shoot sensor D40s is turned off) is supplied to the main control board M. On the main control board M, the game medals are normally inserted based on the information related to the signal detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the information related to the signals detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. To determine. Specifically, a period from the timing when the main control board M starts the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts the detection of the game medal, A predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as a theoretical period, which is a time to be detected by the shoot sensor D40s) is compared. For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s. Is detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the theoretical period are compared, and when the difference between the periods exceeds a range in which an error is not detected, an error (shoot sensor medal in the third embodiment) is detected. (Accumulation error) will be detected. The timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s detects a game medal, the timing at which the second insertion sensor D30s starts detecting a game medal, or the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s ends the detection of a game medal, the second insertion sensor Any of the timings when the D30s finishes detecting the game medals may be set as the theoretical timing start timing.

<<Third Embodiment Timing Chart of Game Medal Detection by Shooting Sensor>>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (OFF→ON) at the timing 1 in the figure. Next, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage (OFF→ON) of the game medal at the timing 2 in the figure. The time information and the like relating to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signals. After that, it is assumed that the shoot sensor D40s detects the passage of the game medal (OFF→ON) at the timing 3 in the figure. A period D from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects a game medal to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detection, and a period when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detection. E is calculated by the main control board M, and these periods are used as theoretical periods to judge whether or not the game medal based on the detection of the shoot sensor D40s normally passes through the shoot main body. Further, by providing the shoot sensor D40s, it is possible to detect an error that may occur after it is determined that the game medal has normally passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, an error (shoot sensor medal retention error) related to passage of a game medal near the shoot sensor D40s is detected, and the player is informed that an error has occurred. Is possible. Further, the normal passage of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is determined based on the information relating to the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s start detecting the game medal, and therefore the first insertion. Although the passage of the game medal is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, when the passage of the game medal is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, that is, the error related to the insertion medal backflow can be surely detected. This makes it possible to provide an illegally strong gaming machine, which in turn can provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<<<< Fourth Embodiment Medal Returning Member>>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 through which the game medals pass when the game medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 or returned to the medal receiving tray D230 will be described. ..

First, FIGS. 116 to 119 for describing the medal returning member D340 according to the fourth embodiment in detail will be described. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal returning member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal returning member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving port D341 (described later), and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 shows the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117.

<<<Fourth Embodiment Front View of Medal Returning Member>>>>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal returning member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, a game medal (a blocker in an off state in which the addition process to the bet or the credit is not executed by the medal selector DS which detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and performs a simple authentication. At the time of returning the game medals that have reached the blocker to the medal tray D230, the game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path) and are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the second flow path), and finally the game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230.

The medal return member D340 passes the first flow path through which the improper game medal detected by the medal selector DS is returned when returning to the medal tray D230, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 passes. The game medals passing through the two flow paths are merged when passing through the medal returning member D340 and flowing down toward the medal tray D230. It is configured.

The second flow path in the medal returning member D340 is at least a medal receiving port D341 for receiving the game medals paid out from the hopper H40, and a medal drop surface D342 on which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. Is configured to have. Further, a medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal dropping surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving port, and a medal dropping surface D342 on which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have a space surrounded by, and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are configured to pass through this space.

The medal receiving port D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving port D341 is opened, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 can surely pass through the medal receiving port D341. Further, in particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as an edge portion (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer peripheral portion in the shape of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as an edge portion). ). In the regulation of the length and distance of the medal receiving port D341, any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving port D341 is set as a starting point.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the medal dropping surface D342 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape, and the medal non-falling surface D343, which faces the medal dropping surface D342, is also formed in a substantially quadrangular shape. However, the shapes of the medal falling surface D342 and the medal non-falling surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving port D341 is provided in an inclined shape in the lower right direction, and the game medals that collide with the collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116 fall. It is configured to incline substantially parallel to the medal falling surface D342. With this configuration, the game medals that have been paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and dropped on the medal falling surface D342 slide down from the medal falling surface D342 by gravity, and reliably guide the game medals to the medal receiving tray D230. It becomes possible to do. The direction in which the medal receiving port D341 and the medal dropping surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal receiving port D341 and the medal dropping surface D342 may be configured not to be inclined. The incorrect medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to drop in the direction of the medal tray D230 from above when viewed from the player in the direction orthogonal to the tilt direction of the medal receiving port D341. ..

<<<4th embodiment Side view of medal returning member Locus diagram of game medal flowing down (perspective view)>>
Next, dimensional regulations in the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal returning member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 is provided. First, in the game medal, the thickness and the diameter are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). The thickness a of the game medal is preferably about 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and the diameter b of the game medal is preferably about 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. is there.

Next, after being paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 on which the game medals fall to the edge of the medal receiving port D341 is c, and the medal non-falling surface D343 is vertical. The maximum distance from the medal non-falling surface D342 to the edge of the medal receiving opening in the direction is d, and at the edge of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341, at least one of the bottom side or the height direction (for example, In the fourth embodiment, the length of the substantially rectangular shape of the medal receiving port D341 in the height direction of the opening) is e, and the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341 is e. The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are set for the dimensions thus defined. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions,
c≧a... Formula (1)
b>d... Formula (2)
f≧2b...Equation (3)
b>e... Formula (4)
In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game medal can be applied to both 25Φ size and 30Φ size.

First, by satisfying the expressions (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other. The distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving port 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal paying-out device H goes from the medal receiving port D341 to the collision part. Since the game medal has a sufficient distance until it collides, the game medal weight falls freely, and when the game medal colliding with the collision part falls on the medal falling surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping). (State), the collision can be prevented because the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are out of the area through which the game medals pass.

Next, by satisfying the formula (4), the first game medal (whether the game medal is sleeping or standing) paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, and then It is possible to prevent the game medals paid out from the medals payout device H of the hopper H40 from blocking the medal receiving port D341. Is.

Next, by satisfying the formula (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the inward direction of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and one piece colliding with the collision part It is possible to prevent the eye game medal from bouncing up to the medal receiving port D341.

By stipulating dimensions in the configuration of the medal returning member D340 as in the formulas (1) to (4), smooth payout of game medals from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and smooth medal of game medals. It is possible to guide to the saucer D230. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving opening D341, and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of performing the size regulation of the formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game paid out thereafter. It is possible to configure so that the medals do not collide with each other and that the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving port D341.

As shown in FIG. 117, in this example, a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving port D341 on the outer side of the medal returning member D340. It may be configured to provide a protruding edge portion on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the situation where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide with the collision part and then flow back to the medal receiving port D341.

<<<Fourth Embodiment Trajectory Diagram (Side View)>
In FIG. 118, the trajectory of the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 shows the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is discharged from the medal receiving port D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is discharged from the medal receiving slot D341 like the first game medal, and the first game medal is provided in the front view direction of FIG. It collides with a collision unit (not shown). The interval from the first game medal is ejected from the medal receiving slot D341 to the second game medal is ejected can be determined by the rotation speed of the disc H50 of the medal payout device H. Although the rotation speed can be arbitrarily determined, as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, the second game medal is the medal after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. The payout device H is paid out. However, the timing when the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) at substantially the same time as the timing when the first game medal collides with the collision part. 2) The timing may be before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision section, or (3) after the first game medal collides with the collision section. The distance f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted in accordance with the timing at which the eye game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. Regarding the above item (2), after the first game medal has been paid out from the medal payout device H and passed through the medal receiving port D341, the game medal has advanced in the horizontal direction over the diameter (b) of the game medal. It is preferable that the timing is after (fired). Further, the timing when the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is such that the timing after the time when the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H has elapsed is one The possibility that the second game medal and the second game medal collide can be reduced. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is set to be too long, the payout time of the game medal becomes too long, and the tempo for paying out the game medal becomes too long. It gets worse. Further, since the size (depth) inside the housing of the gaming machine is limited, the above-mentioned f (the maximum length of the medal drop surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to secure a distance or more. For the above reasons, it is most preferable to set the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H to the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second collision medal after colliding with the collision portion. It should be noted that it is desirable that the game medals to be paid out after the third one do not collide with each other, and at least up to the maximum designed payout number (for example, 15) in the gaming machine has been paid out. It is preferable that the game medals do not collide with each other. In addition, in the collision part, in order to improve the durability of the medal return member D340 due to the collision of the game medals, it may be protected by, for example, metal.

Next, as shown in the lower left stage, after the first game medal collides with the collision portion, it drops onto the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads for the collision area as with the first game medal. At this time, by being configured as in the formula (1), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other. Next, as shown in the lower right, the first game medal dropped on the medal falling surface D342 is tilted in the tilt direction of the medal falling surface D342 by gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal receiving tray D230. Is induced. After colliding with the collision portion, the second game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the inclination direction of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal collide with each other. It is possible to prevent a backflow in which a medal colliding with the collision part and rebounding enters the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 1>>
The second game medal is ejected from the medal receiving port D341 toward the collision part, and the first game medal collides with the collision part and then drops onto the medal falling surface D342. At this time, the formulas (1) and (3) are satisfied, in other words, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving port 341 is larger than the thickness a of the game medal. In addition, since the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H have a sufficient distance from the medal receiving port D341 until they collide with the collision part, they freely fall by the weight of the game medals. When the game medal colliding with the collision part falls on the medal falling surface D342 (the state where the game medal is sleeping), the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the area through which the game medal passes. Therefore, the collision can be prevented.

<<Effect 2>>
For example, by being configured as in the formulas (2) and (4), it is possible to prevent a backflow in which a medal colliding with the collision part and bouncing back enters the opening of the medal receiving port D341. Can be provided.

<<Effect 3>>
For example, by being configured as in the formula (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the inward direction of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the collision part 1 collides. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which it is possible to prevent the second game medal from bouncing up to the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 4>>
The first game medal dropped on the medal falling surface D342 drops from the medal falling surface D342 and flows down toward the medal receiving plate D230, and the second game medal is the lower left diagram of FIG. 119. As described above, the first game medal drops on the medal drop surface D342 at substantially the same position as the position at which the game medal dropped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 due to the retention in the vicinity of the medal receiving opening D341. A game machine can be provided.

<<Effect 5>>
A game machine capable of preventing damage and deterioration of the medal return member D340 because it has a cushioning material for cushioning a collision part where a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H with speed collides. can do.

<<Effect 6>>
The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision part and lose the momentum at the time of the initial payout, thereby causing a collision between the game medals (the game medal returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40). A collision with a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H, a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, or the like) occurs, and the game medal flows down to the medal tray D230 that is not rhythmical. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine.

<<<<Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Dispensing Device>>>>
<<<Fifth Embodiment Timing Chart of Drive Control of Medal Dispensing Device>>>
Next, drive control of the medal payout device H will be described as a fifth embodiment. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to the detection of the hopper motor H80, which is driven when the game medals are paid out from the medal payout device H, and the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s. First, in the hopper motor H80, the hopper drive flag when the hopper motor H80 is driven is on. When the game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are discharged and biased by the means H70. The game medals are paid out by displacing and flowing down from the game medal exit H60 toward the discharge opening D240. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are detected to be on or off based on, for example, the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. Specifically, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the first payout sensor H10s is turned on in a state where the discharge biasing means H70 is not displaced to the position where the game medals are paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). The signal indicating that the state is the state is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the discharge urging means H70 starts to be displaced to the position where the game medals are paid out, and the discharge urging means H70 starts moving from the initial position, so that the signal indicating that the first payout sensor H10s is in the off state is mainly controlled. Transmit to substrate M. A signal indicating that the second payout sensor H10s is in the ON state when the discharge urging means H70 is displaced to the position for paying out the game medal (referred to as the payout position in the fifth embodiment) at the timing 2 in the figure. To the main control board M. Then, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medals is completed, and the discharge urging means H70 starts to be displaced to the initial position again, so that the main control of the signal indicating that the second payout sensor H10s is in the off state. Transmit to substrate M. Then, at a timing 4 in the figure, the discharge urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again, and thereby a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H10s is in the ON state is transmitted to the main control board M. In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from timing 1 to timing 2 is a predetermined range A (A<26 ms), and the period from timing 2 to timing 3 is a predetermined range B (9 ms≦). B<60 ms), and the medal payout device H is functioning normally by detecting that the period from the timing 3 to the timing 4 is within the predetermined range C (9 ms≦C<60). It is determined that such game medals will be paid out.

<<<<Fifth Embodiment Medal Dispensing Device-Medal Dispensing Device Stop>>>
<< composition >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a series of flows from the start of the medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described. First, referring to FIG. 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation of the series of steps from the payout of game medals to the stop of the medal payout device H, medals unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment. The configuration related to the dispensing device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of a disk H50 that is rotationally driven when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disc H50 has a plurality of circular cavities having a size larger than that of the game medal, and the disc H50 is configured to cover and overlap the game medal. The game medal is placed under the disc H50 by the rotation of the disc H50. By moving, the game medals are paid out from the outlet D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is not driven and the first payout sensor H10s is on. This state is the initial position in the discharge biasing means H70 in the fifth embodiment, and for the sake of clarity of explanation, the initial position before rotation of the disk H50 (disk H50) is provided on the outer periphery of the disk H50. To do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotation direction of the disc H50 each time a game medal is paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and further description will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper diagram of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed and the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, at the initial position (disk H50), it can be seen that the third game medal has rotated by the angle A from the position at which the game medal was paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disc H50 rotates by the angle A until the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position. Further, the disk H50 does not rotate until the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left part of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed and the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position after paying out the fourth game medal, but during this period, the disc H50 is not rotating, so that the fourth game medal. It can be seen that, as with the case of paying out, the angle A is rotated from the position where the fourth game medal is paid out.

Then, as shown in the lower right stage, after the fifth game medal has been paid out, the driving of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the payout of the game medal is completed. After turning off the drive of the hopper motor H80, the rotation of the disc H50 is stopped, but the initial position (disc H50) is a position displaced in the rotational direction by an angle B from the position at which the fifth game medal is paid out. Stop. The reason for configuring in this way is that, especially when paying out the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not necessarily enter the constant speed state immediately after the start of driving, but it takes a predetermined time to reach the constant speed state. It costs. In other words, when the discharge urging means H70 is in the initial position when paying out the first medal (the hopper motor H80 is in the accelerated state to the constant speed state), the second and subsequent sheets (the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state) Compared with the case of paying out the game medal of, the hopper motor H80 is delayed by the acceleration state.

Here, the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped and the first game medal is paid out will be described in detail. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 goes from the stopped state to the constant speed state via the acceleration state. Here, the rotation speed in the constant speed state is A (m/t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from the speed 0 to the constant speed A, and the average rotation speed in the period from the speed 0 to the constant speed (the period in the acceleration state) is B(m/t ), B<A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m/t) from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is B<C<A.

Next, from the payout of the first game medal to the payout of the second game medal will be described in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state at the time when the first game medal is paid out, it is in the constant speed state until the second game medal is paid out after the first game medal is paid out. Will remain. Therefore, the average rotation speed from the payout of the first game medal to the payout of the second game medal is A.

As described above, the second game after the first game medal is paid out from the average rotation speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped to the time when the first game medal is paid out. Since the average rotation speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medals are paid out, and the first game If the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the payout of the medal to the payout of the second game medal is the same, the first game from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped The time required until the medal is paid out is longer than the time required from the payout of the first game medal to the payout of the second game medal.

As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the last game medal (the fifth game medal in the figure) is paid out as the game medal payout process, the disc H50 is moved to a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, it is arranged so that it shifts by an angle B) in the rotation direction and stops (the rotation distance increases). With this configuration, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped to the time when the first game medal is paid out is set to be two cards after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates before the third game medal is paid out (the same distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time when the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out). ), the time required from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is the second game after the first game medal is paid out. It becomes possible to approximate (approximate) the time required until the medals are paid out, and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort.

The width of deviation (angle B) in the rotation direction when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state by the driving of the hopper motor H80. Therefore, during this period, by taking into consideration the difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 that rotates in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 that rotates in the constant speed state, the ejection biasing means H70 releases the disc H50 after driving the hopper motor H80. How much the rotation from the initial position in the rotating direction is stopped is determined. The difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the acceleration state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state corresponds to the position from the position corresponding to the initial position of the discharge biasing means H70 of the hopper motor H80 to the dispensing position of the discharge biasing means H70. The angle B is preferably sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width up to the position. Even if the rotational direction is deviated by the angle B, the game payout detection by the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s is not affected, and the timing chart of FIG. Based on this, the game medals are detected.

<<Effect>>
With this configuration, when a player who receives a payout of game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the player can receive the payout of game medals from the first to the predetermined number at substantially regular intervals. Yes, for example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) the game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) the medal clogging due to the collision of the game medals does not occur. It can be configured, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

In addition, after the last game medal is paid out, the disc H50 is configured to be deviated in the rotational direction by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) and stopped, so that the illegal device is ejected from the ejection port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is illegally acquired by invading.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Control when communication between main control board and sub-control board is disabled>>>>
Next, as a sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled will be described. As a case where the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side cannot be transmitted. There is. The main control board M, for example, in the game progress control processing of FIG. 16 or the like, based on the progress status of the game, various commands related to the game are transmitted to the sub control board side, and as in step 1622 of FIG. As the processing related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side with a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set) as a cycle. Is configured to send. The sub control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute an effect based on the commands. Communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub control board S can receive a command from the main control board M, but the main control board side It is configured so that it is impossible to send a command to. The gaming machine has a program relating to execution processing on each of the main control board M and the sub control board S (the program of the main control board M is called a main side program, and the program of the sub control board S is called a sub side program). Thus, for example, the sub-control board S is configured with a sub-side program so as to execute an effect by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. That is, under the condition that the command cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub control board S cannot execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. As a case where the sub-control board S cannot receive a command from the main control board M, for example, a member due to a contact failure of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub-control board S There may be a problem. However, even when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled, the main side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game can be executed. The game itself related to the main program is configured to be executable even when communication with the sub control board S is disabled. Further, when communication is restored between the main control board M and the sub control board S from the situation where the main control board M and the sub control board S cannot communicate with each other, the progress of the program on the main side is changed. Based on this, the command related to the processing after the communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the processing after the communication received from the main control board M is restored. The process is executed based on. In the following, in the case where communication with the sub control board S is disabled while various commands are being executed by the main control board M with reference to FIGS. An example of processing performed on the control board S will be described as a sixth embodiment.

<<<Sixth Embodiment When the processing command and the channel are one-to-one with each other when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during execution of the processing related to settlement>>>
FIG. 122 shows a time-series process flow as an example of the process in the case where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled during execution of the process related to settlement. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games starting from the Nth game and the processing is performed over the N+1th game. Then, in the sixth embodiment, as a process performed by the main control board M, in particular, a command based on the progress of the game is transmitted to the sub control board S, and received as a process performed by the sub control board S from the main control board M. Executing the effect based on the command is set as one set (one order in the sixth embodiment). The sub control board S does not execute the effect based on all the commands received from the main control board M, and may execute the effect based on the received command or may not execute the effect. is there. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub control board S exemplifies that an effect is executed for each command transmitted by the main control board M. However, when an effect is executed based on the reception of each command. In addition, there is a case in which the production is not executed in some cases. When the settlement button is operated and the settlement of credits is performed in the situation where one or more credits are present, the speaker S20 outputs the settlement sound corresponding to the settlement of the game medal from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel for outputting the sound being settled is the channel corresponding to only the sound being settled. For example, the sub-control board S executes the effect based on the command received from the main control board M. Particularly, when executing the process of outputting the sound from the speaker S20, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M. The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. That is, the voice is output from the speaker S20 from the voice channel corresponding to the received command. Incidentally, the command and the voice channel do not have to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to start of settlement and a plurality of commands related to detection of a predetermined error) may be associated with one audio channel. With this configuration, even when the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to output audio without increasing the number of channels.

<<Configuration 1>>
122 will be described in detail. First, as the processing sequence 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs the sound of settlement from the speaker S20. <<Sixth embodiment Processing command when communication between main control board and sub-control board is disconnected during execution of processing related to settlement and case of one-to-one channel>> is a sound for outputting the sound during settlement. It is assumed that the channel supports only the command related to the start of settlement and does not support other commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off while the sub control board S is outputting the sound of the settlement. At this time, for example, when the communication is disconnected, the electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S such as a connection failure of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. The case in which the specific communication is disconnected is not limited to this. It may be any case as long as electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound during the settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of the game medals corresponding to the number of credits is completed. By making a determination, the command related to the end of the settlement is transmitted to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M to output the sound during the settlement. Perform the process to end.

In order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the end of the adjustment to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M does the adjustment. It is not possible to send the command relating to the end of the sub-control board S to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound during settlement is not ended but the output of the sound during settlement is continued. Incidentally, while the main control board M executes the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and judges that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the main control board M and the sub-control are executed. The communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. .. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to the settlement has ended, and the N-th game Set the command related to the next process.

As the order 3, by determining that the Nth game has started and a game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M outputs the command related to the end of the settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of the adjustment from the main control board M. Because it is not possible, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the start lever operation has ended, and sets the command relating to the next processing of the Nth game.

In order 5, by determining that the rotation of the reel has started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits the command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the start of reel rotation has ended, and sets the command relating to the next processing of the Nth game.

As the order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is, among the plurality of reels, the reel on which the player first performs the stop operation) is accepted, the main control board M determines the first reel. A command related to acceptance of the stop operation is transmitted to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation reception based on the reception of the command related to the first reel stop operation reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M calculates Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is not ended and the output of the sound being settled is continued. The main control board M determines that the process related to the first reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As the order 7, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel (the second reel is the reel among the plurality of reels for which the player performs the stop operation second) is accepted, the main control board M Sends a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation reception based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M calculates Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is not ended and the output of the sound being settled is continued. The main control board M determines that the process related to the second reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As the order 8, it is determined that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is the reel among the plurality of reels for which the player performs the stop operation third) is accepted, and thus the main control board M Sends a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the third reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the third reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M calculates Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is not ended and the output of the sound being settled is continued. The main control board M determines that the process related to the third reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command to be set at this time, all reels are stopped, and a command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, which is transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop, is used as an example. As a command for the sub-control board S to output a sound based on the command from the control board M, a winning combination (for example, a pushing order bell combination) in which a game medal is paid out in the Nth game is determined, and a reel stop operation is performed. Based on, the command relating to the case where the symbol combination related to the condition device that has been won is stopped and displayed (in the sixth embodiment, "command related to winning"), etc. (as a command for the next process of N games) It is also possible to configure.

As the order 9, by determining that the stop operation of all reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display pattern based on the command related to the stop of the stop display pattern, and outputs a command related to the end of the adjustment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the N-th game, the communication between both sides is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command relating to the end of settlement, and in the period from the insertion of the Nth game medal to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue outputting the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

Next, as the N+1th game, the processing proceeds to order 10 and order 11. As the order 10, as in the case of the order 1 in the N-th game, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of settlement to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs the sound of settlement from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound during the settlement output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound during the settlement output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command from the main control board M to the sub control board S based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button in the N+1 game, the sub control board S receives the settlement of the N+1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, the output of the sound during the settlement is started, while the output of the sound is finished during the settlement related to the Nth game (as the process of the sub-control board S, the settlement during the Nth game is being performed). Output of sound→Reception of command related to start of settlement of N+1th game→End output of sound during settlement of Nth game→start output of sound during settlement of N+1th game).

As the order 11, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and determines that the payout of the game medals corresponding to the number of credits is completed, thereby issuing a command relating to the settlement. Send to the sub-control board side. Based on the received command, the sub control board S executes a process of ending the output of the sound during settlement related to the (N+1)th game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off during the execution of the process accompanied by the output of the sound, the player can hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem occurs in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the game is configured to be able to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both of the game machines are temporarily turned off without an error or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the output of voice as the game proceeds.

<<<Sixth Embodiment When the processing command and the channel are not one-to-one when disconnecting the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to settlement>>>
<<Configuration 2>>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as the processing sequence 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs the sound of settlement from the speaker S20. <<Sixth embodiment Processing command when communication between main control board and sub-control board is disconnected during execution of processing related to settlement and channel is not 1:1>>>> It is assumed that the channel supports not only commands based on the detection of operation of the settlement button but also other commands (here, “error detection command by detecting door open error flag”). The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off while the sub control board S is outputting the sound of the settlement. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound during the settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of the game medals corresponding to the number of credits is completed. By making a determination, the command related to the end of the settlement is transmitted to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M to output the sound during the settlement. Perform the process to end.

In order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the end of the adjustment to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M does the adjustment. It is not possible to send the command relating to the end of the sub-control board S to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound during settlement is not ended but the output of the sound during settlement is continued. Incidentally, while the main control board M executes the settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and judges that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the main control board M and the sub-control are executed. The communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. .. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to the settlement has ended, and the N-th game Set the command related to the next process.

As the order 3, by determining that the Nth game has started and a game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M outputs the command related to the end of the settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of the adjustment from the main control board M. Because it is not possible, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the start lever operation has ended, and sets the command relating to the next processing of the Nth game.

In order 5, by determining that the rotation of the reel has started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits the command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the start of reel rotation has ended, and sets the command relating to the next processing of the Nth game.

As the order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the first reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M outputs the sound effect. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the first reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In Step 7, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation reception based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M calculates Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is not ended and the output of the sound being settled is continued. The main control board M determines that the process related to the second reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

By determining that the operation for stopping the third reel has been accepted as the order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the third reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the third reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M calculates Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is not ended and the output of the sound being settled is continued. The main control board M determines that the process related to the third reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command to be set at this time, all reels are stopped, and a command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, which is transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop, is used as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command for outputting sound based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next process of the N game).

As the order 9, by determining that the stop operation of all reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display pattern based on the command related to the stop of the stop display pattern, and outputs a command related to the end of the adjustment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the N-th game, the communication between both sides is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command relating to the end of settlement, and in the period from the insertion of the Nth game medal to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue outputting the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

Next, as the (N+1)th game, the process proceeds to order 10. It is assumed that a predetermined error has occurred in order 10. As the error at this time, a door opening error will be described as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and any error such as a charging error error, a dispensing error error, a charging acceptance sensor retention error, etc. Good. When the main control board M determines that the door opening error occurs due to the front door DU being opened, the main control board M sends an error detection command to the sub control board S by detecting the door opening error flag. The sub-control board S performs processing to output a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag. Here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door opening error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the error detection command by the detection of the door opening error flag in the N+1th game while the output of the sound being settled from the Nth game is being continued, so that the Nth game is performed. It is configured to end the output of the sound during the settlement and to start the output of the door opening error notification sound in the (N+1)th game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the processing accompanied by the output of the sound, the player can hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Further, in the case where an error occurs, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with a plurality of commands such as a command related to error detection, the error notification sound is reliably output, and the error is given to the player. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably inform that something is happening and that can terminate the output of voice as the game progresses by returning communication from both parties. You can

<<<Sixth Embodiment In the case where the processing command and the channel are one-to-one with each other when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the period when the minimum game time has not passed>>>
<<Configuration 3>>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, during the period when the minimum game time from the operation of the start lever D50 to the start of the rotation of the reels has not elapsed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled. A flow of processing in the case of being described will be described. First, in the processing sequence 1, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect (herein referred to as a weight sound) related to the start lever operation from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M. <<Sixth Embodiment Processing command at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub-control board during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed and the case where the command and the channel are 1:1>>, a wait sound is output. It is assumed that the audio channel corresponds only to the command related to the start lever operation, and does not correspond to other commands. Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the wait sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, when the communication is disconnected, the electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S such as a connection failure of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. The case in which the specific communication is disconnected is not limited to this. It may be any case as long as electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the wait sound, the main control board M is ready to start the rotation of the reel based on the operation of the start lever (here, the reel rotation start standby state). (Referred to as “start”), the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. It is configured to execute a process of ending the sound output.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. However, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M M cannot send a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it continues outputting the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. Note that, while the main control board M is executing the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in the disconnected state. However, the process performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

After the main control board M completes the processing related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has completed the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Then, the command relating to the next process of the Nth game is set.

In order 3, by determining that the rotation of the reel has started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reel rotation start based on the reception of the command related to the reel rotation start from the main control board M, while the main control board M relates to the reel rotation start standby state start. Since the command cannot be received, the wait sound output is continued without ending the wait sound output. The main control board M determines that the processing relating to the start of reel rotation has ended, and sets the command relating to the next processing of the Nth game.

As Sequence 4, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is finished and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the first reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M rotates the reel. Since the command related to the start waiting state start cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the first reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 5, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M rotates the reel. Since the command related to the start waiting state start cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the second reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 6, by determining that the operation of stopping the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while rotating the reel from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start waiting state start cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the third reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command to be set at this time, all reels are stopped, and a command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, which is transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop, is used as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command for outputting sound based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next process of the N game).

As the sequence 7, by determining that the stop operation of all reels has been performed, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the stop of the stop display symbol based on the reception of the command relating to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Since it cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the N-th game, the communication between both sides is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the sub control board S from the main control board M is a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, from the insertion of the Nth game medals to the stop operation of all reels. During the period, the weight sound is continuously output without ending the output of the weight sound.

Next, as the (N+1)th game, the process proceeds to order 8 and order 9. As the order 8, by determining that the game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while starting the reel rotation of the Nth game from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start of the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. At this time, the weight sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the weight sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M to the N+1 game to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the N+1 game reel rotation received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start standby state start, the output of the weight sound is started, while the output of the weight sound related to the Nth game is ended (the output of the weight sound related to the Nth game is performed as the process of the sub-control board S). →Receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state related to the N+1th game→End the output of the weight sound related to the Nth game→Start the output of the weight sound related to the N+1th game).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off during the execution of the process accompanied by the output of the sound, the player can hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem occurs in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the game is configured to be able to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both of the game machines are temporarily turned off without an error or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the output of voice as the game proceeds.

<<Sixth Embodiment Processing command and channel when communication is cut off between main control board and sub-control board during execution of payout processing is not 1:1>>>>
<<Configuration 4>>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disabled while the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 will be described. First, as a processing order 1, when a winning combination (for example, a push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out at the Nth game is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is the hopper H40. To the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect (herein referred to as a medal payout sound) related to the payout of the game medals from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40. <<Sixth Embodiment When the processing command and the channel when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of the payout process are not one-to-one>>>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40, but also other commands are supported (here, "command related to start lever operation"). Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the prize, and pays out the number of game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize win. By determining that the payout of the game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the medal payout from the hopper H40. It is configured to execute processing for ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In order 2, the command related to the completion of payout of medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M is in the hopper H40. Cannot send a command relating to the end of payout of medals to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal payout end from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the medal payout sound is continuously output without ending the medal payout sound output. Incidentally, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the prize, and while the judgment of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is finished, the main control of the game progresses. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

After the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the prize and determines that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40 of the number of game medals to be paid out for the prize, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the substrate S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command relating to the medal payout end from the main control board M, but the main control board M is paid out from the hopper H40 of the number of game medals to be paid out by the winning. Since it has been determined that the Nth game is completed, the command relating to the (N+1)th game is set.

Next, as the (N+1)th game, the processing proceeds to order 3 and order 4. As the sequence 3, by determining that the game medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M finishes the medal payout of the Nth game. Since the command related to is not received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 4, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Here, as described above, the command related to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state at the N+1th game while the output of the medal payout sound is continued from the Nth game, and thus the medal payout at the Nth game. The output of the sound is ended, and the output of the weight sound in the (N+1)th game is started.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off during the execution of the process accompanied by the output of the sound, the player can hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem occurs in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating with a plurality of commands such as a command related to the progress of the game, communication between the two is restored, and a user-friendly game in which voice output can be ended while the game is progressing. Machine can be provided.

<<Sixth Embodiment When the processing command and the channel are one-to-one when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of the payout processing>>>>
<<Configuration 5>>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, the main control board M and the sub-control board S are separated from the state where the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 to a predetermined period (here, the rotation of the reel is started (acceleration processing is performed)). The flow of processing when communication is disabled will be described. First, as a processing order 1, when a winning combination (for example, a push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out at the Nth game is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is the hopper H40. To the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command relating to the medal payout start from the hopper H40. <<6th Embodiment Processing Command When Communication is Disconnected Between Main Control Board and Sub Control Board During Execution of Payout Process and 1:1 Channel>> In the above, the audio channel for outputting the medal payout sound is Only the command related to the medal payout start is supported, and the other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the prize, and pays out the number of game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize win. By determining that the payout of the game medal from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the payout of the game medal from the hopper H40. Then, the processing for ending the output of the medal payout sound is executed.

In order 2, the command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M It is not possible to send a command relating to the end of payout of medals from the hopper H40 to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal payout end from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the medal payout sound is continuously output without ending the medal payout sound output. Incidentally, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the prize, and while the judgment of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is finished, the main control of the game progresses. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

Next, as the (N+1)th game, the process proceeds from order 3 to order 10. As the order 3, by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M sends a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S, but the main control board M and the sub control board Since the communication with S is in the disconnected state, the main control board M cannot transmit the command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but does not finish outputting the medal payout sound. Continue outputting medals payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub control board S is in a state in which the command related to the medal payout completion and the command related to the medal insertion acceptance cannot be received from the hopper H40. Therefore, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 is operated, but the main control board M and the sub control board S communicate with each other. Is disconnected, the main control board M cannot send a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, while the medal payout sound is not output yet. Continue outputting the payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub control board S performs a command related to the completion of the medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to the medal insertion acceptance, and a start lever operation. Since such a command cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnection state, the main control board M M cannot send a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it cannot output the weight sound, while the output of the medal payout sound is not finished and the medal payout sound is not output. Output continues. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub-control board S is related to the command related to the medal payout completion from the hopper H40, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance, and the start lever operation. Since the command and the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command relating to the completion of the medal payout from the hopper H40, a command relating to the medal insertion acceptance, a command relating to the start lever operation, and a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Although not possible, the main control board M determines that it is ready to start the rotation of the reel based on the start lever operation, and sets a command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 6, by determining that the reel rotation has started by the operation of the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reel rotation start to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while the main control board M ends the payout of medals from the hopper H40. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the (N+1)th game.

As Sequence 7, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the first reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the first reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M outputs the sound effect. Since the command relating to the medal payout end from is not received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the first reel stop operation acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the (N+1)th game.

In Step 8, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M outputs the sound effect. Since the command relating to the medal payout end from is not received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the second reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

By determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted in order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the third reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the third reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the main control board M outputs the sound effect. Since the command relating to the medal payout end from is not received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the third reel stop operation acceptance is completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the Nth game. In addition, as the next process of the N+1 game, a command relating to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40 is used for the sake of simplicity. For example, it is also possible to transmit a command related to stopping the stop display symbol, or a command related to winning.

As the order 10, in the case where the winning combination by the winning combination (for example, the pushing order bell combination) in which the game medals are paid out at the N+1th game is determined and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is output from the hopper H40. A command related to the start of payout of game medals is transmitted to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command relating to the medal payout start from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 in the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 from the main control board M to the N+1 game to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the hopper of the N+1 game from the main control board M. Output of the medal payout sound is started based on the command related to the medal payout start from H40, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is ended (as the processing of the sub-control board S, related to the Nth game). Output of medal payout sound→Reception of command related to start of medal payout from hopper H40 related to N+1th game→End output of medal payout sound related to Nth game→start output of medal payout sound related to N+1th game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off during the execution of the process accompanied by the output of the sound, the player can hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem occurs in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the game is configured to be able to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both of the game machines are temporarily turned off without an error or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the output of voice as the game proceeds.

<<Configuration related to the number that can be applied to this example>>
Here, the configuration relating to the number of internal lottery units applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Note that the following configurations are applicable to all the embodiments in this example.

First, with reference to FIG. 127, a configuration relating to a numeral unit applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not operating>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has one type BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and two types BB (sometimes referred to as MB), and a role related to one type BB (one type after winning). The symbol combination in which the BB operates is a combination that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as the 1st type BB combination), as "1st type BB single" (condition device that the 1st type BB combination wins independently) and "1. Seed BB+cherry” (a condition device in which one type BB combination and cherry are won in duplicate). In addition, as a combination of 2 types BB (a combination of symbols that activates 2 types BB after winning, it is possible to stop and display, and sometimes referred to as 2 types BB combination), "2 types BB alone" (2 types It has a condition device for the BB combination to win alone) and a "2 type BB+cherry" (a condition device for which the 2 type BB combination and the cherry are elected in duplicate).

Also, as a winning combination (a combination having a symbol combination in which game medals are paid out by stopping display), there are four types of combinations of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and the bell with the largest number of wins (10400/65536 wins) is sometimes referred to as the main minor role.

"At the time of non-operation of BB" shown in the uppermost part of the figure is a table relating to the number of characters in the state where the first-class BB and the second-class BB are not operating (sometimes referred to as a normal game state). The "inserted number" is the inserted number when it is assumed that the game is executed with a bet of three cards in order to calculate various expected values to be described later, and is a rule during the operation of the type 1 BB and the operation of the type 2 BB. The number is 2, but the "number of inputs" is 3. Further, the "payout number" is the number of game medals to be paid out when the "insertion number" is set to 3. For example, in a game at the time of operation of the type 1 BB, a bet of 2 coins results in 15 coins being paid out. However, since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15 x 3/2 = 22.5".

The “register” is a register determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and has a denominator of 65536. The "probability" is the probability that the condition device is determined by the internal lottery.

The “number of games” is the number of games required to calculate various expected values described later. For "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + cherry", "2 types BB alone", "2 types BB + cherry", 1 type BB or 2 types BB in the game won by 1 type BB or 2 types BB Since the example is shown in which the symbol combination according to is stopped and displayed, the “number of games” is 1. In addition, “1 type BB” is executed after “1 type BB alone” or “1 type BB+cherry” is won, and then 1 type BB is stopped and displayed, and then 1 type BB is executed ( The “number of games” is 24, since the case of digesting is illustrated. In addition, "2 types BB" is executed after "2 types BB alone" or "2 types BB+cherry" is won, and then 2 types BB is displayed after the symbol combination that causes the 2 types BB to operate is stopped ( The “number of games” is 8 because the example of “digest” is illustrated.

The "expected number of inputs" is an expected value of the number of insertions per game in consideration of the probability determined by the internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by "number of inputs x probability x number of games". The "expected number of payouts" is an expected value of the number of payouts per game in consideration of the probability determined by the internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by "the number of payouts x probability x number of games". There is.

The configuration in the figure may be applied to the following game.

<Game method 1>
The payout of game medals is a game method in which the game method is executed with the highest profit for the player, and is not a push order player such as a push order bell, and a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol or cherry is won. The game is executed in a stop operation mode in which a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed (winning) (the stop button operation mode, stop button operation timing, etc.). Further, in a game in which a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination) is selected, the stop operation mode in which the payout number is the largest To run the game.

<Game method 2>
In order to win the bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry that is not the push order, such as the push order bell, the stop operation mode (stop prize operation mode) in which the symbol combination with the payout of the game medal is stopped and displayed (winning) The game is executed according to the stop button pressing order, stop button operation timing, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination) is selected regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is executed. The game is executed in various stop operation modes (pressing order of the stop buttons, stop button operation timing is random). It should be noted that, for example, “random” means that all six types of pressing orders are selected at an equal ratio for the pressing order of the stop buttons, and all stop operation timings of 20 frames are selected at an equal ratio for the stopping timing. It is to be.

"Inside" is a game after winning any one of "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + cherry", "2 types BB alone", and "2 types BB + cherry", and 1 type BB Or, a game in which the symbol combination related to the type 2 BB and the bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, re-play, is not stopped and displayed (in the situation where the winning of the type 1 BB or the type 2 BB is carried over) Games that did not win the small role or replay). In the figure, in 290/65536, a game in which a small win or a re-game is not won is executed in the situation where the winning of the 1st type BB or the 2nd type BB is carried over, and the “expected number of inputs” is about 0. .013275146, and the "expected payout amount value" is zero.

<Type 1 BB is in operation>
“1 type BB in operation” shown from the top to the 2nd stage of the figure is a table relating to the number of units in the state where the 1 type BB is operating. During the operation of the first-class BB, the prescribed number is two, and it is configured to win any of the bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry without winning the loss. The number of payouts for all bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries is 15, which makes it easier to win the bell (easy to determine). In addition, one or more (or all) of the "numerical values" that will win the watermelon, the symbol, and the cherry may be configured to be the same as "when the BB is not operating". As described above, in a game in which the type 1 BB is operating, a bet of 2 cards is paid out in all games. "Number of payouts" of "1 type total" in 2) is 22.5.

<Type 2 BB in operation>
"In operation of type 2 BB" shown at the bottom of the figure is a table relating to the numbers in the state in which type 2 BB is operating. During the operation of the type 2 BB, the prescribed number is 2, and when the game is executed in a predetermined stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the pushing order of "left → middle → right"). , Only the symbol combination related to the bell is configured to be stopped and displayed. Further, when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed, the “payout amount” is 15. As described above, in a game in which the two kinds of BBs are operating, all the games are bet with 15 bets of 2 cards, so the expected number of payouts when the specified number of cards is 3 (" “Number of payouts” of “combination of two types” in 2) is 22.5.

<BB not in operation>
Again, "when the BB is not operating" will be described in detail. “No replay” means four types of winning combinations, bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and “replay included” means five types of roles: bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay. Showing. The "winning OUT" in "no replay" is a value obtained by adding up the expected payout numbers of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, and is about 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning payout rate" in "no re-play" is the "sum of expected payout numbers (winning OUT)" being the "sum of expected payout numbers of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries". It is a value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, a payout rate of the winning combination, which is about 222.8%.

The “winning OUT” in the “including replay” is a value obtained by adding up the expected value of the number of payouts of bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry and replay, and is about 1.649246216. Even if the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the game medals are not actually paid out, but when the game is executed by betting three coins and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, Since the automatic bet for three cards is executed, the “payout amount” related to the replay is three. Also, for the "winning winning rate" in "including replays", the "sum of expected payout values (prize OUT)" is added to the expected numbers of thrown bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays. It is a value obtained by dividing the value divided by "value" by 100, that is, the payout rate in which the winning combination and the re-game are added, which is about 170.5%.

The "1 type combination calculated ball ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts of "1 type combination" by the expected value of the input number by 100, and is 750.0%. The "two-type calculated ball ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts of "two-type combination" by the expected number of inputs and multiplying by 100, and is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when the above values are compared, the following relationships are established. (1) "Expected number of payouts" of "2 types combined"<Expected number of payouts of "No replay" (winning OUT) (2) "Expected number of payouts" of "2 types combined"<"Expected number of payouts" (winning OUT) (3) "Expected number of payouts" of "combination of 2 types"<Expected number of payouts of the main small win (4) "Inside""Expected number of inputs"<Expected number of inputs of main small win (5) "Expected number of inputs" of "Inside"<Expected value of input of "replay"

In addition, when the 2nd class BB operates, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB operates, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game is weakened. Therefore, as described in (1) above, by designing such that "expected payout amount of "total of two types"" <expected expected amount of payout" of "no re-play", two types of BB are operating. It is possible to raise the "expected number of payouts" for small wins, and even when the 2nd BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

In addition, when the 2nd class BB operates, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB operates, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game is weakened. Therefore, as described in (2) above, by designing such that "expected number of payouts" of "combination of two types" <expected value of number of payouts of total of "including replay", the two types of BB are operating. It is possible to raise the "expected number of payouts" for small wins, and even when the 2nd BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

In addition, when the 2nd class BB operates, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB operates, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game is weakened. Therefore, as described in (3) above, by designing "expected number of payouts" of "combination of two types" <expected value of number of payouts of the main small winning combination, the main smaller than that during operation of the two types BB. It is possible to increase the "expected number of payouts" of the winning combination, and even when the BB is operating, the BB is not in operation (bonus is operating) but is not in operation (bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

As a gaming machine having one or a plurality of configurations (1) to (3) above, the prescribed number is set to 2 and the average payout number per game is set to 2 during the operation of the type 2 BB. It may be configured to reduce the payout rate (the calculated two-type rate) during the two-type BB operation. With such a configuration, the effects of the above configurations (1) to (3) are further enhanced.

Further, in the “inside”, when a player with a low skill level such as a player who cannot press is playing the game, the symbol combination relating to the winning 1st class BB or 2nd class BB cannot be stopped and displayed, There is concern that low players will suffer significant disadvantages. Therefore, as described in (4) above, by designing such that "expected number of inputs" of "inside medium" <expected value of number of inputs of main small win, even in "inside inside" main small win It is possible to increase the ratio of games that Bell wins, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which no disadvantage is likely to occur even when a player with a low skill plays a game.

Further, in the “inside”, when a player with a low skill level such as a player who cannot press is playing the game, the symbol combination relating to the winning 1st class BB or 2nd class BB cannot be stopped and displayed, There is concern that low players will suffer significant disadvantages. Therefore, as described in (5) above, by designing such that “expected input value” of “inside” <expected value of input” of “replay”, replay is possible even during “inside”. It is possible to increase the ratio of games won by, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which no disadvantage is likely to occur even when a player with a low skill plays a game.

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, the gaming machine having the configuration according to the present embodiment to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment has been described. These configurations from the present example to the sixth embodiment can be appropriately combined and configured. Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine combined across the configurations according to the present example and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment Are listed.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in the present example, <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>>>> configuration related to <configuration 1> of execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight> and << in the third embodiment <Third Embodiment An example of a medal addition process by an insertion sensor>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. It is possible to surely prevent such a situation that the credit cannot be added in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, but when an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent a gaming medal from entering (swallowing) the gaming machine even though it is not running.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, the configuration according to <configuration 1> in <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>, and <<configuration<< in the fourth embodiment <Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. It is possible to reliably prevent such a situation that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 inward of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal colliding with the collision part is Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the situation of bouncing up to the medal receiving slot D341.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in the present example, the configuration according to <configuration 1> of <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>, and <<configuration in the fifth embodiment, <<Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Dispensing Device>>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. It is possible to reliably prevent such a situation that when a player who receives a payout of game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medals can be paid out from the first to the predetermined number at the same interval. Thus, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a player a feeling of strangeness.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, the configuration according to <configuration 1> of <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight> in the present example, and <<<configuration in the sixth embodiment <Sixth Embodiment Processing command and channel when communication is disconnected between main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing related to settlement> When the configuration is related to <<configuration 1>> of >> A gaming machine configured by combining the above.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while the processing accompanied by the output of the sound can be surely prevented, the player can hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>> in Third Embodiment; and <<<<<< Fourth in Fourth Embodiment Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the medal returning member >>>>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, in a state in which the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing is not yet performed, but in the case where an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to prevent the game medal from entering (swallowing) in the game machine even though the game medal is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the game machine inside direction is relative to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a sufficient distance and that can prevent the situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision section bounces up to the medal receiving port D341.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>> in Third Embodiment, and <<<<<Fifth Embodiment in fifth embodiment. Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the drive control of the medal payout device >>>>>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing is not yet performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to prevent the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even if the game medals are not executed, and when the player receiving the game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals. It is possible to provide payout of game medals from the first to a predetermined number at the same interval, and to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a player a feeling of strangeness.

<Combination configuration 7>
For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>> in Third Embodiment, and <<<<Sixth Embodiment in Sixth Embodiment Configuration Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to settlement In case of one-to-one channel >>> Configuration configured by <<configuration 1>> Game machine

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing is not yet performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. It is possible to prevent the game medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though the game is not executed, and while the process accompanied by the output of the sound is being executed, the main control board M and When the communication with the sub-control board S is cut off, the player does not finish outputting the voice, and thus the user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that there is no problem in the gaming machine. Can be provided.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<the fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and <<<<<fifth embodiment drive control of the medal payout device>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to >>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 inward of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal colliding with the collision portion. However, it is possible to prevent the situation of bouncing back up to the medal entrance D341, and when the player receiving the payout of the game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the same interval from the first to the predetermined number. Thus, it is possible to receive the payout of the game medals, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine which does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

<Combination configuration 9>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<the fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and <<the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication between the control board and the sub-control board and the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> of >>>>>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 inward of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal colliding with the collision portion. However, it is possible to prevent the situation of bouncing back up to the medal receiving port D341, and during the processing accompanied by the output of the voice, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. In this case, since the player does not finish outputting the voice, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 10>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<fifth embodiment: medal payout device drive control>>>>>> in the fifth embodiment, and <<<sixth embodiment: execution of processing related to settlement in the sixth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub-control board and the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> of >>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a player who receives a payout of game medals pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medals can be paid out from the first to the predetermined number at the same intervals. Therefore, if the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the processing accompanied by the output of the sound is being performed without giving the player a feeling of discomfort, Since the output of the above does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 11>
For example, in the present example, <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><configuration 1 related to <execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>, and <<configuration in the third embodiment>><Third Embodiment <Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> Configuration related to <<<Configuration 1>>> and <<<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the above-described configuration.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. It is possible to surely prevent such a situation that the credit cannot be added in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, but when an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. The game medals are prevented from entering (swallowing) inside the game machine even though they have not been executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of preventing the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision section bounces up to the medal receiving port D341.

<Combination configuration 12>
For example, in the present example, <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>>>> configuration related to <configuration 1> of execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight> and << in the third embodiment <Third Embodiment <Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>><Configuration1>>> and <<<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment with the configuration according to <<<<<fifth embodiment drive control of medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. It is possible to surely prevent such a situation that the credit cannot be added in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, but when an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. The game medals are prevented from entering (swallowing) inside the game machine even though they have not been executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces up to the medal receiving port D341, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal receives a predetermined number of game medals. When paying out, it is possible to receive the payout of the game medals from the first to the predetermined number at the same interval, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

<Combination structure 13>
For example, in the present example, <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>>>> configuration related to <configuration 1> of execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight> and << in the third embodiment <Third Embodiment <Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>><Configuration1>>> and <<<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>>> in the fourth embodiment Configuration related to <<<<<Fifth Embodiment: Drive control of medal payout device>>>>>> in the fifth embodiment and <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing related to settlement in the sixth embodiment When a communication command between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of the command and the channel is one-to-one >>>>> the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> To do.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the push-order navigation is recognized regardless of which of the display devices the player sees because the timing of starting the push-order navigation on both the push-order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. It is possible to surely prevent such a situation that the credit cannot be added in the state where the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, but when an error occurs at this timing, The CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to refund the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be performed in time, and the credit addition process is performed. The game medals are prevented from entering (swallowing) inside the game machine even though they have not been executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces up to the medal receiving port D341, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal receives a predetermined number of game medals. When paying out, the first to a predetermined number of game medals can be paid out at the same intervals, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable and the main process is performed while the process accompanied by the output of the voice is being executed. When the communication between the control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the player does not finish outputting the voice, and can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine. A friendly game machine can be provided.

<Combination configuration 14>
For example, the configuration according to <configuration 3> of <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight> in the present example, and <<<configuration in the third embodiment Third Embodiment An example of a game machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>>.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the push-order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→period when the minimum game time has not passed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant). By setting the speed state→the period until the operation of the stop switch is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push-order navigation lights the lamp (book). In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 can be lit) or the like, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing order navigation, and the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on. In the state, the credit addition process is not yet performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turn off the blocker D100). Then, the game medal is prevented from being swallowed (swallowed) in spite of the fact that the execution process of the refund of the game medal to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100 is not in time and the credit addition process is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that enables the game.

<Combination configuration 15>
For example, in the present example, <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>>>> configuration related to <configuration 3> of execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight, and << in the fourth embodiment <<4th Embodiment Medal Returning Member>>>> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the push-order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→period when the minimum game time has not passed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant). By setting the speed state→the period until the operation of the stop switch is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push-order navigation lights the lamp (book). In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on), and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing order navigation, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a gaming medal. A user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of and can prevent the situation where the first game medal colliding with the collision part bounces up to the medal receiving port D341. Can be provided.

<Combination structure 16>
For example, in the present example, the configuration according to <configuration 3> of <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>, and <<configuration in the fifth embodiment <<Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Dispensing Device>>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the push-order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→period when the minimum game time has not passed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant). By setting the speed state→the period until the operation of the stop switch is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push-order navigation lights the lamp (book). In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on) and the like, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing order navigation, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal has a predetermined number of game medals. When the payout is made, it is possible to receive the payout of the game medals from the first to the predetermined number at the same intervals, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

<Combination configuration 17>
For example, in the present example, <<configuration related to display start of push-order navigation>><configuration 3 related to <execution mode of push-order navigation when there is no weight>, and <<configuration in the sixth embodiment>><Sixth Embodiment When the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the processing related to settlement, the processing command and the channel are one-to-one>>>, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> A gaming machine configured by combining the above.

<Effect>
With such a configuration, the start timing of the push-order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→period when the minimum game time has not passed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant). By setting the speed state→the period until the operation of the stop switch is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push-order navigation lights the lamp (book). In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 can be lit) and the like, and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push-order navigation, and while performing the process accompanied by the output of the sound, When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the player can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine because the output of the voice does not end. It is possible to provide a user-friendly amusement machine.

<Combination structure 18>
For example, in the configuration according to <<<configuration related to end of display of push-order navi>>> in the present example and << in the third embodiment <<Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>> of the third embodiment>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <Structure 1>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player has to visually recognize at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden on the player that the operator can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. In the state where the closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition processing is not yet performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error. , A predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and returning the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is not executed, but the game medal is executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of preventing the player from getting into the gaming machine (swallowing).

<Combination structure 19>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display end of push-order navigation>>, and the configuration related to <<<<<< medal return member of fourth embodiment>>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining them.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the player has to visually check at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden on the player to visually confirm the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs, and the medal drop A situation in which the depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal colliding with the collision part bounces up to the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine capable of preventing the above.

<Combination configuration 20>
For example, according to <<configuration related to display termination of push-order navigation>> in this example, and <<control related to driving of medal payout device>> in fifth embodiment>> according to fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the player has to visually recognize at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. When a player receiving a predetermined number of game medals is paid out, the player can receive the game medals from the first to a predetermined number of coins at the same intervals, so that the player does not feel discomfort. A game machine can be provided.

<Combination configuration 21>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display termination of push-order navigator>>, and <<in the sixth embodiment<<<<Sixth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case of 1:1 channel>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation in which the player has to visually recognize at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while the process accompanied by the output is being executed, the player does not finish the output of the voice, so that the player does not know what to do in the game machine. A user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize that a problem has not occurred can be provided.

<Combination configuration 22>
For example, in the configuration of <<<configuration relating to reel control and pushing order navigation>>>> in the present example, and << of the third embodiment <<Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>> in the third embodiment>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <Structure 1>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push-order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be next stopped is pressed while the reel is being stopped. Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for a player's unintended disadvantage, such as the player not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the pushing order, etc. If the addition process is not performed, but an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, by turning off the blocker D100, It is possible to prevent the game medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though the execution process of paying out the game medal to the outlet D240 is not in time and the credit addition process is not executed. A user-friendly game machine can be provided.

<Combination configuration 23>
For example, in this example, the configuration relating to <<configuration relating to reel control and push-order navigation>> and the configuration relating to <<<<<< medal return member of the fourth embodiment>>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining them.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push-order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be next stopped is pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for a player's unintended disadvantage such as the maximum winning number not being obtained due to a mistake in pushing order, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is relative to the diameter of the gaming medal. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance and that can prevent a situation in which the first game medal colliding with the collision part bounces up to the medal receiving port D341. ..

<Combination configuration 24>
For example, according to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and <<<<<<fifth embodiment drive control of medal payout device>>>>>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push-order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be next stopped is pressed while the reel is being stopped. Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for the player's unintended disadvantages such as not getting the maximum number of coins due to mistakes in pushing order, etc. Since it is possible to receive the payout of the game medals from the first to the predetermined number at the same interval, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine which does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push-order navigation>>, and <<in the sixth embodiment<<<<Sixth embodiment Main control board and sub-board during execution of processing related to settlement It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case of 1:1 channel>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push-order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be next stopped is pressed while the reel is being stopped. Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for a player's unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of cards to be obtained due to a mistake in the pushing order, etc. When the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player does not finish outputting the voice, and thus the user-friendly game that enables the player to recognize that there is no problem in the game machine. Machine can be provided.

The example of the gaming machine combined with the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment has been described above, but these are examples, and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is appropriately changed from the configuration according to the present example. , Can be configured in combination.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments is added to these concepts, not to mention the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1),
It has a strip-shaped reel tape (for example, reel strip MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (for example, reel frame MW),
In the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
As the types of the symbols, at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second symbol is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
A length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than an outer circumference of a surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2),
With the gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the main body of the gaming machine so as to be openable and closable,
In a spinning drum type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal (for example, pedestal BU) on which the reel unit is installed,
A main tank member (for example, a hopper H40) installed below the pedestal part and storing a game medium,
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) that is installed near the main tank member and is used to evacuate the surplus game medium stored in the main tank member,
A slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided in a part of the main tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is positioned vertically below the locking component at the position closest to the side where the front door is opened and closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3),
With the gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the main body of the gaming machine so as to be openable and closable,
In a spinning drum type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal (for example, pedestal BU) on which the reel unit is installed,
A main tank member (for example, a hopper H40) installed below the pedestal part and storing a game medium,
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) that is installed near the main tank member and is used to evacuate the surplus game medium stored in the main tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, screw BS),
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is positioned vertically below the locking component at a position closest to the side where the front door is opened and closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50),
A plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40),
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects (for example, effect display device S40),
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing the display content of the effect is provided,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. It is possible to end one game by performing the final stop switch operation which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, a , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after the end of one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time elapses with the predetermined image displayed from a specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operation member. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50),
A plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40),
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects (for example, effect display device S40),
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing the display content of the effect is provided,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. It is possible to end one game by performing the final stop switch operation which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, a , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after the end of one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time elapses with the predetermined image displayed from a specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operation member. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined image is displayed by operating the predetermined operation member, the second predetermined time is kept displayed from the predetermined timing after the operation of the predetermined operation member. When a specific operation member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the lapse of time, the predetermined image remains displayed from the specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operation member. 2 Even after the predetermined time has passed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly added before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the operation is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. Consists of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, betting is performed before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. , Even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation has been performed, the effect display unit is configured not to display the specific image. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A setting switch (e.g., setting) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and operated to shift to a setting change mode (e.g., setting change mode) in which a setting value relating to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed. Key switch) and
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute an interrupt process, which is a process executed at predetermined time intervals,
Power is cut off in a predetermined game state that is not in the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the mode is changed to the setting changing mode. After the power is cut off, when the setting switch is turned off and the power supply to the gaming machine is started, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
Power is cut off in a predetermined game state that is not in the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not supplied to the gaming machine, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, If power is cut off before the predetermined time has elapsed, and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) that is provided corresponding to each reel and that is operated by the player when the rotation of the reel is stopped,
A storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game medium within a predetermined number of ranges,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs effect sound;
It is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the output of the effect,
The main game department is
Role lottery means for executing lottery of roles,
A reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to a winning combination drawing result by the winning combination drawing means when the stop switch is operated,
A storage number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means,
It is possible to execute a payout process for executing a payout of a game medium,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium can be given to the player,
In the situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the storage number increase process is executed. It is configured to execute payout processing without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the storage number increasing process is executed and the payout process is not executed.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium of No. is given, it is configured to execute the payout process after executing the storage number increasing process,
The main game department is
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium addition information can be transmitted to the sub game unit,
The sub-game department
Based on the reception of the game medium giving information, a game medium giving sound, which is an effect sound relating to the giving of the game medium, can be output from the speaker,
In the situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the game medium giving information Based on the reception of the predetermined game medium addition sound (for example, the game medium addition sound output when the credit is increased by 1, the game medium addition sound output when paying out one game medal) Can be output,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the predetermined game medium addition sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium is added, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium addition sound based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
During execution of the storage number increasing process, a time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A+1 and N (N is a natural number, 2≦N ) M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N−1)) M payout process is started during execution of the payout process for paying out game media The game machine is characterized in that the time value until the start of the payout process relating to the game medium of the eyes is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the effect,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on when performing production,
A setting value display section (for example, setting display LED) capable of displaying the setting value,
The gaming lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77),
The lighting time pattern is a combination of lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and extinguishing time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77),
It has a plurality of the lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting time, has a plurality of turn-off time,
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be performed when a predetermined abnormality occurs, a second lighting pattern that can be performed when the set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a set value display that is not during the predetermined abnormal state And a third lighting pattern that can be performed when the set value is not displayed in the section,
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9),
A storage means capable of electrically storing a game medium within a predetermined number of ranges (for example, in this example, a game medal can be electrically stored as a credit in a game machine),
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting the game media stored in the storage means, and which is capable of betting a plurality of game media,
A predetermined lamp (for example, a 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number of bets per game in a predetermined game state, which is the maximum bet number, has been bet,
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective,
Equipped with a role determination means that can determine the winning role,
As a winning combination determined by the combination determining means, a re-gaming combination can be determined,
In the predetermined game state, the re-play combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game medium stored in the storage means and the bet number is the specified number or more, And when the bet number is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light up,
In a situation where the specific lamp is turned on, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect,
It seems that the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the program of the main gaming section is started is longer than the time from the power failure to the end of power supply to the gaming machine. Is configured,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the program of the main gaming section is activated is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the program of the secondary gaming section. It is a game machine characterized by being configured as described above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the internal drawing means determines a specific result different from the predetermined result, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped. , Even after the situation that the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. It is a game machine characterized in that it is configured not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the internal drawing means determines a specific result different from the predetermined result, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped. , Even if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation, and the power-off process based on the detection of power-off is executed, the predetermined symbol is also displayed. It is a game machine characterized in that it is configured not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute freezes that delay the progress of the game,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In the predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) is configured to be executable,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Despite being stopped at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. Are

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's After the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation at a specific timing, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's Despite being stopped at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value Is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of whether

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different from the first drawing state,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
It is a game executed when it is in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. It is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, it is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state.
It is a game executed when it is in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. Despite being stopped and stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation The game machine is characterized in that it can be shifted to the second drawing state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
The reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (for example, a re-playing lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result are provided,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's Even after the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that the lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
The reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (for example, a re-playing lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result are provided,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power is supplied. It is a game machine characterized in that the predetermined lamp is configured to light up after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8),
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs effect sound;
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the player's N-1th reel, and the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to output a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific game state, a predetermined rotation for the N-1th reel despite the stop operation being performed at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel by the player. A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that a predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped due to a defect. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
A storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range,
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and which can bet a plurality of game values,
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective,
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, it is not notified that the specific lamp is effective. Is configured,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols have been stopped, respectively, even though the player has been stopped at the specific timing as the final stop operation thereafter, the specific is determined due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to notify that the specific lamp is effective even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
A storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range,
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and which can bet a plurality of game values,
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective,
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, it is not notified that the specific lamp is effective. Is configured,
One or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the specific symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and despite the fact that the player performed a stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation thereafter, the power-off time processing based on the detection of the power-off causes the processing to be performed. Even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is not notified that the specific lamp is effective after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
A storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range,
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and which can bet a plurality of game values,
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective,
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
At least one game medium is stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, it is notified that the specific lamp is effective. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination have been stopped, respectively, and the predetermined stop to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed as the final stop operation of the player thereafter at the predetermined timing. The gaming machine is characterized in that even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a rotation failure, the notification that the specific lamp is effective is configured.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
A storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range,
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and which can bet a plurality of game values,
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective,
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
At least one game medium is stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, it is notified that the specific lamp is effective. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations have been stopped, and the power-off process based on the power-off detection is executed despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. The gaming machine is characterized in that even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is effective is made after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a game state, it has at least a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute freezes that delay the progress of the game,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination,
When the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the end of bonus) can be executed,
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels, and then the player stops the game at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation by the player. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine that does.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a game state, it has at least a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute freezes that delay the progress of the game,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
When the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the end of bonus) can be executed,
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels, and then the player stops the game at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation by the player. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal drawing means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by that.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. Is configured as
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the internal drawing means determines a specific result different from the predetermined result, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped. , After that, the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured so as not to give the game value corresponding to the above to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. Is configured as
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the internal drawing means determines a specific result different from the predetermined result, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped. After that, after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and the power-off process based on the detection of power-off is executed, the predetermined symbol is displayed. It is a game machine characterized in that it is configured not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol has been stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Is configured to run,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, in each reel, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped. , After the final stop operation by the player, the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game cannot be executed regardless of being played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol has been stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Is configured to run,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's Despite being stopped at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured so that the next game can be executed irrespective of whether the game is input.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a game state, it has at least a special game transferable state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute freezes that delay the progress of the game,
In the game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
After the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, until the specific symbol combination is stopped, it is configured to be in the special game transitionable state,
In the predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by the stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped respectively. After that, after the special symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
Not in the special game transitionable state, and in the game in which the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means has a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Each is stopped, and then the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, The gaming machine is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute freezes that delay the progress of the game,
In the game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by the stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped respectively. As a final stop operation of the player thereafter, after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Despite being stopped at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different from the first drawing state,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game that is executed in the first drawing state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels respectively, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the second symbol is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the drawing state,
It is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the specific symbol combination on each reel. The symbols corresponding to are stopped, respectively, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and symbols other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured so as not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute freezes that delay the progress of the game,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
In the predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Despite the stop operation at the timing, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the power-off time process based on the detection of power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
The reel control means, in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's After the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation at a specific timing, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the subsequent player's Even if a stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power is supplied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different from the first drawing state,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
It is a game executed when it is in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. It is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, it is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state.
It is a game executed when it is in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. It has been stopped, and despite the fact that it was stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off was executed, so that the symbols other than the specific symbol combination were executed. Even when a combination is displayed, the gaming machine is characterized in that it can be shifted to the second drawing state after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4),
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs effect sound;
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the processing at power failure,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the predetermined symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player is a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination Are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off time process based on the detection of the power interruption, the power source is turned on. After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player,
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the player's N-1th reel, and the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to output a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific game state, the power-off process based on the detection of power-off despite the stop operation being performed at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel by the player By executing the above, even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped, it is configured to be able to output the predetermined effect sound from the speaker after the power is restored. Is a gaming machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53),
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different from the first drawing state,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the stop operation of the player,
In the game that is executed in the first drawing state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels respectively, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the second symbol is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the drawing state,
It is a game executed when it is in the first drawing state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, respectively. Despite being stopped and stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation The game machine is characterized in that it can be shifted to the second drawing state even after is displayed.

P-turn body game machine, DU front door (door)
D door substrate, D10s loading acceptance sensor D20s first loading sensor, D30s second loading sensor D40 stop button, D41 left stop button D42 middle stop button, D43 right stop button D50 start lever, D60 adjustment button D70 display panel, D80 door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal insertion slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 input number display lamp D220 Bet button, D230 medal tray D240 outlet, D250 special game state display device D260 keyhole, D270 payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving port D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-fall surface M Main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting/reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game interval minimum timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 back drum backlight S40 performance display device, SC sub-control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disc, H50a disc rotating shaft H60 game medal exit, H70 ejection biasing means H80 hopper motor S50 bet button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K spinning drum substrate , K10 rotation cylinder motor K20 rotation cylinder sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high security obstacle counter, YKc-1 advantageous zone remaining game counter FZt freeze execution timer RU reel unit, BU base part, H62 discharge guide part, H64 Inclined surface HS Medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE Full detection electrode M55 First end portion, M57 Second end portion, M58 overlapping portion, M59 Cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

With multiple reels with multiple types of symbols,
A stop switch that is provided corresponding to each of the reels and that is operated by the player when the rotation of the reel is stopped,
Storage means capable of electrically storing the game medium within a predetermined number of ranges,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A speaker that outputs performance sound,
Equipped with a sub game unit that controls the output of the effect,
The main game department is
Role lottery means for executing lottery of roles,
A reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to a winning combination drawing result by the winning combination drawing means when the stop switch is operated,
A storage number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means,
It is possible to execute a payout process for executing a payout of a game medium,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium can be given to the player,
In the situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the storage number increase process is executed. It is configured to execute payout processing without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the storage number increasing process is executed and the payout process is not executed.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium of No. is given, it is configured to execute the payout process after executing the storage number increasing process,
The main game department is
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium addition information can be transmitted to the sub game unit,
The sub-game department
Based on the reception of the game medium giving information, a game medium giving sound, which is an effect sound relating to the giving of the game medium, can be output from the speaker,
In the situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is given, the game medium giving information It is possible to output a predetermined game medium addition sound based on the reception of
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the predetermined game medium addition sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium is added, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium addition sound based on the reception of the game medium addition information,
During execution of the storage number increasing process, a time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A+1 and N (N is a natural number, 2≦N ) M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N−1)) M payout process is started during execution of the payout process for paying out game media A game machine characterized in that the time value until the start of the payout process for the game medium of the eyes is different.

Images